United States.
       Environmental Protection
       Agency
Office of Water (WH 4304)
Washington. DC 20460
EPA822-B-S4-001
September 1994
&EPA  BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA.  w ^ " L
       Technical Guidance for
       Streams and Small Rivers
                                 Printed on Recycled Paper

-------

-------
 BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA
 Technical Guidance  for
 Streams and Small Rivers
Project Leader and Editor   —•
Dr. George R. Gibson, Jr.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Science and Technology
fiealth and Ecological Criteria Division
401 M Street, SW (4304)
Washington, DC 20460
Principal Authors

Dr. Michael T. Barbour, Principal Scientist
Dr. James B. Stribling, Senior Scientist
Dr. Jeroen Gerritsen, Principal Scientist
TetraTech, Inc.
10045 Red Run Boulevard, Suite 110
OwingsMill, MD21117

Dr. James R. Karr, Director
Institute for Environmental Studies
Engineering Annex.FM-12
University of Washington
Seattle, WA 98195

-------
3IC$.GG:CAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                               Prepared by JT&A, inc., and Abt Associates for the U.S. Environ-
                               mental Protection Agency. Points of view expressed in this publica-
                               tion do not necessarily reflect  the views or policies  of  the U.S.
                               Environmental Protection Agency, nor does mention of trade names
                               or commercial products constitute an endorsement or recommenda-
                               tion for their use.
                                  Address comments or suggestions related to this document to
                                                  Dr. George R. Gibson, Jir.
                                            U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                                               Office of Science and Technology
                                            Health and Ecological Criteria Division
                                                   401 M Street, SW (4304)
                                                   Washington, DC 20460

-------
                 1           *       '•%'"'

          Acknowledgments
       Dr. George Gibson of the Office of Science and Technology's Health
       and Ecological Criteria Division is project leader and principal edi-
       tor of this document whose principal authors are consultants Drs.
 Michael Barbour, James Stribling, Jercxm Genitsen, and James Karr.
    Dr. Phil Larsen of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Envi-
 ronmental Research  Laboratory in  Corvallis, Oregon;  and Dr. David
 Courtemanch of the Department of Environmental Protection in Augusta,
 Maine, also provided valuable insights and wrote portions of the docu-
 ment. Staff from  several program offices in the Office of Water provided
 expert advice and  made comments  on the text, and Rachel Reeder of
 JT&A, inc., helped  weave the text with its multiple contributions into a
 more cogent document.          —
    Many others also contributed to the writing of this document and de-
 serve special  thanks: first and  foremost, the  Streams Biocriteria Work-
 group. The Workgroup, composed of state and EPA biologists, members of
 academic institutions, and other consultants, helped provide the frame-
 work for the basic approach and served as primary reviewers of the manu-
 script. Next, our special thanks to those scientists who responded to our
 request for peer review and to the members of the Ecological Processes
 and Effects Committee of the Science Advisory Board (SAB), who also re-
 viewed the manuscript and prepared an insightful critique. We sincerely
 appreciate the contribution of their valuable time and constructive advice.
 Their comments have greatly improved the final document

 Streams Biocriteria Workgroup

 • George R. Gibson, Ph.D., Workgroup Chair, U.S. EPA Health and Ecological
  Criteria Division  •
 • Michael Barbour, Ph.D., Tetra Tech, Inc.                           :
 • Ed ward Bender,Ph.D., U.S. EPA Science Advisory Board    .
 • Lawrence Douglas, PhD., University of Maryland
 • Chris Faulkner, U.S. EPA Assessment and Watershed Protection Division
 • James Karr, Ph.D., University of Washington, Institute for Environmental Studies
• D. Phil Larsen, Ph.D., LJ.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory, Coroallis
? James Lazorchak, U.S. EPA Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory,
  Cincinnati
• Dave Penrose, North Carolina DEM, Environmental Services Laboratory
• James O. Peterson, Ph.D., University of Wisconsin
• Ron Preston, U.S. EPA Region 3, Wheeling Division
• Stephanie Sanzone, U.S. EPA Science Advisory Board
• Christopher Zarba,  U.S. EPA Health and Ecological Criteria Division

-------

-------
                      Contents
Acknowledgments	 iii
List of Figures			...................viii
List of Tables			.-.-,	 xl

CHAPTER 1: Introduction	..-.	.'.... .1
The Concept of Biocriteria .....	.,. .2
The Development, Validation, and Implementation
Process for Biocriteria	..,.......... \.		3
Characteristics of Effective Biocriteria ... 1	.8
Examples of Biocriteria...	..................................	9
   Narrative Biological Criteria ......_,........			.............. .9
   Numeric Biological Criteria		...	................. .10
Other Biocriteria Reference Documents  ...........		 11
Suggested Readings	.........;	— .11

CHAPTER 2: Components of Blocritoria	.',.	 .13
Conceptual Framework and Underlying Theory			.. 13
   Components of Biological Integrity		. <. .14
   Assessing Biological Integrity .....		.16 '
   Complex Nature of Anthropogenic Impacts „	17
The Biocriteria Development Process .	.......................	19
Suggested Readings	.23

CHAPTER 3: The Reference Condition ............,	 .25
Establishing the Reference Condition .................;	.25
The Use of Reference Sites	,			27
Characterizing Reference Conditions		30
    Classification			........30
    Framework for Preliminary Classification ......		 .31
    Site Selection .	.',-..;..'...'	.......;............. .37
    Confirmation		Y....,..'	 .39
Suggested Readings	,....-.. —		.. .42

CHAPTER 4: Conducting the Bionurvey	43
The Quality Assurance Plan	44
Quality Management		............:. .45
    Biocriteria Program Structure, Personnel, and Resources	.45
    Quality Control Elements in an Ecological Study ...		.48
    Data Quality Objectives			 .52
Study Design		..............	..........53
Biosurveys of Targeted Assemblages 	....,;		 .54

-------
BlQLOdlUAL UHIJEHIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                 Attributes of Selected Assemblages	54
                                 Synthesis	'	57
                             Technical Issues	58
                                 Selection of the Proper Sampling Periods	59
                                . Selection of Habitat for Aquatic Assemblage Evaluations	65
                                 Substrate Choices	....			68
                                 Natural and Artificial Substrates	69
                             Standardization of Techniques	70
                                 Sample Collection	70
                                 Sample Processing	.71
                             Suggested Readings	72
                             CHAPTER 5: Evaluating Environmental Effects	75
                             Water Quality	i	.75
                             Habitat Structure	.. 77
                                 Habitat Quality and Biological Condition	80
                                 Development of Habitat Assessment Approach			81
                             Flow. Regime	.82
                             Energy Source	85
                             Biotici Interactions	 .x	87
                             Cumulative Impacts ......'....	,		... .87
                             Suggested Readings	 89
                             CHAPTER 6: Multimetrlc Approaches for Blocrltoria Development  91
                             Metric Evaluation and Calibration	92
                             Biocriteria Based on a Multimetric Approach  	95
                             Potential Metrics for Fish and Macroinvertebrates	99
                                 Index Development	104
                                 Other Developments			107
                             Suggested Readings	107

                             CHAPTER 7: Biocriteria Development and Implementation	109
                             Establishing Regional Biocriteria	.109
                             Designing the Actual Criterion	110
                             Biocriteria for Significantly Impacted Areas	112
                             Selecting the Assessment Site	112
                             Evaluating the Site Assessment	114
                             Overview of Selected State Biocriteria Programs	.117
                             Costs for State Programs Developing Bioassessments and Biocriteria	122
                             Value of Biocriteria in Assessing Impairment	126
                             Suggested Readings	130
                             CHAPTER 8: Applications of Biocriteria	131
                             Aquatic Resource Characterization	131
                                 Case Study — North Carolina —	132
                             Refining Aquatic Life Uses	 133
                             Judging Use Impairment	135
                                 Case Study — Ohio	136
                             Diagnosing Impairment Types	137

-------
    Case Study — Delaware
Compliance Monitoring......
    Case, Study — Maine
Suggested Readings  .......
    Contacts for Case Studies
Glossary	.........	
Reference)!  .		,
.139
.139
.141
.143
.143
.145

.151

-------

-------
3>GL.-3GiC*L ^niitfilA. -•••••             '  -
Tec'nmcal Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                                 List  of Figures
                                Figure t-1.—Model for biocriteria development and application	..	4

                                Figure 2-1.—Conceptual model showing the interrelationships of the primary
                                variables relative to the integrity of an aquatic biota. External refers to
                                features outside the stream system; internal to in-stream features (Karr.
                                1991). Terrestrial environment includes factors such as geology, topography,
                                soil, and vegetation.	..	 18

                                Figure 2-2.—Organizational structure of tho attributes that should  be
                                incorporated into biological assessments.  .................................. 19

                                Rgure 3-1 .-—Approach to establishing reference conditions.	 28

                                Figure 3-2.—Reciprocal averaging ordination of sites by fish species in the
                                Calapooia River watershed, Oregon. The inset shows the correspondence
                                between-fish assemblages in the rivers and ecoregions	 35

                                Figure 3-3.—Generalized box-and-whisker plots illustrating percentiles and
                                the detection coefficient of metrics.	 39

                                Figure 3-4.—Index of Biotic Integrity at Ohio reference sites.  .......		41

                                Rgure 3-5.—Fish species richness as a function of the tog of watershed
                                area. Bars to right indicate range of'observations before regression and
                                range of residuals after regression. Residuals have smaller variance than .
                                the origins] observations.			 41

                                Rgure 4-1 .—Organization chart illustrating project organization  and lines of
                                responsibility.	 48

                                Figure 4-2.—Summary of Data Quality Objective (OQO) process'for
                                ecological studies (taken from Barbour and Thomley, 1990).	 — 52

                                Rgure 4-3.—Classification of U.S. climatological regions.	 61
                                         ' '           '   -      '.              -                ""  /•
                                Rgure 4-4.—Biological and hydrological factors for sampling period selection
                                in the Northeast (macroinvertebrates). The gray area is the overlap between
                                emergence and recruitment.	63

                                Rgure 4-5.—Biological and hydrological factors for sampling period selection
                                in the Northeast (fish)	,..'..-		',	 64

                                Figure 5-1.—Rve major classes of environmental factors that affect aquatic
                                biota in lotic systems. Right column lists selected expected results of
                                anthropogenic perturbation (Karr et al. 1986).		76

                                Rgure 5-2.—Decision matrix for application of rapid btoassessments in
                                Arkansas for permitted point source discharges (Shackleford, 1988). ........... 78

                                Rgure 5-3.—Qualitative Habitat Evaluation Index (QHEI) versus Index of
                                Biotic Integrity (IBI) for 465 relatively unimpacted and habitat modified Ohio
                                stream sites (Rankin, 1991)	•,••••	 80

                                Rgure 5-4.—Choptank and Chester rivers tributaries (Primrose et al. 1991).  	81

-------

-------
                                                                                                  Contents
                  List  of Tables
Table 2-1.—Components of biological integrity (modified from Karr, 1990). ..	. 15

Table 3-1.—Hierarchical classification of stream riparian habitats (from
Minshall, 1993; afterFrissell etal. 1986)	....,...;.....	.....v	34

Table 4-1.—Quality control elements integral to activities in ah ecological
study in sequence.	 „.-.	 i.-.......... .49

Table 4-2.—Common benthfc habitats			 68

Table 4-3.—Proposed,minimal levels of taxonomic resolution for stream
macroinvertebrates (taken from Sci. Advis. Board. 1933).	 72

Table 5-1.—Parameters that may be useful in evaluating environmental
conditions and their relationship to geographic scales and the environmental
factors influenced by human actions.	.79

Table 6-1.— Sequential progression of trie"bkwriteria process.....;........... .99

Table 6-2.—Index of Blotic Integrity metrics used in various regions of North
America.		.. —•..	.'......... 101

Table 6-3.—Examples of metric suites used for analysis of
macroinvertebrate assemblages.-.	.:	 102

Table 6-4.—IrKJex of Biotic Irtegrity metrics and scoring criteria based on
fish community data from more than 300 reference sites throughout Ohio
applicable only to boat  (!.«., nonwadable) sites. Table modified from Ohio      '
EPA (1987)		:	,		......	105

Table 6-5.—-Ranges for Index of Biological Integrity values representing
different narrative descriptions of fish assemblage condition in Ohio streams.
Site category descriptions—wading, boat, and headwaters — indicate the
type of site and style of sampling done at those sites. Modified from Ohio
EPA (1987).	'.'.......	.:,............................ 106

Table 7-1.—Sequential process for assessment of test sites and
determination of the relationship to established biocriteria.		 115

Table 7-2.—Maine's water quality classification system for rivers and
streams, and associated biological standards (taken from Davieset aJ. 1993). ... 118

Table 7-3.—Bioclassification criteria scores for EPT taxa richness values for
three North Carolina eeoregions based on two sampling methods. ...	. 120

Table 7-4.—The investment of state water resource agency staff to develop
bioassessment programs as a framework for btocriteria.			.126

Table 7-5.—Costs associated with retaining consultants to develop
bioassessment programs as a framework for hiocriteria. Dash indicates work
done by state employees or information not available; FTE costs for
contractors and state employees are not equivalent	 126

-------
 Figure 5-5.—Relationship of the Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI) to changes in
 the quality of habitat structure through the Qualitative Habitat Evaluation
 Index (QHEi) in channelized (triangles) and unchannelized (circles) (Ohio
 EPA, 1990)	'	84

 Rgure 5-6.—Diagrammatic representation of the stream continuum to
 illustrate variation in trophic structure of benthic invertebrates (adapted from
 Cummins, 1983)			86

 Rgure 5-7.—Biological community response as portrayed by the Index of
 Biotic Integrity (IBI) in four similarly sized Ohio rivers with different types of
 point and nonpolnt source impacts (Voder, 1991)	 89

 Rgure 6-1 a.—Metrics that decrease with impairment	'..:.-.		.. 92

 Rgure 6-1b.—Metrics that increase with impairment.  ......		93

 Rgure 6-2.—Total number of fish species versus  stream order for 72 sites
 along the Embarras River In Illinois (Fausch et al. 1984).	94

 Rgure 6-3.—Metrics plotted with a continuous covariate (hypothetical
 example)	94

 Rgure 6-4.—Box and whisker plots of mejric values from hypothetical
 stream classes. Shaded portions above the median for each class. The box
 represents a percentile, the vertical line is 1.5 times the interquartile range,
 and the horizontal line is the median of each distribution. .;	95

 Rgure 6-Sa.—Site discrimination for the number of Ephemeroptera,
 Plecoptera, and Trichoptera (EPT index) in Rorida streams. (Reference •
 least impaired, other » unknown, impaired » determined impaired a priori.)   	96

 Rgura 6-5b.—Site discrimination for the number of Chironomidae taxa in
 Rorida streams. (Reference *least impaired, other * unknown, impaired »
 determined impaired a priori.)	  96

 Rgure 6-6.—Tiered metric development process (adapted from Holland,
 1990)	;....,	97

 Rgure 6-7.—The conceptual process for-proceeding from measurements to
 indicators to assessment condition (modified from Paulson et al. 1991). .....	98

 Rgure 6-8.—Invertebrate stream index scores for Rorida streams	.106

 Rgure 7-1.—Hierarchy of statistical models used in Maine's biological
 criteria program (taken from Oavies et al. 1993)	111

 Rgure 7-2.—The process for proceeding from measurements of fish
 assemblage to indicators such as the Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI) or Index
 of Well Being (IWB) — as used to develop criteria and apply those criteria to
 streams (modified from Paulsen et al. 1991)	116

 Rgure 7-3a—Biological criteria in the Ohio WQS for the Warmwater Habitat
 (WWH) and Exceptional Warmwater Habitat (EWH) use designations
 arranged by biological  index, site type for fish, and ecoregion (Ohio EPA,
 1992). ..;	122

 Rgure 7-3b.—Biological criteria in the Ohio WQS  for the Modified
Warmwater Habitat (MWH) use designation arranged by biological index,
site type for fish,  modification type, and ecoregion (Ohio EPA,  1992)	123
Rgure 7*4.—Comparison of ambient toxicity and fish richness surveys at
eight sites in various parts of the United States (taken from U.S. EPA, 1991).
127

-------
3ICLCGICAL CRITERIA:   v          .
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                Figure 7-5.—Comparison of effluent toxicity of receiving water impact using
                                Ceriodaphnia dubia chronic toxicity tests and freshwater receiving stream
                                benthfc invertebrates at 43 point source discharging sites in North Carolina
                                (taken from U.S. EPA, 1991).	:		...	 128

                                Figure 7-6.—Comparison of chemical criteria exeeedances and biosurvay
                                results at 645 stream segments in Ohio.	 128

                                Figure 7-7.—Assessment of nontidal stream aquatic life use attainment in
                                Delaware (taken from the state's 395[b] report, 1994).	 128

                                Figure 8-1.—EPT Index (number of taxa of Ephemeroptera, Plecoptera, and  •
                                Trichoptera) for two (locations on the South Fork of the New River, North
                                Carolina. .	.......		 132

                                Figure 8-2,—Examples from some states using biological assessments to
                                determine aquatic life use support in rivers and streams. Failure to sustain
                                fish and aquatic fife is defined with respect to the reference condition in that
                                state	.....„..........;.	. :•.	•.-	
135
                                Figure 8-3-—Temporal trends in the improvement of the Upper Hocking
                                River, illustrating the Area of Degradation Value (ADV). 1982 -1990.  .......... 137

                                Figure 8=4—State off Delaware 305(b) report for nontidal stream use
                                attainment — aquatic life 1992..		 140

                                Figure 8-5,—Assessment summary, Kent and Sussex counties, Delaware,
                                1991	:.	140

                                Figure 8-6,,—Macroiiwertebrates in the Piseataquis River, Maine, 1984 -
                                1990		....	..*.;	»...-	.	........;......... 142

-------

-------
                    CHAPTER  1.

                 Introduction
    The goal of this support document is to help states make decisions and
    develop biocriteria for streams and small rivers. The document in-
dudes a general strategy for biocriteria development, identifies steps in
the process, and provides technical guidance on how to complete each
step, using the experience and knowledge of existing state, regional, and
national surface water programs.
  ,  Specifically, biocriteria provide~"a way to measure the condition of a
water resource, that is, its attainment or nonattainment of biological integ-
rity. In turn, biological integrity is a conceptual definition of the most ro-
bust aquatic community to be expected in a natural condition—in a water
resource unimpaired by human activities. Thus, biological criteria are the
benchmarks for water resource protection and management; they reflect
the closest possible attainment of biological integrity. It follows that any
criterion representing less than achievable biological integrity is an interim
criterion only, since the use  of biocriteria are intended to improve the
nation's water resources.                           .
    The guidance in this document is designed so that users may tailor ap-
propriate methods to their  particular biocriteria development needs.
Chapters 1 and 8 are inclusive of the methodology — at different levels of
complexity — while chapters 2 through 7 explore the process step by step.
Thus, the document is organized as follows:
    • Chapter 1: Introduction. An overview of biocriteria.           ,

    • Chapter 2: Components of Biocriteria. An exploration of the bask re-
     lationship between biological integrity and biocriteria, the complex
     nature of human disturbances, and the definition of biological ex-
     pectations.

    • Chapter 3: The Reference Condition. Selection of reference sites and
     the role of the reference condition in Biocriteria development

    • Chapter 4: Conducting the  Biosurvey. An investigation of the de-
     sign, management, and  technical  issues  related to biocriteria-
     bioassessment programs, the various biosurvey methods and their
     standardization.

 .   • Chapter 5: Evaluating Environmental Effects. Factors that affect
     water resource integrity.
Purpose:
To provide conceptual
guidance on
how and when to
use biocriteria
-bioassessments to
evaluate ecological
integrity.

-------
siCLOGiCAL CRITERIA:
. Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  Biocriteria can be
  developed from
  expectations of the
  region or watershed,
  site-specific
  applications, or
  consensus definitions
  from regional
  authorities. Biocriteria
  based directly on
  biological sampling,
  however, require
  minimally impaired
  reference sites
  against which the
  study area may be
  compared.
   m Chapter 6: Multimetric Assessment Approaches for Biocriteria De-
     velopment. Emphasis  on  the community composition element  of
     biological surveys.
   • Chapter 7: Biocriteria Development and Implementation. Designing
     and developing biocriteria from the data and precautions for some
     site selections.
   • Chapter  8: Applications of Biocriteria. Case Studies from North
     Carolina, Ohio, Delaware, and Maine.
   Each chapter concludes with a list of readings containing supplemen-
tal information on the specific topic treated in that chapter. An extensive
glossary and full reference list appear at the end of the document Future
documents will be oriented to other waterbody types: lakes and reservoirs,
rivers, estuaries near coastal marine waters, and wetlands.

The Concept of Biocriteria

Early efforts to monitor human effects on waterbodies in the 19th century
were limited to physical observations of sediment and debris  movement
resulting from urban development, land settlement, and commercial activ-
ities (Caper et aL 1983). Later, as analytical methods became increasingly
available for measuring microchemical conditions in the waterbody (Gib-
son, 1992), chemical measurements became the most commonly employed
source of water quality criteria. However, investigators and resource man-
agers have long recognized that water column measurements reflect con-
ditions only at the time of sampling.
   To understand fully the effects of human activities on water resources,
biological sampling is an important supplement to chemical sampling. Bi-
ological measurements  can reflect  current conditions  and temporal
changes in waterbodies, including the cumulative effects of successive dis-
turbances.
   Three aspects of water resource management (chemical, physical, and
biological) are recognized in-the National Clean Water Act as amended by
the,Water Quality Act of 1987  (U.S. Gov. Print.  Off. 1988). Section lOla
states that the Acf s primary objective is to "restore and maintain the
chemical, physical, and biological integrity of the nation's waters."
   The development and widespread use of formal biological criteria
(biocriteria) has lagged behind chemical-specific, in-stream flow, or tox-
icity-based water quality criteria in waterbody management (U.S. Environ.
Prot. Agency, 1985a,b; 1986). Biological criteria are numeric values or nar-
rative expressions that describe the biological condition of aquatic commu-
nities in the water at a designated reference site. The conditions of aquatic
life found at these reference sites are used to detect both the  causes and
levels of risk to biological integrity  at other sites in the same region. In
keeping with the policy of not degrading the resource, the reference condi-
tions — like the criteria — are expected to be upgraded with each im-
provement to the water resource. Thus, biocriteria contribute directly to
water management programs, and recent recommendations (U.S. Environ.
Prot. Agency, 1987a,b) on monitoring strategies for aquatic resources have
emphasized the need to accelerate the development of biological sampling
as a regular part of surface water programs.

-------
                                                                                   •introduction
  .  Biocriteria can be developed from expectations for the region-or water-
 shed, site-specific applications, or consensus definitions from regional au-
 thorities.  Biocriteria based directly on biological sampling, however,
 require minimally impaired reference sites against which the study area
 may be compared. Minimally impaired sites are not necessarily pristine;
 they must, however exhibit minimal disturbance (i.e., human interference)
 relative to the overall region of study. Ecological integrity is the condition
 of an unimpaired ecosystem as measured by combined chemical, physical
 (including habitat)/and biological attributes.
    The use of biocriteria expands and improves water quality standards,
 helps identify impairment of beneficial uses, and helps set program priori-
 ties. Biological surveys (or biosurveys), in conjunction with biocriteria, are
 valuable because they provide

    • a direct measure of the condition of the water resource at the site,

    • early detection of problems that other methods may miss or
     underestimate, and                       !       .

    • a systematic process for measuring the effectiveness of water resource
     management programs.     . _             :


The Development, Validation, and
 Implementation Process  for Biocriteria

Three processes are part of the overall implementation plan to incorporate
biocriteria into the surface water programs of regulatory agencies: the de-
velopment of biocriteria and associated biological survey methods, the
validation of the reference condition and bioassessment techniques, and
the implementation of the program at various sites within watersheds arid
subsequent determination of impairment
    The development of biocriteria by regulatory agencies partly depends
on bioassessment to evaluate or compare ecosystem conditions. Bioassess-
ment contains two types of data: toxidty tests and field biological surveys
of surface waters. Toxicity tests  are  described elsewhere (U.S. Environ.
Prot. Agency, 1985a,b; 1988; 1989) and are not the subject of this document
    The use of bioassessments to investigate potential impairment, evalu-
ate  the severity of problems, ascertain the causes of the problems, and de-
termine appropriate remedial action is a step-by-step process.
    Inherent  in the process for implementation of biocriteria is  the as-
sumption that bioassessment methods have been developed. However, the'.'
actual development  of biocriteria is the most difficult step in the whole
process. A conceptual model for biocriteria development was presented by
the  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (1990) to streamline the major
elements in the process. This model has been refined for presentation here
(Fig.1-1).
    Each component of the model is numbered so that it can be identified
and discussed more easily as an important part of the biocriteria develop-
ment process. Nevertheless, these  steps are not sequential. The following
paragraphs describe the model process in more detail and identify areas of
simultaneous development.
 I he process is
essentially the
comparison of
biological and habitat
measurements at a
site of concern to
"benchmarks" or
biocriteria derived
from similar
unimpaired streams h
that area. A notable
deviation is reason for
further investigation
and remedial action.

-------
3tCl.OGiCAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                                       Ewkato Be
                                                                          en'EMluMin of CMi
                                                           t VWhlntt* Rnlwd RanwMft)
                                      12
                                      13   OfegnoMCauMoflniiainram
                                      14
                                                                       NoAeSonR«|ui(»d;Co<*nue
Ch.1


Ch.2


Ch.3




Ch.3



Ch.4



Ch.4



Ch.4




Ch.2


Ol. 2.3.5,7




Ch.4.9.1





Ch.4,S.8.7



Ch.8.7



Ch.S.t.7




Ch.7
                                Figure 1-1.—Model for blocrltcria development and •ppllcatlo'n.
                                    Components 1 through 8 desoibe the development of biocriteria, prior
                                to their use in regulatory programs.                    ,

                                     1. Investigate the Biocriteria Program Concept The biocriteria proc-
                                       ess involves the selection of several program elements that contrib-
                                       ute to effective biocriteria. Each state agency will have its own
                                       program objectives and agenda  for establishing biocriteria; how-
                                       ever,  the underlying characteristics for effective biocriteria will be
                                       the same in all states.

                                     2. Formulate the Biocriteria Approach. Defining biological integrity
                                       is the first  step in the formulation of a biocriteria program (U.S.

-------
                                                                                   CHAPTEfl'1:
                                                                                  Introduction
   Environ. Prot. Agency, 1990). The activities important to this step
   are planning the biocriteria process; designating the reference con-
   dition; performing the biosurveys; and establishing the biocriteria.

 3. Select Reference Sites or Conditions. The attainable biological sta-
   tus of an aquatic system is described by the reference condition, if
   we understand the water resources's biological potential, we can
   judge the quality of communities at various sites relative to their
   potential quality. Natural environmental variation may contribute
   to a range of expected conditions; deviations from this range help
   to distinguish perturbation effects.                   ,
       Reference  conditions can  also  be derived  from historical
   datasets existing from previous  studies. These data range from
   handwritten field notes to published journal articles; however, bio-
   logical surveys of reference sites that are minimally impaired is still
   the most appropriate way to define the reference condition.
       The selection of reference sates is key to the success of biocrite-
   ria development. Various spatial scales can be used/but reference
   conditions must be representative of the resource at risk ai\d must,
   therefore, be of the same or similar  ecological realm or biogeo-
   graphic region (i.e., an area characterized by a distinctive flora  or
   fauna).
       Candidate reference sites can be selected in a number of ways,
   but must meet some requirements established on the basis of overall
   habitat and minimally impaired status" in a given region. The refer-
   ence condition is best described through data collected from several
   reference sites representing undisturbed watersheds. Such biologi-
   cal information can be combined for a more accurate assessment of
   the reference condition and its natural variability. The reference con-
   dition approximates the definition of biological integrity unless the
  reference sites were selected in significantly altered systems.

4. Select Standard Protocols. The development of standard protocols
  requires consensus building relative to the biological and ecological
.  endpoints of interest in creating biocriteria. The primary goal is to de-
  velop measures to assess the biological integrity of aquatic communi-
  ties in specified habitats as measured by biological elements and
  processes, that is, as measured by the activities that maintain commu-
  nities  in equilibrium with  the  environment There is no correct
  method to use or biological assemblage to sample; rather, a number pf
  possibilities exist, including the Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI) for fish,
  and the Rapid Bioassessment Protocols (RBP) for benthos.
      The process of applying these and other indices across widely
  differing systems is not a straightforward process and best profesr
  sipnal judgment should be exercised before applying them to spe-
  cific  problems.  For example,  the IBI must be  modified for
  northwestern assemblages since it was developed in the Midwest
  for midwestem assemblages. These indices measure  some struc-
  tural or functional attribute of the  biological assemblage  that
  changes in some predictable way with increased human influence.
  Combinations pf these attributes or metrics provide valuable syn-
 The selection of
 reference sites is key
 to the success of
 biocriteria
 development. Various
 spatial scales can be
 used, but reference
 conditions must be
 representative of the
 resource at risk and
 therefore, must be of
 the same or similar
 ecological realm
 (or biogeographic
 region).
The process of
applying indices
across widely    ,
differing systems is
not a straightforward
process and best
professional judgment
should be exercised
before applying them
to specific problems.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                    thetic assessments of the status of water resources. The basic theo-
                                    retical framework and approach should remain consistent. There-
                                    fore, the use of these indices should occur only after rigorous
                                    review and evaluation of their documentation. Such reviews are
                                    available in a variety of peer-reviewed publications.

                                 5. Modification and Refinement of the Protocols. The refinement
                                    process is an .important step before large-scale biosurveys are con-
                                    ducted. The  sensitivity of the protocols should be tested to deter-
                                    mine whether differences in community  health resulting  from
                                    anthropogenic activities  are discernible from changes caused by
                                    other impacts or natural variation. An impact is any change in the
                                    chemical, physical or biological quality or condition of a water-
                                    body caused by external sources. This process applies to all aspects
                                    of the protocol from sampling to data analysis and may be re-
                                   . peated as often as necessary.

                                 6. Address Technical Issues. Certain technical issues — for example,
                                    natural seasonal variability, the aquatic assemblages selected for eval-
                                 .	uation, the procedure for selecting sampling sites, and the type of
                                    sampling gear or equipment—affect the derivation of biocriteria.

                                 7. Characterize Biological Integrity. Analyze biological databases to
                                    establish the range of values of the reference condition and to charac-
                                    terize biological integrity. Characterization depends on the use of bio-
                                    logical surveys in conceit with measurements of habitat structure.

                                 8. Establish Biocriteria and a Biological Monitoring Program. Once
                                    biological integrity has been characterized and the geographic area
                                    has been regionalized, biological information can be equated to the
                                    water quality expectations of the state, and biocriteria can be estab-
                                    lished for these regions. Biocriteria  may vary within a state de-
                                    pending on the region's  ecological structure and the  type of
                                    monitoring used in its water quality programs. Biological monitor-
                                    ing, or biomonitoring, is the use of a living entity and its response
                                    as a measure to determine environmental conditions. It is necessary
                                    to assess and track changes in the condition of the surface water re-
                                    source and reference conditions.

                                 Step 9 describes the validation of the biocriteria developed in the pre-
                             vious components.

                                 9. Evaluate and Revise. Revision of the biocriteria approach uses ex-
                                    isting biological data to determine or explain the regional limits for
                                    biocriteria. This step includes statistical analyses  of biological,
                                    physical, and chemical data to establish natural variability and the
                                    validity of existing biocriteria. Regional frameworks should be ad-
                                    justed if biological and geographical data support the need  to do
                                    so. Reasons for these adjustments and the data used to determine
                                   - them should be dearly documented.

                                 Steps 10 through 14 describe the use of biocriteria for water resource
                             management, that is, for the assessment, remediation, and regulation of
                             water quality.

-------
                                                                                 Introduction
10. Conduct Biosurveys. Biosurveys conducted at test sites help to de-
   - termine whether and to what extent a site deviates from the normal
   range of values observed fprthe reference conditions. This measure
   will also establish a site's degree of noncompliance with regional
   biocriteria. Candidate test sites are any locations along the stream
   or river in which the conditions are not known but are suspected of
   being adversely affected by anthropogenic influence.

11. Detect Impaired and Nonimpaired Conditions.  Decisions on
   whether adverse or impaired conditions exist must be made, but
   whether these conditions  are socially tolerable may be beyond sci-
   ence. Scientists and resource managers are/ however, obliged to de-
   termine  the  relative  impairment  of the  water  resource as  a
   precondition for any subsequent decision.

12. Review Other Data Sources for Additional Information. The use
  * of additional data to support or provide alternatives to the biological
   assessment is important in the decision-making process. As part of an
   integrated approach, whole effluent toxicity (WEI) testing and chemi-
   cal-specific analyses can be-performed .to measure compliance with
   state standards. Any of three measures —.biological, toxicological, or
   chemical — can be used to demonstrate; impairment

13. Diagnose Causes of Impairment Once impairment has been de-
   termined, its  probable causes must be identified before  remedial
   action can be considered and implemented. Probable 'causes* may
   include alteration pf habitat structure, energy source, biological in-
   teractions, flow characteristics, or water quality. The "source"  of
   the disturbance may be point or nonpoint source contamination or
   other human activities. Thus, if impairment is detected, the data
   should be evaluated to determine its probable causes; the site and
   surrounding area should be investigated for other probable causes;
   additional data should be  collected; and either remedial action
   should be formulated (if the actual causes have been determined)
   or the investigation should be continued.

14. Implement Remedial  Actions and Continued Monitoring. If
   probable causes have been determined  so that*a remedial action
   plan can be developed, the last step is to begin remedial measures
   and continue monitoring  to assess the stream's recovery  and rela-
   tive success of the measures. This step can be useful for evaluating
   management  programs and determining cost-effective  methods.
   Selection of the appropriate remedial actions is a step beyond the
   biocriteria process; however, it is essential to reduce or  eliminate
   impairment to attain the designated uses that the biocriteria .were
   derived to protect, the process of remediation or prevention must
   be addressed by the state agency responsible for enforcement and
   protective or restoration programs.
       If no impairment is found, no action  is necessary except to con-
   tinue monitoring at some  interval to ensure that the condition does
   not change adversely.

-------
 atOLOGtCAL CPlTEfllA:
• Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  The best balance is
  achieved by
  developing biocriteria
  that closely represent
  the natural biota,
  protect against further
  degradation, and
  stimulate restoration
  of degraded sites.

Characteristics of Effective Biocriteria

Generally, effective biocriteria share several common characteristics. Well-
written biocriteria

    • provide for scientifically sound evaluations,
    • protect the most sensitive biological value,

    • protect healthy, natural aquatic communities,
    • support and strive for protection of chemical, physical, and biological
     integrity,
    • include specific assemblage characteristics required for attainment of
     designated use,
    • are dearly written and easily understood,
    • adhere to the philosophy and policy of nondegradation of water
     resource quality, and

 '   • are defensible in a court of law.

    In addition, well-written biocriteria are set at levels sensitive to anthro-
pogenic impacts; they are not set so high that site; that have reached their
full potential cannot be rated as attaining, or so low that unacceptably im-
paired sites receive passing scores. The establishment of formal biocriteria
warrants careful consideration of planning, management, and regulatory
goals and the best attainable  condition at a site. Stringent criteria that are
unlikely to be achieved serve little purpose. Similarly, biocriteria that sup-
port a degraded biological condition defeat the intentions of biocriteria de-
velopment and the Clean Water Act Balanced biocriteria will incorporate
multiple uses so that any conflicting uses are evaluated at the outset. The
best balance is achieved by developing biocriteria that closely represent
the natural biota, protect against further degradation, and stimulate resto-
ration of degraded sites.
    Additional general guidance regarding the writing of biocriteria is pro-
vided in U.S. Environ. Prot Agency (1990). Several kinds of biocriteria are
possible and vary  among state programs.  Both  narrative and numeric
biocriteria have been effectively implemented. Both should be supported by
effective implementation guidelines and adequate state resources, including
people, materials, methods, historical data, and management support.
    Narrative biocriteria consist of statements such as "aquatic life as it
should naturally occur" or "changes in species composition may occur, but
structure and function of the  aquatic community must be maintained." An
aquatic community, the association of interacting assemblages in a given
waterbody, is the biotic component of an ecosystem. Numeric values, such
as measurements of community structure and function, can also serve as
biocriteria. The numeric criterion should be a defined range rather than a
single  number to account for a measure's natural variability in a healthy
environment. It may also combine several such values in an index. General
descriptions of actual narrative and numeric biocriteria from selected state
programs are presented  in  the following section; the information was
taken from Biological Criteria: State Development and Implementation  Efforts
(U.S. Environ..Prot. Agency, 1991a).

-------
                                                                                    CHAPTER 7:
                                                                                   Introduction
Examples of Biocriteria

Three states have adopted biocriteria for water quality management
Maine and North Carolina use narrative criteria; Ohio has implemented
combined narrative and numeric criteria.


Narrative Biological Criteria
States may draft general narrative biological criteria early in their program
— even before they have designated reference sites .or refined their ap-
proach to biological surveys. This haste does not mean that having refer-
ence sites and a refined system for conducting surveys is unimportant; it
means that a biocriteria program begins with writing into law a statement
of intent to protect and manage  the water resources predicated on an
objective or benchmark, for example,  "aquatic life shall be as naturally
occurs."
   When the objective to restore and protect the biological integrity of the
water resources has been formally mandated, then the operational mean-
ing of the statement and the identification of the agency responsible for
developing the necessary procedure!} and regulations can be stipulated as
the state's first steps toward the development of narrative and numeric bi-
ological criteria. The key point is that natural or minimally impaired water
resource conditions become the criteria for judgment and management.
For more definitive and specific information on this concept and its imple-
mentation, the reader is referred to  the EPA guidance document "Proce-
dures for Initiating Narrative Biological Criteria" (Gibson, 1992).
   Once established in state standards, narrative biological criteria form
the legal and programmatic basis for expanding biological surveys and as-
sessments to complete narrative criteria and to develop subsequent nu-
meric biological criteria.     ,
   Maine and North Carolina  are examples of the practical development
and use of narrative biological criteria. Maine incorporated  the general
statement "as naturally occurs" into its biocriteria, but also developed sup-
porting statements that specified collection methods to survey aquatic life.
Maine uses narrative biocriteria thai: are defined by specific ecological at-
tributes, such as measures of taxonomic equality, numeric equality, and the
presence of specific pollution tolerant or intolerant species.       ^
   North Carolina uses narrative criteria to evaluate point and nonpoint
source pollution and to identify and protect aquatic use classifications. In
North Carolina, macroinvertebrate community attributes are used to help
define use classifications. These attributes include taxonomic richness and
the biotic indices of community functions and numbers of  individuals.
They  are also used in conjunction  with narrative criteria to determine
"poor," "fair," good—fair," good," and "excellent" ratings for the desig-
nated uses.                                                   -
   Narrative biological criteria specify the use designations established
by the state and describe the type of water resource condition that repre-
sents the fulfillment of each use. Conversely, when adopted by the state
and approved by EPA, they become  one of the standards by which water
resource violations are determined.
 <
   States may draft
   general narrative
   biological criteria
   early in their program
   -— even before they
   have designated
   reference sites or
   refined their approach
   to biological surveys.
,
   Narrative biological
   criteria cannot be fully
   implemented without
   a quantitative
   database to support
   them.

-------
         . ur« / cnut.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 Numeric biocriteria
 include discrete
 quantitative values
 that summarize the
 status of the
 biological community
 and describe the
 expected condition of
 this system for
 different designated
 water resource uses.
i
    Nevertheless, narrative biological criteria cannot be fully implemented
without a quantitative database to support them. Quantitative data pro-
vide a responsible rationale for decision making and assure resource man-
agers a degree of confidence in their determinations.
    These data are similar to the data used to formulate numeric biological
criteria; they can and should include the determination of reference condi-
tions and sites. Thus, when the survey process for narrative biocriteria is
weU developed and refined, the program can easily begin the develop-
ment of numeric biocriteria. While not an essential precursor, the narrative
process is an excellent way for states to expand their stream resource eval-
uation and  management procedures  to  the more definitive numeric
biocriteria.
     Numeric Biological Criteria

     Although based on the same concept a* narrative biocriteria, numeric
     biocriteria include discrete quantitative values that'summarize the status
     of the biological community and describe the expected condition of this
     systemfpr different designated water resource uses.
        The key distinction between narrative biocriteria supported by a quan-
     titative database and numeric biocriteria is the direct inclusion of a specific
     value or index in the numeric criteria. This index allows a level of specifi-
     cation to water resource evaluations and regulations not common to narra-
     tive criteria.
        To develop numeric criteria, the resident biota are sampled at mini-
     mally  impaired sites to  establish reference conditions.  Attributes of the
     biota, such as species richness, presence or absence of indicator taxa, and
     distribution of trophic groups, help establish the normal range of the bio-
     logical community as it would exist in unimpaired systems.
        Ohio combines narrative and numeric biocriteria and uses fish and in-
     vertebrates in  its  stream  and river  evaluation programs. Its  numeric
     biocriteria are  defined by fish community measurements, such as the
     Index of WeU-Being (IWB) and the Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI). Ohio also
     employs an Invertebrate Community Index (ICI). All three measures pro-
     vide discrete numeric values that can be used as biocriteria.
        Ohio's numeric criteria for use designations in warmwater habitats are
     based  on multiple measures of fish and benthic macroinvertebrates in dif-
     ferent  reference sites within the same ecoregion. Macroinvertebrates are
     animals without backbones that are large enough to by seen by the un-
     aided eye and caught in  a U.S. Standard No. 30 sieve. Criteria for this use
     designation are set at the 25th percentile of each biological index score re-
     corded from  the established reference sites within the ecoregion. Excep-
     tional  warmwater  habitat criteria are set at the 75th percentile from the
     statewide set of reference sites (Ohio Environ. Prol. Agency, 1987). Use of
     the 25th and 75th percentiles, respectively, portrays the minimum biologi-
     cal community performance described by the narrative  use designations.
     Such applications  require  an extensive  database and multiple reference
     areas across the stream and river sizes represented within each ecoregion.
        To develop the most broadly applicable numeric biological criteria,
     careful assessments of biota  in multiple reference sites should be con-
     ducted (Hughes et al. 1986). The status of the biota in surface waters may

-------
                                                                                      iniroaucvon
 be assessed in numerous ways. No smgle index or measure is universally
 recognized as free from bias. Evaluating the strengths and weaknesses of
 different assessment approaches is important, and a multimetric approach
 that incorporates information on species richness,  trophic composition,
 abundance or biomass, and organism condition is recommended (see
 Chapter 6).                                           :             '


 Other Biocriteria Reference Documents

 Based on state interest in having  EPA guidance  (U.S. Environ. Prot.
 Agency, 1987a), program and technical guidance documents for imple-
 menting biooiteria have been developed. The biocriteria program guid-
 ance  document  discusses  program  development issues  including
 legislative authority, steps in developing biocriteria, and the application of
 biocriteria to surface  water  management  (U.S. Environ. Prot Agency,
 1990).
    A survey of existing state programs; was conducted to delineate the
 status of bioassessment implementation on a national basis (U.S. Environ.
 Prot. Agency, 1991a). In addition, a reference guide to the technical litera-
 ture pertaining to biocriteria has also been developed to  provide support
 to the program guidance document  (U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency, ,1991b).
 This  reference guide contains cross-references  to technical papers that
 present  concepts,  approaches, and procedures necessary to implement
 habitat assessment and biological surveys in the development and use of
 biocriteria. In December 1990, a symposium on biological criteria was held
 to provide a forum for discussing technical issues and guidance for the
 various waterbody types of the national surface waters. The proceedings
 from this conference are presented in U.S. Environ. Prot.  Agency (1991d).
 Most recently, the agency has developed guidance to help states initiate
 narrative biological criteria (Gibson, 1992).


 Suggested Readings

 Gibson, George. 1992. Procedures for Initiating Narrative Biological Criteria. EPA-822-B-
    92-002. U,S. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC.
 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1987a. Report of the National Workshop on In-
    stream Biological Monitoring and Criteria. In-stream Biol. Criteria Comm. Reg.  5,
    Environ. Res. Lab., Off. Water Reg. Stand., Corvallis, OR.
—	. 1987b. Surface Water Monitoring: A Framework for Change. Off. Water, Off. Pol.
    Plann. EvaL, Washington, DC.
—:—-. 1991a. Biological Criteria: State Development and Implementation Efforts. EPA
    440/5-91-003. Off. Water, Washington, DC.
	. 1991b. Biological Criteria: Guide to Technical Literature. EPA 440/5-91^004. Off.
    Water, Washington, DC.
—'•	. 1991c. Technical Support Document foir Water Quality-based Toxics Control.
    EPA 505/2-90-001. Off. Water, Washington, DC
	. 1991d.  Biological Criteria:  Research and Regulation.  EPA  440/5-91-005. Off.
    Water, Washington, DC.
 To develop numeric
 biocriteria, the
 resident biota are
 sampled at minimally
 impaired sites to
 establish reference
 conditions. Attributes
 of the biota such as
 species richness,
presence or absence
 of indicator taxa, and
 distribution of trophic
groups are useful for
establishing the
normal range of
biological community
components as they
would exist in
unimpaired systems.

-------

-------
                    CHAPTER 2.

             Components of
                   Biocriteria
       Water resource legislation is designed to protect water resources and
       to ensure, their availability to present and future generations. Over
the past two decades, legislative and regulatory programs have estab-
lished goals such as fishable and swlmmable, antidegradation, no net loss,
and zero discharge (of pollutants). Unfortunately, those goals are not eas^
ily translated into actions that accomplish the mandate of restoring and
maintaining biological integrity. The purpose of this chapter is to provide
managers with a basic conceptual understanding of the relationship be-
tween biological integrity and biocriteria and to describe  more fully the
biocriteria process.


Conceptual Framework and Underlying Theory

Biological integrity was first explicitly included in water resource legisla-
tion in the Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972 (Pub. L. 92-
500); and the concept, which was retained in subsequent revisions of that
act, is now an integral component of water resource programs at state and
federal levels (U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency, 1990).
   The goal of biological integrity, unlike fishable and swimmable goals,
encompasses all factors affecting the ecosystem. Karr and Dudley (1981;
following Frey [1975]) define biological integrity as "the capability of sup-
porting and maintaining a balanced, integrated, adaptive  community of
organisms having a species composition, diversity, and functional organi-
zation comparable to that of the natural habitat of the region." That is, a
site with high biological integrity will have had little or no  influence from
human society.
   Edwards and Ryder (1990) recently used the phrase "harmonic com-
munity" in a similar context to describe the goal of restoring ecological
health to the Laurentian Great Lakes. The sum of balanced, integrated, and
adaptive chemical, physical, and biological data can be equated with eco-
logical integrity (Karr and Dudley, 1981). Such healthy ecological systems
are  more  likely to withstand disturbances imposed by  natural environ-
mental phenomena and the many disruptions induced by human society.
These systems require minimal external  support from management (Karr
etal. 1986).,
Purpose:
To provide managers
with a basic
conceptual
understanding of the
relationship between
biological integrity
and biocriteria, and to
describe more fully
the biocriteria process.

-------
3IULOGICAL
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
It is important to
distinguish between
the attributes of
natural systems that
we intend to protect
(assessment
endpoints) and the
attributes that we can
measure
(measurement
endpoints). Success
in protecting
biological integrity   :
depends on the
development of
measurement
endpoints that are
highly correlated with
assessment
endpoints.
                               The adjective "pristine" is often invoked in such discussions; however,
                            in the late 20th century, it is almost impossible to find an area that is com-
                            pletely untouched by  human actions. Thus, the phrase "minimally im-
                            paired" is  more appropriate than the  word "pristine" for describing
                            conditions expected at sites exhibiting high biological integrity.
                               Degradation of water resources comes from pollution, which is de-
                            fined in the Clean Water  Quality Act of 1987 as "manmade or man-in-
                            duced alteration of the chemical, physical, biological or  radiological
                            integrity of water" (U.S. Gov. Print. Off. 1988). This comprehensive defini-
                            tion does not limit societal concern to chemical contamination. It includes
                            any human action or result of human action that degrades water re-
                            sources. Humans may degrade or pollute, water resources by chemical
                            contamination or by alteration  of aquatic habitats;  they may pollute by
                            withdrawing water for irrigation, by overharvesting fish, or by introduc-
                            ing exotic species that alter the resident aquatic biota. The biota of streams,
                            rivers, lakes, and estuaries, unlike other attributes of the water resource
                            (e.g., water chemistry), are sensitive to all forms of pollution. Thus, the de-
                            velopment  of biological criteria is essential to the protection of the integ-
                            rity of water resources.

                            Components of Biological Integrity
                            While these definitions establish broad biological  goals to  supplement
                            more narrowly defined chemical criteria, their use depends on the devel-
                            opment of ecologically rigorous biological criteria. The challenge is to de-
                            fine  biological integrity dearly, identify its components, and develop
                            methods to evaluate a water resource and its surrounding environment
                            based on the condition of these various components.
                               Evaluating the elements or components of biological integrity will in-
                            volve direct or indirect evaluations of biotic attributes. Indirect evaluations
                            are appropriate if direct approaches are prohibitively expensive or in other
                            ways difficult to implement It is. important to distinguish between assess-
                            ment and measurement endpoints. Attributes of natural systems that we
                            intend to protect for example, the health of a fish population, are assess-
                            ment endpoints; and attributes that we can measure, for example, age and
                            size classes of the fish  population, are measurement endpoints. Success in
                            protecting  biological integrity depends on the development of measure-
                            ment endpoints that are highly correlated with assessment endpoints.
                                Important components of biotic integrity have been measured before.
                            Toxicologjsts have long recognized the importance of individual health in
                            evaluating the extent to which  human actions have degraded a water re-
                            source, and ecologists have long used the kinds and relative abundances
                            of species as indicators of condition. More recently, and in many ways less
                            insightfully, theoretical measures of diversity have been  used to assess
                            species richness, that is, to determine if the number ,of species or relative
                            abundances of species have been altered. Fish biologists, for example, use
                            a variety of measures  to assess the health of populations of targeted spe-
                            cies, such as game fish. However, none of the attributes used in the past
                            are comprehensive enough to cover all components of biological integrity.
                                In recent years, a broader conceptual foundation has been developed
                            to convey the breadth of biotic integrity. The original Index of Biotic Integ-
                            rity (IBI) consisted of  12 metrics or attributes in three major groups: spe-

-------
                                                                            ...     '     CHAPT£r12:   .
                                                                           Components of Biocriterta
ties richness and composition, trophic structure, fish abundance and con-
dition (Karr, 1981). Another way of describing bidtic integrity contrasts the
elements of the biosphere with the processes but argues that both are es-
sential to the protection of biological integrity (Table 2-1). The most obvi-
ous elements are the species of the biota, but additional critical elements
include the gene pool among those  species, the assemblages, and land-
scapes.

Table 2-1 .—Components of biological Integrity.
ELEMENTS
                              PROClESaiS
Genetics
Mutation, recombination
 Individual
Metabolism, growth, reproduction
Population/species
Ago specific birth and death rates
Evolulton/spea'attoJi
Assemblage (community
  and ecosystem)
Interspecific interactions
Energy flow
Landscape
Water cycle
Nutrient cycles
Repetition sources and sinks
Migration and dispersal
Modified from.Karr, 1990.
   Processes (or functional relationships) span the hierarchy of biological
organization from individuals (metabolism) to populations (reproduction,
recruitment, dispersal, spectation) and communities or ecosystems (nutri-
ent cycling, interspecific interaction!}, energy flow). For example, an im-
portant process in streams is an interaction of fish and mussels in which
larval stages of the mussel (glochidia)  attach to fish gills, presumably to
enhance dispersal and to avoid predation.
 .  Other approaches are available, but the important issue here is not
which classification is the best approach. Rather, efforts to assess biological
integrity must be  broadly based to cover as many components as possible.
   The challenge in implementing biocriteria is to develop reliable and
cost-effective ways to exploit  the insight available through biological
analyses.  It is, for example, not necessary to sample the entire biota.
Rather,  carefully  selected representative  taxa  should be sampled. The
selection of attributes to be used to develop integrative biological criteria
should combine as many attributes as possible with precision and sam-
pling efficiency, but not all elements and processes are directly covered in
standard biological sampling.
   Recent efforts to develop integrative approaches include the IBI first
proposed by Karr (1981) and later expanded to apply to a wide geographic
area (Ohio Environ. Prot.  Agency, 1987; Lyons,  1992; Oberdorff and
Hughes, 1992), and to taxa other than fish, for example, benthic inverte-
brate assemblages (Ohio Environ. Pirot Agency, 1987; Plafkin et al. 1989).
The  Nebraska Department of Environmental Control (Bazata, 1991) has
proposed  indices  that combine fish and invertebrate metrics, and the Ohio
Environ. Prot. Agency (1987) has calculated several indices separately (fish
and  invertebrates) but uses them in combination to determine use attain-
ment status.
                                           •
                                            Efforts to assess
                                            biological integrity
                                            must be broadly
                                            based to cover as
                                            many components as
                                            possible:

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams ana Small Rivers
 The choice of
 attributes to be
 assessed and
 measured is critical to
 the success of any
 program to monitor
 biological conditions.

 The 6est approach
 to assessing
 biological integrity
 seems to be an
 integrative one that
 combines assessment
 of the extent to which
 either the elements or
 the processes of
 biological integrity
 have been altered;
 that is, efforts to
 protect biotic integrity
 should include
 evaluation of a broad
 diversity of biological
 attributes.

Assessing Biological Integrity
A sound monitoring  program designed  to  assess biological integrity
should have several attributes. A firm conceptual foundation broadly
based in ecological principles is essential  to a multidimensional assess-
ment that incorporates the elements and processes of biotic integrity. The
use of the concept of a reference condition, a condition against which a site
is evaluated, is also important.
    In addition, the  general principles of sound project management or
Total Quality Management (TQM>, such as Quality Assurance (QA) and
Quality Control (QQ, are as critical as the use of standard sampling proto-
cols. Quality assurance includes quality control functions and involves a to-
tally integrated program for ensuring the reliability of monitoring and
measurement data; it is the process of management review and oversight
of the planning, implementation, and completion  of environmental data
collection activities. Its goal is to assure that the data provided are of the
quality needed and claimed.
    Quality control refers to the routine application of procedures for ob-
taining prescribed standards of performance during the monitoring and
measurements  process; it focuses  on the detailed technical  activities
needed to achieve data of the quality specified by the Data Quality Objec-
tives (DQOs). Quality control is implemented at the laboratory or field
level Finally, biological monitoring must go beyond the collection and tab-
ulation of high quality data to the creative analysis and synthesis of infor-
mation about relevant biological attributes.
    Numerous  attributes of the biota have  been used to assess the condi-
tion of water resources. Some are difficult and expensive to measure while
others are not. Some provide reliable evaluations of biological conditions
while others, perhaps because they are highly variable, are more difficult
to interpret Thus, the choice of attributes to be assessed and measured is
critical to the success of any program to monitor biological conditions.
    Historically, most biological evaluations were designed to detect a nar-
row range of factors degrading water resources. For example, the biotic
index (Chutter, 1972; Hilsenhoff, 1987) is designed to detect the influence
of oxygen demanding wastes ("organic pollution*) or sedimentation, as is
the Saprobic Index developed early in this century (Kolkwitz and Mars-
son, 1908).
    With increased understanding of the complexity of biological systems
and the complex influences of human society on those systems, more in-
tegrative approaches for assessing biological integrity have been devel-
oped. Some (Ulanowicz, 1990; Kay, 1990; Kay and Schneider, in press)
advocate the use of thermodynamics, while others concentrate on richness
or diversity (Wilhm and Dorris, 1968). The best approach seems to be an
integrative one that combines assessment of the extent to which either the
elements or the processes of biological integrity have been altered; that is,
efforts to protect biotic integrity should include evaluation of a broad di-
versity of biological attributes.
    Because the goal of biocriteria-bioassessment programs is to evaluate
water resource systems stressed by or potentially destroyed by human ac-
tion, the selection of biological monitoring approaches is  critical. Indica-
tors and monitoring  design should be  structured so  that the same

-------
                                                                         Components ofBiocriferia
 monitoring data can serve a multitude of needs. This openness requires a
 reasonable level of sophistication for long-term status and trends monitor-
 ing. The more  complicated the water resource problem, the larger the
 number of attributes that should be measured. Finally, programs to moni-
 tor the effects of human activity on the environment should have espe-
 cially broad perspectives to ensure sensitivity to all forms of degradation.


 Complex Nature of Anthropogenic Impacts
 The number of human activities that strain the integrity of water resource
 systems is huge, and their cumulative impacts create even greater com-
 plexity. Thus, it is useful, perhaps even necessary, to develop an organiza-
 tional framework within which factors responsible for  degradation in
 biotic integrity can be evaluated.
     A major weakness of past approaches to protect water resources has
 been a narrow perspective on the factors responsible for degradation. Spe-
 cifically, past approaches focused on reducing the chemical contamination
 of the water on the assumption that dean water would produce high qual-
 ity water resources. Overall, the determinants of the biological integrity of
 the water resource are complex, and the simplistic approach of making
 water cleaner, though important is inadequate.
    Biological monitoring and the use of biocriteria to assess biotic integ-
 rity provides a more  comprehensive evaluation of  the status of the re*;
 source.  Such  evaluations enhance  our  ability  to  identify  the  factors
 responsible for degradation and to treat the problem in the most cost-effec-
 tive manner. Monitoring specific and ambient (background) conditions of-
 fers unique opportunities to detect, analyze, and plan the treatment of
 degraded resources.                                         .
    Because human actions may degrade a wider range of water resource
 attributes than water chemistry alone, a broader framework is necessary to
 identify and reverse the specific factoirs responsible for the degradation of
 biotic integrity. Degradation may begin in an area  of the watershed or
 catchment that is external to the reference or test site simply because it is
 often the result of human actions that alter the vegetative cover of the land
 surface. These  changes combined with the alteration of stream corridors
 degrade the quality of water delivered to the stream channels and attack
 the structure and dynamics of those channels and their adjacent riparian
 environments.
    Human activities at the site affect five primary classes  of variables —
all of which may result in further degradation of water resources (Karr,
 1991). These five internal variables should be placed in a larger context as
illustrated in Figure 2-1:

    1. Water Quality: Temperature, turbidity, dissolved oxygen, acidity,
      alkalinity, organic and inorganic chemicals; heavy metals, toxic sub-
      stances.

    2. Habitat Structure: Substrate type, water depth and current velocity,
      spatial and temporal complexity of physical habitat.

    3. Flow Regime: Water volume, temporal distribution of flows.

-------
TeCnnscal Guicance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                           RpananComdor

                                  EXTERNAL
INTERNAL
                            Weather/
                            Climate
                                 Terrestrial
                                 Environment/
                                 Land Use
                   Biotic
                   Interactions
                             Rgure 2-1.—Conceptual model showing the Interrelationship* of the primary vari-
                             able* relative to the Integrity of an aquatic biota. External refer* to features outside
                             the stream system; Internal to In-stream feature* (Karr, 1991). Terrestrial environment
                             Include* factors such a* geology, topography, soil, and vegetation.
                                 4. Energy Source: Type, amount and particle size of organic material
                                   entering stream, seasonal pattern of energy availability.

                                 5. Biotic Interactions:  Competition, predation,  disease,  parasitism,
                                   and mutualism.    .   *
                                From this conceptual framework, at least four components of the biota
                             should be evaluated: structure, composition, individual conditions, and bi-
                             ological processes (Fig. 2-2). Sample attributes for each component include
                             the following:
                                •  Community Structure: Species richness, relative abundances,
                                   including the extent to which one or a few species dominates.

                                •  Taxonomic Composition: Identity of the species that make up the
                                   biota.              _

                                •  Individual Condition: Health status of individuals in selected
                                   species.

                                •  Biological Processes: Rates of biological activities across the
                                   hierarchy of biology (from genes to landscapes).

                                Comprehensive assessments of these attributes ensure that  all the
                             components of biotic integrity are protected. For each component, one or
                             more attributes should be assessed.
                                Successful metrics represent the expression of a known influence of
                             human activities on the characteristics of the resident biota. For example,
                             the presence of few hardy species of fish in abundance may be a response
                             to sewage in  the waters. As human disturbance increases, total  species
                             richness, the number of intolerant species, and the number of trophic spe-
                             cialists usually decline, while the number of trophic generalists increases.
                             Generdists are organisms that can use a broad range of habitat or food
                             types. Exceptions exist: for example, when coldwater streams are warmed,
                             species richness  increases, although this process must be viewed as a deg-
                             radation of the biotic integrity of a coldwater system.

-------
                                                                                     CHAPTER 2:    .
                                                                         Components of Biocriteria
      COIMMTV
    otumt
                                    urns
                                   OTMCUCIUTIS
                                                    MOOUCIMTV
                                                          HAH
                         BIOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT
      2-2.—Organizational structure of the attributes that should OM Incorporated
 Into biological assassmmts.
    Use of biocriteria to evaluate and protect biotic integrity focuses di-
rectly on the condition of the resource. The development of biological
monitoring is driven by the need for rigorous standardized evaluations of
point and nonpoint source pollution and other circumstances in which the
upstream and downstream approaches to evaluation may be inappropri-
ate. In short, development of biocriteria is driven by the need for a com-
prehensive approach to the study and remediation of the effects of human
interference on water quality.


The Biocriteria Development Process

Biocriteria must be developed with a clear understanding of several im-
portant concepts. Foremost is the basic premise underlying biocriteria de-
velopment: understanding the condition of the biota in a given waterbody
provides a baseline for an integrative and sensitive measure of water qual-
ity. Biocriteria are operational narrative or numeric expressions that char-
acterize and, if properly used, protect biological integrity.
   Biocriteria can be used to protect biological integrity and to establish
an aquatic life use classification. Following the definition of biocriteria,
field surveys are conducted to determine whether particular sites meet the
biocriteria or whether they have been affected by human activity. This de-
termination is made by comparing the aquatic biota at potentially dis-
turbed sites with minimally impaired reference conditions. Natural events
Understanding the
condition of the biota
in a given waterbody  -
provides a baseline
for an integrative and
sensitive measure of
water quality.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  The basic premise,
  that biota provide a
  sensitive screening
  tool for measuring the
  condition of a water
  resource, depends on
  the assumption that
  the greater the
  anthropogenic impact
  in a watershed, the
  greater the
  impairment of the
  water resource.

  Once defined,
  biocriteria for a
  stream or river will
  describe the best
  attainable condition.
not initiated by or exacerbated by human .actions (e.g., fire, beavers) are
not considered disturbances in this sense.
    The basic premise, that biota provide a sensitive screening tool for
measuring the condition of a water resource, depends on the assumption
that the greater the anthropogenic impact in a watershed, the greater the
impairment of the water resource. A corollary is that streams and rivers
not subject to anthropogenic impact contain natural communities of
aquatic organisms that reflect unimpaired conditions. These assumptions
provide the scientific basis for formulating hypotheses about impairments
—' departures from the natural condition result from human disturbances.
    Natural disturbances, such as floods or drought; may also  affect the
aquatic biota  as part of normal ecological processes, and these responses
vary among ecoregions and stream sizes. For example, relatively stable
structure is characteristic of fish communities in the eastern United States
but stability of fish communities in the Great Plains streams may reflect
human disturbance (Bramblett and Fausch, 1991). Molles and Dahm (1991)
provide additional cautions on the need to consider natural events in in-
terpreting data from biological systems. Thus, natural disturbances must
be considered when interpreting data, but they are not considered as im-
pairments because they are not the result of human activity.
    Ideally, biocriteria are reflective of the natural biological integrity of the
particular region under study, that is, of the region as it would be had it not
become impaired. Depending on the resolving capability of the  biosurvey
method, the degree of impairment can often be established as part of the
biocriteria development process. Once defined, biocriteria for a stream or
river will describe the best attainable condition. The best attainable condi-
tions represent expected conditions and are directly compared  to the ob-
served conditions. Each state needs to  formulate appropriate definitive
descriptors (i.e., biocriteria) for the aquatic organisms in its streams, and
these descriptors or biocriteria should support the state's designated use
classifications or other resource protection and management objectives.
    Successful implementation of biocriteria  requires  a systematic pro-
gram to collect and evaluate complex scientific information and translate
that information into an effective planning tool to protect water resources.
This effort must be systematic as well as  conceptually and scientifically
rigorous; it must also be logical and easily understood. The components of
a program to implement biocriteria may be divided in a variety  of ways.
    The four  primary steps to develop and implement biocriteria are intro-
duced here and will be discussed in greater detail in later sections of this
document. The four steps are

     1. Planning the biocriteria development process.

     2. Designating the reference condition for biosurvey sites.

     3. Performing the biosurveys to characterize reference condition.

     4. Establishing biocriteria based on reference biosurvey results.

     Each step must be considered in the context of regulatory policy, the
 scientific method,  and  the  practical  aspects  of  fieldwork  involving
 biosurveys.  Further, acceptable biocriteria for streams and rivers can be

-------
                                                                                     CHAPTER^:
                                                                        Components of Biocriteria
developed in various ways. Therefore, biooiteria development should'be
based on a set of flexible procedures derived from management, the regu-
latory process, or both. When properly implemented, the procedures lead
to self-defined biocriteria that are protective of the unique characteristics
of streams and rivers. When not properly implemented, water resources
continue to be degraded. Although the general concepts and procedures of
biocriteria development  can be adapted to any stream or river, the devel-
opment of useful biocriteria requires individual planning for different
waterbodies.

• Planning Biocriteria. Planning includes the classification  of surface
water types and the definition of designated uses; however, the planning
process necessarily extends beyond stream and river use classification. To
be effective, planning must ensure that program objectives are clearly de-
fined and that the scientific information generated to meet program objec-
tives is appropriate for making environmental management decisions.
    The planning phase assumes the interaction of environmental manag-
ers (staff involved in policy, budgeting, and resource  management) and
technical staff (those involved in data, collection and interpretation) to en-
sure that the environmental data to be collected are acceptable and meet
state needs. To ensure this interaction, a formal quality assurance and
quality control  plan that includes the formulation  of data quality objec-
tives should be considered when  implementing the biocriteria develop-
ment process. Complete data quality objectives describe the decisions to
be made, the data required and why, the calculations in which the data
will be used, and time and resource constraints, they are used to design
data collection plans and to specify levels of uncertainty. Levels of uncer-
tainty pertain to the confidence, or lack of confidence, that decision mak-
ers can realistically have  that the collected data  will actually support
particular conclusions.
    Finally, interagency cooperation ('within and among states) should be a
critical component of the planning process. Time spent on  developing
good relations with other groups improves biocriteria and their use.

• Designating Reference Condition. Designating the reference condition
for biosurvey sites is the second major activity in biocriteria development
This continuation of the planning process shifts attention to  the specific
data needed to define the expectations for the biotic conditions that would
be expected to  occur in the study stream in the absence of human impact.
 Issues requiring consideration at this stage of the process include
    • the database to be formed and evaluated (e.g., the taxonomic
      assemblages or other biological attributes to be used to describe
      biological condition);
                               /
    • the habitat types to be included in the survey (e.g., runs, riffles,
      pools, and snags);

    • the type of reference conditions needed for the program or study
      being formulated (e.g., regional, ecoregional,  or site-specific);

     • the geographical scale to which the biocriteria are applicable (e.g.,
       specific river reach,  watershed, ecoregion, or other parameters);
The development of
useful biocriteria
requires individual
planning for different
waterbodies.
 Planning must
 ensure that program
 objectives are clearly
 defined and that the
 scientific information
 generated  to meet
 program objectives is
 appropriate for
 making environmental
 management
 decisions.
 Interagency
 cooperation should
 be a critical
 component of the
 planning process.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  Definition of the     *
  reference condition is
  a critical step in the
  process.
   u the temporal scale for which biocriteria are being considered (e.g.,
     seasonal, annual, or multiyear);

   * how habitat will be assessed to ensure comparability between the
     reference condition and the habitat at the reference site before
     human impacts;                             .

   • parameters and methods of measurement; and

   • how data from the biosurvey are to be evaluated.

   Data management, analysis, and reporting requirements should also.
be stipulated and planned for prior to initiating field work. Specific infor-
mation dealing with the designation of reference condition and biosurvey
sites is provided in Chapter 3 of this document.
   Because knowledge of biological communities and habitats surround-
ing the surface waters of the study region is essential to effective biological
monitoring, definition of the reference condition Is & critical  step in the
process.  Careful designation of reference conditions and execution of
biosurveys can reduce the likelihood of problems and minimize the costs
associated with fieldwork.
   Knowledge of reference condition may derive from historical data or
from pilot studies of local or regional sites that are relatively undisturbed.
Macroinvertebrate and fish assemblage data have often been routinely col-
lected by state fish and wildlife agencies, water quality agencies, universi-
ties, and others responsible for stream  management Although these
historical databases are often  overlooked in environmental evaluations,
they can be valuable sources of information. An estimation of biological
integrity at a minimally impaired site may be accomplished by reviewing
existing data and publications for specific streams and rivers. Fausch et aL
(1984) developed fish species richness expectations for several midwestern
streams based on historical data sets. Obviously, the usefulness of histori-
cal data for establishing reference condition is dependent on  the original
objective of the data collection effort the collection methods, and the qual-
ity of the data. Even if historical data are inadequate for direct use in des-
ignating the reference condition, they may provide substantial insight
about preexisting conditions at the test or study sites.

• Performing Biosurveys. Performance of the actual biosurvey to charac-
 terize the reference condition entails several activities. Often,  a presurvey
 (pilot study) is necessary to finalize the study plan and the actual logistics
 of the fieldwork. Upon completion of the study plan, technical  staff must
 be fully briefed regarding the study's objectives, quality assurance and
 quality control operations, and methods of data collection and summariza-
 tion. At this point,  the actual biosurvey may be performed. Biosurveys
 may include routine local  monitoring, sampling over wide geographic
 areas, or special case evaluations at one or a few sites.

 • Establishing Biocriteria. After the biosurveys have been completed or
 the historical data evaluated,  the biological status of the reference condi-
 tion is used to help define the biocriteria. Based on the results  of the sur-
 veys, some refinement of aquatic life use designations may be needed for
 particular streams or rivers. After writing the biocriteria, they must under-
 go final review and approval by each state and the EPA.

-------
                                                                                •  •   '..      LiHAPTe-ri 2:
                                                                              Components ofBiocrtteria
     Certain attributes should be considered when drafting formal biocri-
  teria. Ideally, biocriteria should be readily understandable and scientifi-
  cally and legally defensible. Further, they should be protective of the most
  sensitive element of the designated aquatic life use of streams and rivers
  and yet express an attainable condition.
     Thus, biocriteria should be used in decision making, not only for rou-
  tine management procedures but also for guiding resource policy determi-
  nations. For those, decisions to be robust, quality assurance programs must
  ensure long-term database management, including data entry, manipula-
  tion, and analysis.
     Biocriteria provide an initial determination of impairment or  attain-
 ment. Their use may also help to determine sources and causes of  degra-
 dation when combined with survey information and knowledge of how
 organisms react to different stresses (e.g., sight-feeding fish decline when
 turbidity increases; tolerant specie!} increase with nutrient enrichment
 anomalies of 40 to 60 percent occur only in the presence of complex toxic
 effluents and impacts). These response signatures are vital to the success-
 ful use of biocriteria to attain water resource protection.
     The endpoint of water resource-protection using biocriteria is broader
 than clean water. The endpoint of biocriteria and water resource legisla-
 tion is "to restore and maintain the physical, chemical  and biological in-
 tegrity of the nation's waters.*


 Suggested Readings

 Davies, SP., L. Tsomides, D.L. Courtemandtv and F. Drummond. 1991. Biological Moni-
    toring and Biocriteria Development  Prog. Sum. Maine Dep. Environ. Prot, Au-
    gusta, ME.
 Gallant; A.L. et aL 1989.  Regtonalization as a Tool for Managing Environmental Re-
    sources. EPA/600/3-89.060. US. Environ. Profe  Agency,  Environ.  Res. Lab.,
    Corvaffls, OR.                                        .  , '    •
 Karr, JJL 1991. Biological integrity: A long-neglected aspect of water resource manage-
    ment Ecol. Appl. 1:66-84.
 North Carolina Department of Environmental Health and Natural Resources. 1990.
    Standard Operating Procedures, Biological Monitoring. Environ. Sci. Branch, Eco-
    systems Analysis Unit, Biol. Assess. Group, Div. Environ. Manage., Water Qual.
    Sec., Raleigh, N.C                                  ,
 Ohio Environmental Protection Agency. 1987. Biological Criteria  for the  Protection of
    Aquatic Life. In The Role of Biological; Data in Water Quality Assessment Vol. 1.
    Div. Water QuaL Monitor. Assess., Surface Water Sec, Columbus, OH.
—	. 1990. The Use of Biocriteria in the Ohio EPA Surface Water Monitoring and As-
    sessment Program. Columbus, OH.
Plafldn, J.L 1989. Water quality-based controls  and ecosystem recovery. Pages 87-96 « J.
    Cairns Jr., ed. Rehabilitating Damaged Ecosystems. VoL 2. CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL
U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency. 1990. Biological Criteria: National Program
    Guidance for Surface Waters. EPA-440/5-90-004. Off. Water, Washington, DC
,

   Biocriteria should
   be readily
   understandable and
   scientifically and
   legally defensible.
   Further, they should
   be protective of the
   most sensitive
   designated aquatic
   life use of streams
   and rivers and yet
   express an attainable
   condition.
  The endpoint of
  biocriteria and water
  resource legislation is
  "to restore and
  maintain the physical,
  chemical, and
  biological integrity of
  the nation's waters."

-------

-------
                     CHAPTERS.

   The Reference  Condition
     The term biocriteria implies the notion of comparison to the highest at-
     tainable condition. The reference condition establishes the basis for
 making comparisons and for detecting-use impairment; it should be appli-
 cable to an individual waterbody, such as a stream segment, but also to
 similar waterbodies on a regional scale. The reference condition is a critical
 element in the development of a bioaiteria program.


 Establishing the Reference  Condition

 Recognizing that absolutely pristine habitats do not exist (even the most re-
 mote lakes and streams are subject to atmospheric deposition), resource man-
 agers must agree to accept sites at which minimal impacts exist or are
 achievable as the reference condition for a given region. Acceptable reference
 conditions will differ among geographic regions and states because soil con-
 ditions, stream morphology, vegetation, and dominant land use differ be-
 tween regions. In heavily agricultural, industrial-commercial, or urbanized
 regions, undisturbed streams or reaches may not exist and reference condi-
 tions may need to be determined based on that which is likely attainable, the
 historical record, or other methods of estimation.            *
    Reference conditions can  be  established in  a  variety of ways 	
 through reference sites, historical data, simulation models, or expert con-
 sensus.

 • Reference Sites. Reference sites refeor to locations in similar waterbodies
 and habitat types at which data can be collected for comparison with test
 sites. Typical reference sites  include sites  that are upstream  of point
 sources; sites in nearby watersheds; sittes that occur along gradients of im-
 pact (near field/far field); and reference sites that may be applied to a vari-
 ety of test sites in a given area. Sites upstream of point sources may or may
 not  exhibit the quality of the overall reference condition. However, their
 proximity to the site in question makes them a useful qualifier for regional
references, especially in controversial situations.
    Achievable biological conditions may be described through a statistical
evaluation that integrates biological attributes from a group of sites that
have the same characteristics and expectations. This approach can be used
to establish attainment criteria for aquatic life'uses and to test the probabil-
ities of membership in the established site (Maine  Dec.  Environ. Prot.
1993)
 Purpose:
 To provide guidance
 for defining biological
 expectations based
 on a reference •
 condition, and for
 making comparisons
 to test sites.
 The reference
condition establishes
the basis for making
comparisons and for
detecting use
impairment; it should
be applicable to an
individual waterbody,
such as a stream,
segment, but also to
similar waterbodies
on a regional scale.

-------
BIOLOGICAL C
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 Reference conditions
 can be established in
 a variety of ways —
 incorporating
 reference sites,
 historical data,
 simulation models, or
 expert consensus.
• Historical Data. In some cases, data are available that describe biologi-
cal conditions in the region during the past half century. Careful scrutiny
and evaluation of these data provide insight about the communities that
have been or can be achieved in various waterbody types and may be an
important initial phase in the biocriteria development process. These rec-
ords are usually available in natural history museums, university collec-
tions, and some agencies, such as state water resource agencies and fish
and  wildlife, departments; however, some historical biological surveys
were conducted at impaired sites that used inefficient sampling methods,
were insufficiently documented, or had objectives markedly different from
biocriteria determination. Such data are of questionable value for estab-
lishing precise reference conditions and should be used advisedly.

• Simulation Models. Simulation models include mathematical models
(logical constructs following from first principles and assumptions), statis-
tical models (built from observed relationships between variables), or a
combination of the two. The complexity of mathematical models that can
predict reference conditions is potentially unlimited, but as complexity in-
creases, the costs will be higher and some of the model's predictive ability
will  biflbst (Peters, 1991). Thus, models that predict biological reference
conditions should only be used as a last resort and with great caution be-
cause  they involve complex and  untestable  hypotheses (Peters, 1991;
Oreskes et al. 1994). Nevertheless, several models that predict water qual-
ity in rivers and reservoirs from first principles of physics and  chemistry
have been quite successful (e.g., Kennedy and Walker, 1990). Mathematical
models to predict biological conditions have been less successful and, so
far, not very useful in an assessment or management context.
   Statistical models can be fairly simple  in formulation,  such  as the
Vollenweider model and the morphoedaptic index to predict trophic status
(Vbllenweider, 1975; Vighi and Chiaudani, 1985). These models require a
sufficiently large database to develop predictive relationships and, in their
current state of development, predict only nutrient conditions, not the
structure of biological communities
    Hybrid models use both first principles and statistical relationships be-
tween variables. Hybrids are typically large simulation models intended to
predict the behavior of a stream over time; they are commonly used to pre-
dict water quality for management (Kennedy and Walker, 1990). Most exist-
ing models predict water quality variables such as chlorophyll  a, nutrient
concentrations, Secchi depth, and oxygen demand. Inferring the composi-
tion of biological assemblages from predicted water quality would require
another model relating assemblages to stream water quality.
    Model development for biological criteria is still rudimentary. How-
ever, as state databases expand, this tool will become more important and
will likely assume a growing role in establishing reference conditions.

• Expert Opinion/Consensus. When no candidate reference sites are ac-
 ceptable, and models are deemed unreliable, then expert consensus is a
 necessary alternative to establish reference  expectations. Under such cir-
 cumstances, the reference condition may be defined using expert opinion
 based on sound ecological principles applicable to the region  of interest
 Three or four skilled biologists are convened for each assemblage used in

-------
                                                                              :  ,       CHAPTERS:
                                                                            The Reference Conditicn
  the assessment. Each of these experts should be familiar with the streams
  of the region and with the assemblage they will judge. They are asked to
  develop a description of the assemblage in relatively unimpacted streams
  based on their collective experience. The description developed by consen-
  sus will be more qualitative than quantitative. This approach is very diffi-
  cult, however, because of a plausible diversity  of  individual interpre-
  tations and the added risk of subjective evaluation.
     To establish reference conditions, investigators will incorporate any or
    ,°f *ese techniques/ which are riot necessarily independent of each
  other.They can be used mutually to support decisions on reference condi-
  tion. However, the use of reference sites to establish conditions is always
  preferable because sites represent achievable goals and can be regularly
  monitored. Historical data and expert opinion are often used to support
  decisions  regarding reference sites. Simulation models, that incorporate
  historical  data or expert opinion are the primary alternative to reference
  sites and  may be most useful in the assessment of significantly altered
  sites or waterbodies unique to the region under study.
     The most appropriate approach to establishing reference conditions is
  to conduct a preliminary resourcejssessmeht to determine the feasibility
  of using reference sites (Fig. 3-1). If reference sites are not acceptable, then
  some form of simulation modeling may be the best alternative. This situa-
  tion would occur if no "natural" sites exist and "minimally impaired sites-
  are unacceptable. Biological attributes can be modeled from neighboring
  regional site classes, expert consensus, and/or a composite of "best" eco-
 logical information. Such models may be the only viable means of examin-
 ing significantly altered systems. The expectations derived from these
 models may be regarded as hypothetical or temporary until more realistic
 attainment goals can be developed.
    The use of reference sites provides the best estimate of present-day at-
 tainment conditions. The selection of minimally disturbed sites from a site
 class provides the most realistic basis for the expectation that biological
 integrity can be attained. In this situation, the central tendency of the bio-
 logical measure is a conservative estimate of the expected biological condi-
 tion.. Some states,  for  example,  Ohio and Honda, use a lower percentile
 (25th percentile) as their threshold  for attainment When relatively few
 sites are unimpaired and are essentially more than  minimally disturbed,
 an upper percentile of the range of biological values from all sites may be
 the best alternative. An interim expected biological condition can be devel-
 oped from this approach.


 The Use of Reference Sites

 The determination of the reference condition from reference sites is based
 on the premise that streams minimally affected by human activity will ex-
 hibit biological conditions most  natural and attainable for streams in the
 region. Anthropogenic effects include all possible human influences, for
 example, watershed disturbances, habifcat alteration, nonpoint source run-
 off, point source discharges, atmospheric deposition,  and angling pres-
sure.  The  premise   does   not consider   any  human  activities   as
improvements; for example, planting non-native riparian vegetation or
stocking with artificially high abundances of game or non-native fish are
  The most
  appropriate approach
  to establishing
  reference conditions
  is to conduct a
  preliminary resource
  assessment to
  determine the
  feasibility of using
  reference sites.
The determination of
the reference
condition from
reference sites is
based on the premise
that streams minimally
affected by human
activity will exhibit
biological conditions
most natural and
attainable for streams
in the region.

-------
3IOLC31CAL CRITERIA,
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  Two primary
 considerations guide
 the selection of
 reference sites:
 minimal impairment
 and
 representativeness.

 Sites that are
 undisturbed by
 human activities are "
 ideal reference sites.
 However, land use
 practices and
 atmospheric pollution
 have so altered the
 landscape and quality
 of water resources
 nationally that truly
 undisturbed sites are
 rarely available.

                                            PRELIMINARY RESOURCE ASSESSMENT
     Reference Sites
No Rota
•are* Sites
                                                                            Use (1) neighboring
                                                                            site classes, (2) expert
                                                                            consensus, or (3)
                                                                            composite of "best*
Flgur* 3-1.—Approach to establishing reference conditions.
not improvements relative to biological integrity. In practice, most refer-
ence sites will have some of these impacts; however, the selection of refer-
ence sites is made from those with the least anthropogenic influences.
    Reference sites must be carefully selected because they will be used as
sources for the biocriteria benchmarks against which test sites will be com-
pared. The conditions at reference sites should represent the best range of
conditions that can be achieved by similar streams within a particular eco-
logical region. The key to making such biocriteria. benchmarks protective
is to organize sites into classes so that the minimum acceptable perfor-
mance is commensurate with the capability of the resource. Therefore, two
primary considerations guide the selection of reference sites within each
class: minimal impairment and representativeness.

• Minimal Impairment  Sites that are undisturbed by human activities
are ideal reference sites. However, land use practices and atmospheric pol-
lution have so altered the landscape and quality of water resources nation-
ally, that truly undisturbed sites are rarely available. In fact, it can be
argued that no unimpaired sites exist. Therefore, a criterion of "minimally
impaired" must be used to determine the selection of reference sites. In re-

-------
                                                                                        CHAPTERS:
                                                                            The Reference Condition
 gions where even such minimally impaired sites are significantly de-
 graded, the search for suitable sites should be extended over a wider area,
 and multistate cooperation may be essential. The purpose of selecting min-
 imally impaired sites to represent reference conditions is primarily goal-
 setting. Once attainment of these conditions is achieved on a large scale, a
 higher criterion is possible. In no instance should any notably degraded
 condition be accepted as the reference for criteria development.

 • Representativeness.  Reference sites must be  representative of the
 waterbodies under investigation; that is, they must exhibit conditions sim-
 ilar to those of other sites in the same region. Sites that contain locally un-
 usual environmental factors will result in uncharacteristic biological
 conditions and should be avoided.
    The overall goal in the establishment of the reference condition from
 carefully selected reference sites is to describe the biota that investigators
 may expect to find at sites of interest These "test or assessment sites" will
 be compared to the reference sites to determine whether impairment ex-
 ists. The characteristics of appropriate reference sites vary among regions
 qf the country and for different waterbody and habitat types. In general,
 the following characteristics (modified from Hughes et aL 1986) are typical
 of ideal reference sites:

    •  Extensive, natural, riparian vegetation representative of the region.

    •  Representative diversity of substrate materials (fines, gravel, cobbles,
      boulders) appropriate to the region.

    •  Natural channel structures typical of the region (e.g., pools, riffles, runs,
      backwaters, and glides).

    •  Natural hydrograph—in some cases, the flow patterns display large sea-
      sonal differences in response to rainfall and snowmelt; in other cases, sta-
      ble discharges are typical of water that originates from underground
      sources. Biota evolve in the face of natural discharge patterns.
    *  Banks representative of undisturbed streams in the region (generally cov-
      ered by riparian vegetation with little evidence of bank erosion, or under-
      cut banks stabilized by  root wads). Banks  should  provide cover for
      aquatic biota.

    •  Natural color and odor — in some regions, clear, cold water is typical of
      the waterbody types in  the region; in others,  the water is turbid or
      stained.

    •  Presence of animals, such as piscivorous birds, mammals, amphibians,
     and reptiles, that are representative of the region and derive some sup-
     port from aquatic ecosystems.

   A single minimally impaired site cannot be truly representative of any
one region  or population of sites, and a frequent difficulty is matching up-
stream and downstream habitats for valid comparison. For example, if habi-
tat is degraded upstream but not downstream, the effects of a discharge may
be masked. Reference conditions based on multiple sites are more representa-
tive and form a valid basis for establishingquantitative biocriteria.
   One problem in the use of minimally impaired sites as references is
what to do if an area is extensively degraded so  that even these sites ihdi-
 Therefore, a criterion
 of "minimally
 impaired" must be
 used to determine the
 selection of reference
 sites.
The overall goal in
the establishment of
the reference
condition from
carefully selected
reference sites is to
describe the biota
that investigators may
expect to find at sites
of interest.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  In adjusting the
  biocriteria, managers
  must strike a balance
  between the ideal
  restoration of the
  water resource and
  the fact that human
  activity affects the
  environment.
  The purpose of
  classification is to
  group similar things
  together, that is, to
  prevent the
  comparison of apples
  and oranges.
cate significant deterioration. Many systems are altered through channel-
ization, urbanization, construction of dams and highways, or management
for certain sport fisheries or reservoirs (Karr and Dionne, 1991). The condi-
tion of these systems is a result of societal decisions that have to be taken
into account in the development of biocriteria, but they should not com-
promise the objective of defining the natural state. Biocriteria can be quali-
fied by  the assignment of designated uses, but the reference condition
must describe the site as one would expect to find it under natural or min-
imally impaired conditions.
   Although the  biocriteria established for altered systems serve as a
baseline for judging further  degradation, their ultimate goal is to achieve
the sites' recovery to the best attainable condition •— as represented by
conditions at "minimally impaired*  sites. Consensus of expert  opinion
and historical data play an important role in .characterizing the reference
condition for these systems, as does the application of innovative manage-
ment practices to obtain improvement.
   In adjusting the biocriteria, managers must strike a balance between
the ideal restoration of the water resource and the fact that human activity
affects.the environment The most appropriate course of action will use
minimally impaired sites as the maximum amount of degradation that will
be tolerated, thereby ensuring adherence to the antidegradation policy of
the dean Water Act. Continual monitoring should provide the feedback
necessary to make reference site and criteria adjustments  as warranted
during the restoration process.        .


Characterizing Reference Conditions

Characterization of regional reference conditions for biocriteria develop-
ment consists of the following steps:

    1. Classification of the resource. All streams are not alike; therefore,
      reference conditions (expectations) will differ among geographic re-
      gions and stream types.

    2. Selection of the best available sites in each resource class as candi-
      date references.

    3. Characterization — including confirmation and rfconement of the
      reference conditions  — based on a biological survey of reference
      sites.      .             '


 Classification
 The purpose of classification is to group similar things together, that is, to
 prevent the comparison of apples and oranges. Meaningful classification is
 not arbitrary (an apple is not an orange); professional judgment is invariably
 involved to arrive at a workable system that separates dearly different condi-
 tions, yet does not consider  each waterbody or watershed a special case. By
 classifying, we reduce the complexity of biological information. Classification
 improves the resolution or sensitivity of biological surveys to detect impair-
 ment by partitioning or accounting for variation zimong sites.

-------
                                                                                     CHAPTER 3:
                                                                          me Reference CcncW/cn
    There are two fundamental approaches to classification: a priori and a
posteriori (Conquest et al. 1994). A priori classification is a system based
on  preconceived information and theories, for example/ using physio-
graphic provinces to classify streams. The a posteriori approach bases the
classification solely on the data collected and finds classes (e.g., using clus-
ter analysis) within these data.
    In operational assessment and management of streams, an assessment
site is assigned to a class (e.g., mountain headwater streams) before it is
actually surveyed and biological data are collected. Ideally, sites should be
assigned to a class from mapped information before any sampling is done.
Therefore, an a priori classification based on maps or other easily obtain-
able secondary information is often developed for characterizing reference
conditions. The biosurvey data are subsequently used to test that classifi-
cation.                                      ,
    Stream  characteristics that are readily affected by human activities or
occur as a biological response to physical or chemical conditions should
not be used as classification variables. Such responses may include land
use, habitat condition, or nutrient concentrations. For example, in the
southern Rockies ecoregion, riparian zones are heavily forested; and in the
neighboring Arizona/New Mexico Plateau ecoregion, riparian zones are
relatively unvegetated. The classification variable in this case is ecoregion,
and riparian vegetation is a response to ecoregion. If dense riparian vege-
tation were used as a classification variable, we would run the risk of mis-
classifying  an unimpaired,  unvegetated  stream in the Arizona/New
Mexico Plateau as  impaired by comparison to natural,  streams in the
southern Rockies. This example shows that the best classification variables
are  those that are readily obtained from maps or regional water character-
istics^ such as, ecoregion, gradient, alkalinity, and hardness.


Framework for Preliminary Classification
The intent of this protocol is not to develop a classification scheme appli-
cable to the entire United States. Classification must be regional in scope
and must use regional expertise to determine which variables are useful in
a region.
    Classification should be parsimonious to avoid proliferation of classes
that do not contribute to assessment
                  "••                 .'.-''
Ecoregions
Biologists have long noted that assemblages and communities can be clas-
sified according to distinct geographical patterns (e.g., Wallace, 1869; Mac-
Arthur, 1972). We observe  areas of the  country within which types of
ecosystems and their attributes are consistent and similar when compared
to those of other areas. The recognition of such patterns occurs at various
levels: global, continental, regional, and locaL
    Regionalization identifies natural spatial patterns. It accounts for spa-
tial variation by partitioning the landscape into smaller areas  of greater
homogeneity. Ecological regkmalization (as one type of regjonalization) re-
sults in a map of ecological regions, or ecoregions. Such maps bring spatial
organization to ecological variability. They are useful in a variety of ways,
for  example, to summarize the condition of resources in a particular area,
The intent of this
protocol is not to
develops
classification scheme
applicable to the
entire United States.
Classification must be
regional in scope and
must use regional
expertise to
determine which
variables are useful in
a region.

-------
3!CLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Tetnnical Guidance for Streams ana Small Rivers
  The basic goal of
  regionalization is to
  depict areas of
  ecological
  homogeneity relative
  to other areas.
  One advantage of
  having a consistent
  framework is that
  states that share the
  same ecoregion can
  cooperate across   •
  political boundaries.
  In times of limited
  resources, such
  cooperation makes
  financial as  well as
  scientific sense.
to identify potential or achievable ecological conditions (e.g., regionally
achievable biooiteria), to characterize typical impact types and impair-
ments/to develop protective and remedial procedures that are tailored to
unique regional characteristics,  and to present scenarios of realistically
achievable ecological conditions  in particular regions (Gallant et aL 1989;
Hughes etal. 1990; Omernik and Gallant, 1990).
   The basic goal of regionalization is to depict areas of ecological homo-
geneity relative to other areas. Fenneinan (1946) defined physiographic
provinces within which the physical characteristics of the landscape, such
as surface relief and slope, were homogenous  relative  to other areas..
Kuchler (1964) identified regions of similar potential natural vegetation.
    Ecological regionalization should take into account all pertinent avail-
able information in the depiction of regions, at whatever scale the regions
are to be defined (Omernik, 1987). Primary categories of information used
in the process are (1) factors that control spatial patterns, such as climate,
topography, and mineral availability (soils, geology); and (2) factors that
respond to or  integrate these controlling factors/ such as vegetation and
land use. Both sets of  categories and each  factor within them must be
judged for their usefulness in depicting regions. In some areas, one combi-
nation^ factors may be more useful than another for detecting regional
patterns, and care must be taken to select the right combination each time.
The complex interplay among the various factors must also be considered.
    Omernik's approach to defining ecoregions grew out of an effort to
classify streams for more effective water quality.management Thus, it is
one of the few ecological frameworks expressly intended for water quality
assessment. In examining spatial patterns of stream quality data, it became
clear that neither major land resource areas nor  Bailey's ecoregions were
adequate (Hughes and Omernik, 1981; Omernik, 1987; Omernik et al.
1982). Hydrologic unit classifications have also been used as a framework
for water quality assessments, and drainage basins influence fish distribu-
tions, but the spatial differences in the quantity and quality of aquatic re-
sources  usually  correspond  more  to ecoregions than  to topographic
divides (Omernik and Griffith, 1991).
    Ecoregions have been used successfully to stratify the biotic character-
istics of streams in Arkansas (Rohm et aL 1987), Nebraska (Bazata, 1991),
Ohio (Larsen et al. 1986), Oregon (Hughes et al. 1987; Whittier et al. 1988),
Wisconsin (Lyons, 1989), and the region of the Appalachians (Gerritsen et
al. 1993). Arkansas, Minnesota, and Ohio use the ecoregion/ biocriteria ap-
proach in their standards program; and several other states, such as Flor-
ida, Mississippi, Alabama, Idaho,  Montana, Oregon, Washington,  and
Iowa, are evaluating the advantages of using ecoregions for biological as-
 sessments.
    One advantage of  having a consistent framework is that states that
 share the same ecoregion  can  cooperate across political boundaries. In
 times of limited resources, such cooperation makes financial as well as sci-
 entific sense.  Where ecoregional biological criteria and use designations
 have been tested, they have proven to be cost-effective and protective tools
 (Hughes, 1989). EPA's Science Advisory Board (SAB) has concluded that
 the ecoregion concept "is superior  to the classification methods that are
 currently used by most environmental managers" (U.S.  Environ. Prot.
 Agency, 1991e).

-------
                                                                                      CHAPTERS:
                                                                           The Reference Condition
     Careful review of the purposes for regionalization and selection of the
  appropriate regional framework is an important part of the development
  of biocriteria. It may also be necessary to increase the resolution of existing
  regional frameworks by defining separate regions  or subregions. Tech-
  niques for this process are described in the references listed in this docu-
  ment, particularly in  Omemik's  studies  and  Iffrig  and  Bowles's
  compendium of regional frameworks (1993).

  Watersheds

  Watersheds are a spatial organizing unit that can be used to develop
  biocntena; however, watershed  boundaries' are  not inconsistent with
  ecoregions. Increasing attention has been focused on reorienting water
  quality management programs to operate basinwide oh a more compre-
  hensive, coordinated basis, rather than within strict programmatic bound-
  ane« as has been the norm. EPA's Watershed Protection Approach (U.S.
  Environ. Prot AgTency, 1991f; 1993) is intended to encourage states to move
  in the direction of basinwide water quality management. The basinwide
  approach provides a framework within which to design an optimal mix of
  water  quality  management strategies. By integrating and coordinating
  across program and agency boundaries, basinwide management teams can
 implement integrated solutions using limited resources. Thus they can ad-
  dress the most significant water quality problems without losing sight of
 other factors contributing to the degradation of the resource.  Integration
 through the basinwide approach helps managers achieve the short- and
 long-term goals for the basin by allowing the application of resources in a
 timely and geographically targeted manner.
    Basinwide management, as designed and implemented by states and
 EPA, contains certain features  that make it an achievable element of the
 biocnteria process:

 • River Basin Management Units. The state is divided into large-scale
 basins that provide unique units for management.  All program activities
 that can be facilitated by or that affect basinwide management are coordi-
 nated.  For instance, data requirements are aggregated and incorporated
 within monitoring plans, interpretations are pooled to arrive at overall as-
 sessments, and management recommendations are the result of collabora-
 tion (e.g., teams  of  modelers, permit writers, biologists, hydrologists,
 planners, engineers)..                                          ^

 • Geographic Risk-based Targeting. Because all states have  limited re-
 sources and are not able to assess and solve every problem in a watershed,
 basin management frameworks establish a set of criteria for targeting efforts
 to solve the most important problems in a given area. These problems may
 include risks to water quality, aquatic life, or human  health. While every
 basin in a state is visited during a basin management cycle, some waters
 within and across basins receive a great deal more attention than others.

• Direct Link to Regionalization. An important feature of the basin man-
agement approach is its ability to incorporate a nested hierarchy of hydro-
logic units.  Minshall (1993) discusses the need  to assess  ecological
condition in streams and rivers within a hierarchical landscape-scale
 Careful review of the
purposes for
regionalization and
selection of the
appropriate regional
framework is an
important part of the
development of
biocriteria. It may also
be necessary to
increase the
resolution of existing
regional frameworks
by defining separate
regions or subregions.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers

-------
   approach. FnsseU et al. (1986) present a hierarchical framework for classi-
   fying stream habitat within an overall watershed perspective. Their frame-
   work 1S designed so that the class of any particular system  is partially
   determined by the class of the higher-level system of which it is a compc-
   nent.                ,                                          -,r

   _   At the broadest scale of organization, Frissell et aL (1986)  recognized
   stream systems (1.6., watersheds), followed in order of increasing spTtial
   resolution (and decreasing spatial extent) by segment, reach, pool or riffle,
  and microhabitat systems. Minshall (1993) extends the uppeVend of this
  classification scheme to include biogeodimatic regions, £. providing^
  direct connection to ecoregions; and Gregory et aL (1991) similarly discuss
  the ecosystem attributes of riparian zones.                       «»"«».
     Table 3-1 summarizes the Frissell et al. (1986) classification framework
  as  modified  by  Minshall  (1993).  Initial  stratification of  sites  by
  r0?0^*1? rc8i0nS Can * Perfonned using ecoregion delineation (Om-
  erruk, 1987). Incorporation of flow information using procedures of Poff
  and Ward (1989) provides further refinement of this scale of stratification
  and includes explicit recognition of flow as a major environmental deter-
                                         (Minshall, 1993; Rabeni and
     Ecoregions are the preferred classification for establishing reference ex-
 pectations in watersheds because  biota and  biotic metrics respond to
 ecoregional differences. Ecoregional stream systems are defined primarily
 by local conditions of climate, geology, topography, and terrestrial vegeta-
 tion. Three examples of ecoregions are sufficient to illustrate biological
 variability:                       •                     • ..  '  '

     1. The Calapooia River watershed (Fig. 3-2) in western Oregon crosses
       three ecoregions: the Willamette Valley plains; the transitional foot-
       rcKm^"'!.""?. ** Westem Cascades  (Omemik and  Griffith,
       1991). Fan, benthic macroinvertebrates, and chemical and physical
       habitat from 17 sites along the length of the watershed were sam-
                                            /„••«:
                                                           —.—/0\.
• liiimiii viiiir
• I'ill Cntl
O Itstir* Cltcffls
O tlltm CIICKII
Figure 3-2.--Reclprocal averaging ordination of sites by fish

     ,aTh!dl °reflr ' ^ lnS8t
     in the rivers and ecoregions.
                                                       the Calapooia
                                                                                    ..    CHAPTERS:
                                                                             The Reference Condition
                                                                          Ecoregions are the
                                                                          preferred
                                                                          classification for
                                                                          establishing reference
                                                                          expectations in
                                                                          watersheds because
                                                                          biota and biotic
                                                                         -metrics respond to
                                                                          ecoregional
                                                                          differences.

-------
Technical Guidance (or Streams and Small Rivers
 Acceptable
 reference sites will
 differ among
 geographic regions
 and states because
 soil conditions,
 stream morphology,
 physiography,
 vegetation, and
 dominant land uses
 differ between regions.
     pled to assess changes in the river as it passed through these
     ecoregions. The presumption was that similar biological communi-
     ties would be found in areas of similar habitat, and that variation
     would correspond to observable patterns of change in the terrestrial
     features of the watershed.
         The study results indicate that imposing an ecoregions frame-
     work on the watershed delineation is a useful predictor of stream
     reaches having similar biological communities. Although there was
     change in the communities along the watershed, distinct assem-
     blages could be identified corresponding to the separate ecoregions
     within the Calapooia River watershed.

    2. Ohio consists of two hydrograpnic basins, a Lake Erie drainage and
     an Ohio River drainage. Hydrograpnic boundaries restrict fish dis-
     persal, and there are minor faunal differences between the two ba-
     sins (Ohio Environ. Prot. Agency, 1987; Yoder,  1991). Ohio also
     includes parts of five ecoregions, and  ecoregional differences ac-
     count for a substantial amount of the variance in fish metrics and in
     the index of biotic integrity (IBI). Two  ecoregions straddle the di-
    - -vide between the basins, one is entirely in the Lake Erie drainage,
     and two are entirely in the Ohio River drainage. If there are major
     differences between drainage basins, then the ecoregions that strad-
     dle the basins should be more variable. However, variability  of IBI
     scores in all five ecoregions is similar, showing that drainage basins
     are negligible compared  to ecoregions for explaining biological
     variability.

    3. Florida comprises two major drainages, the Gulf of Mexico and the
     Atlantic Ocean. Examination of invertebrate metrics at reference
     sites in Florida reveal three ecoregional classes: northwest Florida
     (the Florida panhandle); peninsular Florida, and northeast Florida
     (EA, Inc., and Tetra Tech, Inc., 1994). Peninsular and northeast Flor-
     ida both  straddle the divide between the Atlantic and Gulf drain-
     ages; yet there are no major differences in metric values between
      Atlantic and Gulf basin sites on the Florida peninsula, and the pen-
     insula differs markedly from the panhandle  region, which is  in the
      Gulf drainage.

   Biogeographic differences between watersheds can be important when
the watersheds are separated by a  major, largely impenetrable barrier,
such as the Continental Divide. Drainage dividers in more level terrain ap-
parently do not cause significant differences in reference expectations.
    Implementation of biocriteria, as noted earlier, is best  accomplished
through an ecoregionalization approach. The  implications of this with re-
spect to states that are developing basinwide management approaches is
that there may be a set of reference conditions and biocriteria established
for each of the separate ecoregjon areas within a given basin. Ecoregional
reference conditions arid biocriteria will likely be transferable across  basins
in a given state and — to the extent .that ecoregions cross state boundaries
— across states. This will enhance the ability of adjacent states to develop
coordinated basinwide management plans for interstate basins by provid-
ing a common set of reference conditions and data to be applied in the cor-
responding ecoregions.

-------
                                                                         The Reference Condition
Site Selection                      ,
Because absolutely pristine habitats do not exist, resource managers must,
as previously rioted, decide what level of disturbance is acceptable in the
area that represents an achievable or existing reference condition. That is, a
critical element in establishing reference conditions is deciding how to de-
termine that a site is only 'minimally impaired.' How much degradation
can be allowed? Acceptable reference sites will differ among geographic
regions and states because soil  conditions, stream morphology, physio-
graphy, vegetation, and dominant land uses differ between regions.
   The selection of representative and minimally impaired reference sites
involves qualitative and quantitative information based on past experience
and potential disturbances in regional streams. Factors that should be con-
sidered in a preliminary selection, in approximate order of importance, in-
clude the following:
    1. Drainage wholly within the ecoregion of interest

    2. No upstream impoundments.

    3. No known discharges (NFDES) or contaminants in place.

    4. No known spills or other  pollution incidents.
    5. Low human population density.

    6. Low agricultural activity.

    7. Low road and highway density.
    8. Drainage on public lands.

    9. Minimal nonpoint source problems (agriculture, urban, logging,
       mining, feedlots, acidic deposition).
   10. No known intensive fish stocking (e.g., put-and-take stocking) or
       other management activities that would substantially shift the
       community composition.
    In most settled regions of the country, reference sites will be selected
by searching topographic maps for streams with the least human impacts.
If candidate reference sites are more numerous than can be sampled, they
should be selected randomly. Random selection will be especially impor-
tant in regions with large undeveloped or undisturbed areas (e.g., moun-
tainous regions, federal lands). Agricultural and heavily populated regions
— including most of the East, Midwest, and California — will require sub-
jective (nonrandom) reference site selection.

Examples
Montana Reference Conditions                      .
The Montana Department of'Health' and Environmental Sciences (1990)
has compiled data that describe  reference conditions. Thirty-eight streams
were proportionally allocated among six ecoregions in Montana, and the
following criteria were  used to determine a set of candidate reference-
streams.                          ,

     1. Most or all of the drainage basin of candidate streams is in the
       "most typical" area of the ecoregion.
In most settled
regions of the country,
reference sites will be
selected by searching
topographic maps for
streams with the least
human impacts.

-------
3ICLOGICAL
Technical Guidance'for Streams and Small Rivers
                                 2. Each ecoregjon includes at least two second-order.streams, two
                                    third-order streams, and two fourth- or fifth-order streams.

                                 3. Reference streams are not water quality limited.

                                 4. The same streams serve as references for proposed Montana
                                    nonpoint source demonstration projects.

                                 5. Reference streams adequately represent the major water use
                                    classifications in each ecoregion.

                                 6. Information is available on the kinds and abundances of fish
                                .   species present in the streams.                        •

                                 7. Sampling sites have comparable habitat from stream to stream
                                    and are located to minimize human impacts and access problems.

                             Site selection in the Appalachian Ridge and Valley
                             Because of differences in dominant land use and amounts of degradation,
                             neighboring ecoregions may have widely different reference sites and con-
                             ditions. For example, in the Central Appalachian Ridge and  Valley eco-
                             region~criteria for selecting reference sites  differ between the region's
                             agricultural valley subecoregions  and its forested  ridge  subecoregions
                             (Gerritsenetal. 1993; Omerniketal. 1992).                     '
                                 The Ridge and Valley region of the Appalachians consists of sharply
                             folded sedimentary strata that have eroded, resulting in a washboard-like
                             relief of resistant ridges alternating with valleys of less-resistant rocks. The
                             region has been divided into four subecoregions corresponding to ridges
                             and valleys of different parent material (Omernik et al. 1992):
                                 • Limestone valleys are characterized by calcareous bedrock and predomi-
                                   nantly agricultural land use.
                                 • Shale valleys axe characterized by noncalcaireous bedrock, primarily
                                   shale; and lower intensity agricultural land use.   .

                                 • Sandstone ridges are characterized by highly resistant sandstones and
                                   forested land use.
                                 • Shale ridges are characterized by shale bedrock and forested land use.

                                 Each subecoregion imparts characteristic topography, hydrology, and
                             water chemistry to streams and thus influences biota. The subecoregions
                             are not continuous but interdigitate throughout the Ridge and Valley.
                                 The least impacted sites occur on the ridges,  where land use is pre-
                             dominantly forested, and where protected lands (e.g., national forests, rec-
                             reation areas) are common. In contrast, nearly aE streams in the valleys,
                             and especially in the limestone valleys, are impacted by agriculture, habi-
                             tat modification, and other nonpoint sources. "Minimally impaired'' is,
                             therefore, interpreted on a relative, sliding scale in each subecoregion. Ref-
                             erence sites for the ridges are strictly defined: they are unimpacted except
                             by atmospheric sources. They have no discharges, nearly complete forest
                             cover in the drainage,  and no recent construction or clearcutting in the
                             drainage. Reference  sites in the valley subecoregions are less strictly de-
                             fined; that is, the interpretation of minimally impaired is flexible enough '
                             to allow a sufficient number of reference sites to be selected.

-------
                                                                                             CHAPTERS:
                                                                                The Reference Condition
  Confirmation

 Following site selection, reference sites are surveyed (see Chapter 4) to col-
 lect biological and physical data. The data are used to confirm and refine
 the a priori classification, to characterize reference conditions, and to es-
 tablish biocriteria (see  Chapter 6). A general guide for confirming refer-
 ence conditions, the effectiveness of classification is its ability to partition
 variation. If a classification using a set of variables does not account for
 variability, it is of little use; the greater the amount of variance accounted
 for by classification, thejnore effective the classification.
    A key analysis method for evaluating the strengm of metrics to detect
 impairment is a graphic display using box-and-whisker plots (Fig. 3-3). In
    Max
   Min
              /nuvnuvn
                     I
                                interquartile
                                  ranga
              tnnifntfn
                     T
                                scope for
                                dateeting
X
                                                       T
                      A general guide for
                      determining the
                      effectiveness of
                      classification is its
                      ability to partition
                      variation.      .     •
                Reference                           Impaired
     a. Metrics that have high values under reference (unimpaired) conditions.
    Max
   Min
                    I
                    T
                                                        T
                                scope) for
                                detecting
                               impairment
                               interquartile
                                 range
                                                       T
                Reference                            Impaired

          b. Metrics that have low values under reference conditions.

Figure 3-3.—Generalized box-and-whlskor plots illustrating percentlles and the detec-
tion coefficient of metrics.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  The fundamental
  problem of biological
  assessment is not
  whether two
  populations (or
  samples) have a
  different mean, but
  whether an individual
  site (e.g., a lake) is a
  member of the
  least-impaired
  reference population.
  Since assessment is
  based on multiple
  metrics or species
  composition,
  multivariate tests may
  be more convenient
  than a succession of
  individual tests.
the display shown here, the central point is the median value of the vari-
able; the box shows the 25th and 75th percentiles (interquartile range); and
the whiskers show the minimum to the maximum values (range). Box-
and-whisker plots are simple, straightforward, and powerful; the inter-
quartile ranges are used to evaluate real differences between two areas
and to determine whether a particular metric is a good candidate for use
in the assessment
   Statistical methods used by biologists to determine whether two or
more populations have different means using t tests include the analysis of
variance and various nonparametxic methods. However, the fundamental
problem of biological assessment is not whether two populations (or sam-
ples) have a different mean, but whether an individual site (e.g., a lake) is
a member of the least-impaired reference population. If it is not, then the
second question is, how far has it deviated from that reference? Such bio-
logical assessment requires the entire distribution of a metric, which is eas-
ily shown with a box-and-whisker plot.
   In operational bioassessment, metric values below the lower quartile
of reference conditions are typically judged impaired to some degree  (e.g.,
Ohio Environ. Prot. Agency, 1990). The actual percentile chosen (25,10, or
5) is arbitrary and reflects the amount of uncertainly a monitoring pro-
gram can tolerate. The distance from the lower quartile can be termed a
"scope for detection" {Fig. 3-3). The larger this distance is, compared to the
interquartile range, the easier it is to detect deviations from the reference
condition. Thus, we. define a "detection coefficient''  as the ratio of the
interquartile range to the scope for detection. This coefficient is analogous
to the coefficient of variation (CV); the smaller the value, the easier it is to
detect impairment
    Univariate tests of classifications  include all the standard statistical
tests for comparing two or more groups: t test, analysis of variance, sign
test, Wilcoxon rank test, Mann-Whitney U-test (Ludwig and Reynolds,
1988). These methods are used to test for significant differences .between
groups (or classes) and to confirm or reject the classes. However, failure to
confirm the classification for any single response variable does not mean
that it will fail for other response variables.
    Since assessment is based on multiple metrics or species composition,
multivariate tests may be more convenient than a succession of individual
tests. Discriminant analysis is a  multivariate test included in many statis-
tical software packages. It is a one-way analysis of variance that tests dif-
ferences between a set of groups based on several response variables; and
it can be used as a test  of classifications  (Conquest et al.  1994), provided
that the assumptions of linearity and normality are met.
    A satisfactory analysis is to develop quantitative, predictive models of
biological response to habitat variables. Using a defined population of refer-
 ence sites that are relatively undisturbed, investigators can develop an em-
 pirical (statistical) model that predicts biological communities based on the
 habitat variables (e.g., Wright et aL 1984; Moss et aL 1987). Univariate mod-
 els, such as multiple regression or analysis of covariance, are linear and re-
 quire appropriately transformed linear variables. Community metrics tend
 to respond linearly, or can be readily transformed to linearly responding
 variables. Species abundances are typically nonlinear (usually unimodal) in
 response to environmental variables and require nonlinear models.

-------
    60

    50

    40

fi  30

    20

    10
                       i
                                   Range
          HELP       IP      EOLP    WAP
                           ECOREGIONS
Rgura 3-4.—Indax of Blotlc Integrity at Ohio rafarwea afta*.
                                                         ECBP
    10.0

•ff-
 m
   20.0

                                                                  $
                                                                  I
                         I                  2                  3
                                IJOG WA
Rgura 3-5.—Fish apadaa richnaaa aa • function of tha log of waterahad araa. Bara to
right indlcata ranga of obaarvatlona bafora ragraaalon and ranga of raalduala attar ra-
grasaion. Raalduala hava amallar variance than tha original obaarvationa.
   To illustrate the role classification plays in partitioning variation, an
example is drawn from an extensive biosurvey database developed by the
Ohio  EPA. A national map of ecoregions (Omernik, 1987) indicates that
parts  of five ecoregions fall within Ohio. Comparison of the range of the
IBI, a  measure of fish assemblage condition, illustrates that one ecoregion,
the Huron/Erie Lake Plain, is characterised by substantially lower values
than that observed in the other ecoregions (Fig. 3-4). The IBI was highest in
the Western Allegheny Plateau ecoregion.
                                                                       Careful classification
                                                                       contributes
                                                                       significantly to the
                                                                       refinement and use of
                                                                       reference conditions
                                                                       for establishing
                                                                       biocriteria.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                  In this example, classification is used iteratively, that is, decisions for
                              successive classifications are based on their ability to partition variation
                              from that which would be present on a statewide basis.
                                  One way to partition variance is by examining possible gradients to
                              which the indicators of biotic condition may be related. Some possible gra-
                              dients are stream size, physical habitat condition, and stream gradient In
                              Figure 3-5, species richness is plotted against a log of watershed area; the
                              watershed area is used as a surrogate measure of stream size. The relation-
                              ship is clear: increasing species richness in  the reference site occurs as
                              stream size (watershed area) increases. In this case, watershed size is used
                              as a covariate  to provide adjustments in the expected number of species
                              associated with the drainage area within each class size.
                                  In summary, careful classification contributes significantly to the re-
                              finement and use of reference conditions for establishing biocriteria. An it-
                              erative process is envisioned by which various classifications of regions
                              and subregions are proposed and evaluated against partitioning of vari-
                              ance:  successful classifications partition variance effectively;  ineffective
                              classifications  provide little improvement beyond no classification. This
                              evaluation process should generally involve multiple metrics to judge the
                              success of multiple purpose ecoregion classifications.


                              Suggested Readings

                              Gallant; A.L. et  aL 1989. RegionaUzation as a tool for managing environmental re-
                                  sources. EPA 600/3-89/060.  Environ. Res. Lab.,  U.S. Environ. Prot Agency,
                                  Corvallis, OR.
                              Hughes, RM, DJP. Larsen, and JJvi. Omemik. 1986. Regional reference sites: A method
                                  for assessing stream potentials. Environ. Manage. 10:629-35.
                              Iffrig, G.F. and M. Bowles. 1983. A compendium of ecological and natural subdivisions
                                  of the U.S. Nat Areas J. 33-11.
                              Omenuk, JJvL 1987. Ecoregions of the conterminous United States. Annu. Ass. Am.
                                  Geogr.77(l):118-2S.
                              Omemik,  J.M. and G.E. Griffith. 1991. Ecological  regions versus hydrologic units:
                                  Frameworks for managing water quality. J. Soil Water Conserv. 46(5)33440.
                              US. Environmental Protection Agency. 1991d. Biological Criteria: Research and Regula-
                                  tion Proceedings of the Symposium. EPA440/5-91-005. Off. Water, Washington,
                                  DC.

-------
                     CHAPTER 4.

              Conducting  the
                    Biosurvey
 ^^^he primary goals of a bioasses-smenfc-bioaiteria program are to eval-
   •  uate water resource integrity, to provide information on the attain-
   •  ability and appropriateness_fif existing uses, and to determine the
 extent and degree of water resource impairment
    State bioassessment-biocriteria programs are usually designed to ad-
 dress one or more of four water resource management objectives:

     1. Aquatic Life Use Designation. Assess the aquatic life use attain-
      ment for the  state's streams and rivers.  The incorporation of
      bioassessment into this process is a major function of biological cri-
      teria.                                   '.'...

     2. Sensitive Waters Identification. Characterize high quality waters
      for protection. High quality waters may become part of the refer-
      ence database or be classified separately as unique waters.

  ,   3. Diagnostics. Determine  sources  of impairment and potential
      stressors. Biological response signatures are used in  conjunction
      with chemical, lexicological, and physical data to identify causes of
      .impairment.

    4. Program Evaluation. Monitor effectiveness of pollution abatement
      programs, including wastewater treatment, watershed restoration,
      and other water resource quality improvement programs Bio-
      surveys and the biocriteria benchmarks are used to assess the re-
      covery of the aquatic community.

   Detailed multidiscipliriary ecological  studies are often  designed to
examine aquatic systems by measuring the'elements and processes of bib-
logical communities and by describing the physical and chemical charac-
teristics of the waterbody. Biological attributes that may be included in
such studies are individual health, trophic organization, measures of pri-
mary, secondary, and tertiary production (bodily growth and reproduc-
tion), recruitment of key species, predator-prey relationships, population
dynamics, and taxonomic structure of assemblages.
   While seasonal accommodation is preferable for most bioassessment
programs, a single annual sample at a carefully selected time is sufficient
Purpose:
To provide guidance
to technical staff for
developing
cost-effective
biosurvey methods
with appropriate
resources, expertise,
and technical
considerations.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams ana Smail nivers
 Quality assurance
 and control should be
 a continuous process
 throughout the
 development and
 operation of the
 biocriteria program,
 including all aspects
 of the study.
  Quality assurance
  and control pervade
  all aspects of an
  ecological study:
   m Study design
   • Field operations
   m Laboratory activities
   • Data analysis
   u Reporting
to characterize biological conditions accurately. Selection of the sampling
period should be based on efforts to minimize variability and maximize
the efficiency of the equipment and the accessibility of the biota being
sampled. Minimal between-year variability is partially addressed by sam-
pling at the same time each year to correct for the natural variability in
seasonal cycles.
    Water quantity, quality, and climatic conditions should help rather
than hinder the efficiency of the sampling gear. For example, if certain
flow conditions are necessary for the equipment's performance, sampling
schedules should coincide with those conditions. Above all, sampling
should occur when the targeted assemblage or assemblages are accessible.
For fish, the optimal sampling period in most parts of the country is likely
to be from June through September; in general, these months avoid high
and low flows, spawning periods, and migration activity. Sampling should
be timed to avoid extremes in environmental and biological conditions.


The Quality Assurance Plan

A major consideration  when  designing  bioassessment  studies is not
whether a particular biosurvey approach is more refined than another, but
whether the selected approach will achieve the objectives defined in the
management plan. A dear definition of management responsibilities and
effective quality assurance and quality control procedures (see Chapter 2)
are essential  to ensure the usefulness of monitoring data (Plafkin  et al.
1989).
    Quality assurance plans have two primary functions (Klemm  et aL
1990). The first function is to ensure that the survey process reliably meets
program objectives; the second is to monitor the reliability of the survey
data to determine their accuracy, precision, completeness, comparability,
and representativeness.
    A quality assurance plan should be developed at the onset of an eco-
logical study to delineate responsibility, establish accountability, and en-
sure the reliability of the data (Striblihg and Barbour, 1991). The quality
assurance plan should answer three questions:

    • What kind of data or information is needed?

    • Why is the information or data needed?

     • What level of quality is needed to ensure the reliability of decisions
      based on these data?

     Quality assurance for a biocriteria program is concerned with the in-
 tegrity of the data used to establish biocriteria limits and thresholds along
 with the documentation that supports the derivation and maintenance of
 the biocriteria. Quality assurance for specific studies pertains to the data
 acquisition, their application to established biocriteria, and the validity of
 associated judgments.
     Quality  assurance  and  control should  be  a continuous process
 throughout the development and operation of the program, including all
 aspects of the study: design, field collection, habitat assessment, laboratory
 processing of samples, database management, analysis, and reporting. The

-------
                                                                         Conducting the Biosurvey
appropriateness of the investigator's methods and procedures and the
quality of the data to be obtained must be assured before the results can be
accepted and used in decision making. Quality assurance is accomplished
through data quality objectives, investigator training, standardized data
gathering and processing procedures, verification of data reprodutibility,
and instrument calibration and maintenance.
    The use of data quality objective's in field studies (Klemm et al. 1990;
Plafkin et al. 1989; U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency, 1984b, 1986) has much to
offer the biocriteria development and implementation process. Data qual-
ity objectives are qualitative and quantitative statements within the quality
assurance plan that address specific decisions or regulatory actions. Gen-
erally, data quality objectives consist of a priori statements about the level
of uncertainty a decision maker will  accept in environmental data. In the
data quality objectives process, the quality of particular data is measured
by predetermined types and amounts of error associated with their collec-
tion and interpretation.
Quality Management

The implementation of a biocriteria program requires quality management
or the proper combination of resources and expertise. State agencies will
differ in levels of biological expertise, facilities, and quality of equipment
States already having well-developed bioassessment programs generally
have experienced and well-trained biologists, appropriately equipped fa-
cilities, and properly maintained sampling gear. A successful biocriteria
program depends on (1) a dear definition of goals, (2) the active use of
biomonitoring data in decision making, and (3) die allocation of adequate
resources to ensure a high-quality program.     i


Biocriteria Program Structure, Personnel, and Resources
Monitoring agencies can and should enhance theii program by coopera-
tion with others. For example, they should seek coordination with, and
staff assistance from, state fishery, land management, geology, agriculture,
and water  quality agencies. If federally employed aquatic biologists are
stationed in a state or if the state has substantial federal lands, cooperative
bioassessments and biocriteria development programs should be initiated.
Scientists at state universities should also be included in the planning and
monitoring phases of the program; their students make excellent field as-
sistants and future state ecologists.

• Personnel. Several trained and experienced biologists should be avail-
able to provide more thorough evaluations, support for various activities,
and serve as quality control checks. They should have training and experi-
ence commensurate with the needs of the program. At least one staff mem-
ber should be familiar  with establishing a quality assurance framework.
The program should have at least one biologistjbr every" 4,000 miles of
stream in the state (CYoder and R. Thoma, personal communication).

• Resources.  Laboratory and field facilities and semces should be in
place and operationally consistent with the designed jprposes of the pro-
gram so that high quality environmental data may degenerated and pro-
Monitoring agencies
can and should
enhance their
program by
coordination with, and
staff assistance from,
state fishery, land
management,
geology, agriculture,
and water quality
agencies.

-------
SIQLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                             cessed in an efficient and cost-effective manner (Klemm et aL 1990). Ade-
                             quate taxonomic references and scientific literature should support data
                             processing and interpretation.

                             • Program Elements
                                 1. Quality assurance and qualify control (e.g., standard operating
                                   procedures, training)

                                 2. Delineated reference conditions with annual updates
                                   corresponding to seasons of sampling

                                 3. Multiple assemblage biosurvey

                                 4. Habitat assessment

                                 5. Documentation of program and study plans

                             • Technical Considerations
                                 1. Assign taxonomy to the lowest possible level based on published
                                   keys and descriptions; maintain voucher collections
                                 27Schedule multiple season sampling if warranted by type of impact
                                   and life strategy of assemblage
                                 3. Use multiple metrics to refine the assessment
                                 4. Initiate detailed quality assurance and quality control procedures
                                   in the field, laboratory, and taxonomy
                                 5. Provide computer hardware and software (database management,
                                   data analysis) with computer training of staff

                                 Different levels of training and experience are necessary for the per-
                             sonnel involved in the design and implementation of biocriteria programs.
                             the qualifications and general job descriptions of four levels of profes-
                             sional staff are presented here. Also described are suitable substitutions for
                             these prerequisites and experience.

                             • Professional Staff

                                  1. Level 4 — Plans, conducts, and supervises projects of major signifi-
                                   cance, necessitating advanced knowledge and the ability to origi-
                                   nate and apply new and unique methods and procedures. Supplies
                                   technical advice and counsel to other professionals. Generally oper-
                                   ates with wide latitude for unreviewed action.
                                   Typical Title: Project Manager, Chief Biologist.
                                   Normal Qualifications: Phi), or M.S. and equivalent experience.   .
                                   Experience: Ten or more years, at least three years in a leadership
                                   or managerial position.

                                 2. Level 31—Under general supervision of project manager, plans, con-
                                    ducts and supervises bioassessment tasks such as trend monitoring
                                    or special studies. Estimates and schedules work to meet completion
                                    dates. Directs support assistance, reviews progress, and evaluates re-
                                    sults; makes changes in methods, design, or equipment as necessary.
                                    Operates with some latitude for unreviewed action or decision.

-------
    • '   .                 .      • . •    .    -                  ..
      T>Tical Title: Project Biologist, Group Leader, Crew Leader
      Normal Qualification: M.S., B.S., or equivalent experience.
      ^S^^^




     Typical Title: Associate Biologist, Environmental Scientist
     NonnalQttalifications:B.S. or equivalent experience"        "
     Experience: Three to eight yeaas in or rekfed to freshwater biology.


    Typical Title: Field Technician,
                                                                         Conducting the Biosuryey
    Experience: zero to three years,
Experience/Qualifications Substitutions


-------
SiCLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Tednnical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  Effective quality
  control procedures
  are essential to insure
  the usefulness of the
  data for biocriteria
  development and
  environmental
  decision making, and
  to maintain the
  bioassessment
  program.
                                                    Protect M«iag*r/Pffncip*llriv*stigttor '
                                                                   QA Officer
                                                  ECOLOGICAL PROJECT ACTIVITY CUSSES
                                SAMPLING
                                 DESIGN
                  REU5
                ACTIVITIES
LABORATORY
 ACTIVITIES
 DATA  .
ANALYSIS
REPORTING

UNI




tor

.. CM*
QC







Coon*




Mtar

_j Reporting
IOC

                                                                                    KMalnttrpr
                                                         | S»npt4 Handing
Flgura 4-1^—Organizational chart Illustrating project organization and llnaa of raapon*
alblltty.

    Quality management is an important planning aspect of the biocriteria
development process that focuses attention on establishing and improving
quality in all aspects of a project. Quality management requires that all
personnel involved in a biocriteria  project (from senior management  to
field and laboratory technicians) be aware of and responsive to data needs
and expectations. The surest way to achieve total quality management
(TQM) in an environmental program is to implement an achievable qual-
ity assurance program.


Quality Control Elements In an Ecological Study
Effective quality control procedures are essential to insure the usefulness
of the data for biocriteria development and environmental decision mak-
ing, and to maintain the bioassessment program. The organizational chart
in Figure 4-1 identifies the major activity classes in an ecological project
Table 4-1 outlines the quality control elements that are integral to those ac-
tivities.
    All activity classes or phases of  field ecological studies have potential
error sources associated with them (Barbour and Thornley, 1990).  Some
general quality control elements for reducing the potential of error are dis-
cussed here; for more specific approaches, the investigator should refer to
Klemm et al. (1990) for benthic macroinvertebrates; and to Karr et  al.
(1986), Lyons (1992), and Ohio Environ. Prot. Agency (1987) for fish.

• Study Design. Considerations relating to potential error in the  sam-
pling design range from limited resources to insufficient sample replica-
tion to selection of inappropriate variables. Two important considerations
for developing a study design are interrelated: .the availability of baseline
data in historical information or pilot studies and the capacity to identify

-------
                                                                                              Conducting the Biosurvey
Table 4-1.—Quality control elements  Integral  to the activities In an •eoiogieal
study In sequence.                                    '.-...••-,'
A.   Quality Management                     '
     1. Delineate responsibilities
    . 2. Ust accountabHJtos
     3. Identify qualty assurance officer
     4. Develop quality assurance plan
     5. Use bioassessment Information In decision making  	'
B.   Study Oeeign                       •                     '
     1. Pilot study or site reconnaissance                                       '
     2. Account for environmental strata
     3. Incorporate historical data                         -   '
        a. Attempt to duplicate regimes                       ,            .    ,
        b. Attempt to use similar equipment (if appropriate to current objective)
     4. Termination of control point
     5. Areas of potential error  .
        a. Available resources         .           '
        b. Logistics                 .       .      >.      "
        c. Response variables
        d. Weather                                                 v
        e. Seasonally
        f. Site selection                '. _
        g. Habitat variability                           ,
        h. Population variabilty
   .    i. Equipment                        .
     6. Additional performance effect criteria	     '
C.   Sample  Collection
     1. lrt»trum*rrt calibration and maintenance                           --
  •   2. Field  crew                .  .                '          ' •      '•..'.''.-'
        a. Training
        b. Evaluation            ,
     3. Field  equipment    .                                                     .
     4. Sample handling
     S. Effort checks
     6. Field  crew efficiency
     7. Areas of potential error
        a. Climate                         ,                 ,                    '
        b. Site selection
        c. Sampling efficiency of equipment
        d. Equipment operation: human error                .       •
        e. Reid notes
        f. Samples                                     •
          i.  Processing                                                          ,
          ii.  Transportation
          yi.  Tracking
     8. Additional performance effect criteria	'  ,  .	
D.   Sample  Processing               .
     1. Sorting and verification
     2. Taxonomy
     3. Duplicate processing                      '                          .
     4. Archival procedures
     5. Training                        .
     6. Data handling
     7. Interiaboratory training and collaboration
     8. Areas of potential concern
        a. Sample tracking
        b. Improper storage
        c. Sample preparation                                                 _   -
        d. Reference error (taxonomy)     ,
        e. Taxonomic error (human)
                                                              (continued on next page)

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                              Table 4-1.—Continued.
 Two of the most
 important
 considerations in
 developing a study
 design are the
 availability of baseline
 data in historical
 information or pilot
 studies and the
 identification of
 potential sources of
 error.
,
                                    f.  Counting error
                                    g. Sorting efficiency
                                   9. Additional performance effect criteria
E.   DataAnarysis
    1. Training
    2. Data
      a. Handling
      b. Reporting
    3. Standardized database
    4. Standardized analyaes
    5* Potf KttVICW
    6. Range control            .
    7. Statistical power analysis
    8. Areas of potential error
      a. Inappropriate statistics
      b. Errors in database
      c. Database management
      d. Programming errors
      e. Analytical misinterpretation
    9. Additional performance effect criteria
      F.   Report Preparation
          .1. Training
          2. Peer review         .
       •   3. Technical editor
          4. Standard format
          5. Areas of potential error
            a. Transcription
            b. Poor presentation
            c. Obscure language
            d. Addressing performance effect criteria
          6. Additional performance effect criteria
                               potential sources of error. In fact, having adequate baseline information
                               may be the only way to identify sources of error. As more than one quality
                               control element may be used to reduce  potential error, the interaction
                               among quality control elements must be considered to ensure the overall
                               quality of the plan.
                                   Six qualitative and quantitative characteristics are usually employed to
                               describe data quality:
                                   •  Precision. The level of agreement among repeated measurements of
                                     the same characteristic.

                                   •  Accuracy. The level of agreement between the true and the meas-
                                     ured value; the divergence between the two is referred to as bias.

                                   •  Representativeness. The degree to which  the collected data accu-
                                     rately and precisely reflect the frequency distribution of a specific
                                     variable in the population.

                                   • Completeness.  The amount of data coEected  compared  to the
                                     planned amount.

                                   • Comparability. The degree to which data from one source can be
                                     compared to other sources.

-------
                                                                                      • CHAPTER 4:
                                                                          Conducting the BiosUrvey
    • Measurability. The degree to which measured data remain within
      the detection limits of the analysis — often a function of the sensitiv-
      ity of instrumentation.

    These characteristics should be considered and denned before the data
 collection begins. Taken collectively, they provide a summary characterization
 of the data quality needed for a particular environmental decision.

 • Field Operations. The major quality control elements in field operations
 are instrument calibration and maintenance, crew training and evaluation,
 field equipment sample handling, and additional effort checks. The poten-
 tial errors in field operations range from personnel deficiencies to equip-
 ment problems. Training is the most important quality control element for
 field operations. Establishing and maintaining a voucher specimen collec-
 tion is also important Vouchers are a mechanism for achieving the source
 of the data, particularly for benthos. Use of a protocol for double data
 entry and comparison can also increase the quality of a database.

 • Laboratory Operations. The quality control elements in laboratory oper-
 ations are classified as sorting and verification, taxonomy, duplicate proc-
 essing, archival procedures, training, and data handling. Potential  error
 sources associated with sample processing are best controlled by staff train-
 ing. Controlling taxonomic error requires well-trained staff with expertise
 to verify identifications. Counting error and sorting efficiency are usually
 the most prominent error considerations; they may be controlled by dupli-
 cate processing, sorting, and verification procedures. Errors associated with
 transcription during the data entry process can be significant In the labora-
 tory, as in the field, the use of a protocol for double data entry and compar-
 ison can increase the quality of a database,  and the establishment and
 maintenance of a voucher specimen collection should be considered.

 • Data Analysis. Peer review and range of values are the important qual-
 ity control elements for data analysis. Peer review helps control operator
 variability, and measurement values must be kept within the range of nat-
 ural or normal variability. Further, if inappropriate statistics are used to
 analyze the data, erroneous conclusions may be drawn  regarding trends.
 Undetected errors in the database or programming can be disastrous, and
 unless steps are taken to oversee data handling and analysis, problems re-
 lated  to database management  will arise. The use of standardized com-
 puter software for database management and analysis can minimize errors
associated with tabulation and statistics. A final consideration is the possi-
ble misinterpretation of the findings. These  potential errors are best con-
trolled by qualified staff and adequate training.

• Reporting. The quality control elements in the reporting activity  in-
clude training, peer review, and the use of a technical editor and standard
formats. The use of obscure language can often mislead the reader. Peer re-
view and review by a technical editor are essential to the development of a
scientific document. If the primary objective or central question of the
study is not specifically addressed in the report or the report is ambiva-
 lent, then an error in the reporting process has occurred.

-------
3IOLOGSCAL CRITERIA.         •  ,
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                   Statement of Problem
- Site Description Characterization
  of Problem
- Historical Data
- Data Gaps
                                                                   I
                                                     | Specific Questions
                                        Identify all Variables
                                         Affecting Problem
                                        Develop Judgment
                                             Criteria
                                                                         Select Variables
                                                                         to be Measured
                                            j Metric
                                           Acceptable
                                           Uncertainty
                                                            Sources of
                                                          Potential Error
                                                           Acceptability
                                                             of Study
                               Figure 4-2.-Summ«ry of Data Quality Objective (000) procew for ecological studies
                               (taken from Barbour and Thomley, 1990).
                                Data Quality Objectives
                                The data quality objectives process occurs during the final creation of the
                                research design. Although its aspects are inherently interrelated, the devel-
                                opment of data quality objectives is not directly linear. Rather, this develop-
                                ment is an iterative or circular process, as shown in Figure 4-2. The initial
                                statement  of the problem evolves from specific questions about existing
                                data; then comes the identification and  selection of the variables to be
                                measured, which influence the further refinement of the questions; and, fi-
                                nally, judgment criteria are developed for each variable, acceptable uncer-
                                tainty levels are established, and sources of potential error are identified.
                                    The result of the data quality objectives process is a formal document
                                that can be separate from or part of a formal quality assurance plan. It may
                                also be included in narrative form in a project workplan. The data quality
                                objectives document should state the study's primary objectives, specific
                                questions, and rationale; it should also justify the selection of variables, es-
                                tablish judgment criteria (by developing a logic statement for each van-

-------
   able), and specify acceptable levels of uncertainty. This information does
   not have to be presented in a stepwise fashion, but it should be readily
   available.                               ,                        '

      All staff involved in the biocriteria development process — senior
   management, program staff, and all technical staff — should be included
   in formulating data quality objectives. In fact, quality management in eco-
   logical studies reqiures that all personnel involved in a project be aware of
   and responsive to detailed needs-and expectations. If appropriately exe-
   cuted, data quality objectives will formalize and document all manaee-
   ^™H deds^n/o^'  *•  necessary  data  collection  and  analysis
   procedures, the data interpretation steps, and the potential consequences
   of making an incorrect decision.                              n
      Further details of quality assurance and control programs specific to
   fish and macroinvertebrate field surveys, and methods for determining bi-
  ?Q£^COnditi0n' m Provided in Klemm et aL (1990) and PJafkin et aL
   (1*89). General guidance for developing comprehensive quality assurance
  CTR S?2niaa"?£7 **«:****  m ihe C°de of Federal Regulations (40
  <-f R Part 30), and U.S. Environ. Prot Agency (1980a,b; 1984a,c). For infor-
  SSS?^ Stance specific to data quality objectives, see Klemm et aL
  (1990), Plafkin et al. (1989), and UOn^iron. Prot. Agency (198^986)

  Study  Design

  The  primary focus of the study design is to establish objectives, and the
  statement of the problem to be resolved is the central theme of the objec-
  tives. For instance, the central problem or question may be, "Is the biotoei-
  cal integrity of a specified area of a particular watershed impaired by the
  operation of a wastewater facility?' This question has sev^ralfeSures
  that, in turn, provide a foundation for  more-specific questions. The first
  feature is the concept of biological integrity, which implies that a measS-
  able  reference condition exists for the aquatic assemblages being studied.
  vV^Tu?!11?6 delineates the spatial area to be evaluated in the water-
 shed; the third diagnoses whether or not a problem is attributable to the
 operation of the facility. Still more specific questions, or testable hypothe-
 ses, related to the central problem may be constructed.

     l.Is impairment of the biological condition detectable in the algae,
       fish, or macroinvertebrate assemblages?

    2. Is degradation altering the energy base, water quality, flow regime,
       habitat structure, or other aspect of the environment?
    3. Is there a history of problems in mis area of the watershed?

    4. What was the historical condition of the aquatic community?

    Based on these questions, it is possible to select the biotic and abiotic
variables to be measured. For each variable, an acceptable level of degra-
dation should be  identified before conducting the biosurvey. Thus, the
study design includes selecting the  aquatic assemblages/resolving the
technical issues  associated with their ecology and  proper sampling, estab-
lishing standard operating procedures, and beginning the biosurvey pro-
gram.
    Conducting the Biosurvey
  The primary focus of
  the study design is to
  establish objectives.
A critical decision in
the design of
biocriteria programs
is how to select
appropriate indicators
of biotic condition.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:          •
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  The importance of
  the periphyton
  assemblage within   ;
  most stream
  ecosystems makes it
  a prime candidate for
  consideration as a
  bioassessment- •
  biosurvey target
Biosurveys of Targeted Assemblages

A critical decision in the design of biocriteria programs is how to select ap-
propriate indicators of biotic condition. Biosurvey of the targeted assem-
blages is the most widely employed approach to biocriteria development
This approach, which  has been used by Ohio, Illinois, North Carolina,
Maine, Arkansas, New York, and Vermont, focuses on a selected compo-
nent of the biological community;  it samples one  or several specific
aquatic community segments to measure biological condition. Monitoring
the specific characteristics of these assemblages helps assess the effects of a
variety of environmental conditions (Ohio Environ. Prot Agency, 1987).
   A number of different organisms associated with lotic systems (i.e.,
streams and rivers) lend themselves to bioassessment procedures. Com-
monly  measured  assemblages  include, but are  not restricted to,
macrophytes,  algae, macroinvertebrates, and fish. The  targeted assem-
blage approach to bioassessment can also focus on a single assemblage
(e.g.,  periphyton)  or  several  assemblages  (e.g.,  periphyton, macro-
invertebrates,  and fish). The attributes measured may be functional pa-
rameters, such as photosynthesis or respiration, or other attributes, such as
individual health. Examples of widely used methods and techniques for
targeted assemblages are found in Karr (1981), Karr et al. (1986), Ohio En-
viron. Prot. Agency (1987), Plafkin et al. (1989), Standard Methods (1989),
U.S. Environ.  Prot. Agency (1990), and Weber (1973). The primary advan-
tages of this approach are its flexibility, practicality, cost-effectiveness, and
relative scientific rigor.

Attributes of Selected Assemblages

• Periphyton. The periphyton assemblage is composed of benthic algae,
bacteria, their secretions,  associated  detritus, and  various  species  of
microinvertebrates (Lamberti and Moore, 1984). Periphyton are an impor-
tant energy base in many lotic situations (Dudley et aL 1986; Minshall, 1978;
Steinman and Parker, 1990) and serve as the primary nutrient source for
many stream  organisms (Lamberti and Moore, 1984). The capacity of ben-
thic assemblages .to colonize and increase in biomass is influenced by vari-
ability in  stream channel geomorphology, flow  rates, herbivore grazing
pressure, light intensity, seasonality, and random processes (Coleman and
Dahm, 1990;  Grimm and Fisher, 1989; Hamilton and Duthie, 1984; Korte
and Blinn, 1983; Lamberti et al. 1987; Patrick, 1949; Poff et al. 1990; Stein-
man and Mclntire, 1986,1987; Steinman et aL 1987; and Stevenson, 1990).
    The importance of the periphyton assemblage within most stream eco-
systems makes it a prime candidate for consideration as a bioassessment-
biosurvey target. More specific advantages are outlined by Plafkin et al.
(1989):
    • The rapid algal reproduction rates and short life cycles of periphyton
      make them valuable indicators of short-term impacts.

    • Physical and chemical factors have direct effects on the structure and
      functions of periphyton and on their production.
    • Periphyton sampling methods are straightforward, and the samples are
      easily quantified and standardized.

-------
                                                                          Conducting the Biosuwey
     • Methods have Also been standardized for recording functional and
      nontaxonomic characteristics of periphyton communities, such as
      biomass and chlorophyll measurements.
     • Algal components of periphyton are sensitive to some pollutants to
      which other organisms may be relatively tolerant

 • Macrophytes. The  macrophyte assemblage consists of large  aquatic
 plants that may be rooted, unrooted, vascular, or elgiforms. Both emergent
 and submergent macrophytes provide numerous benefits to streams and
 small rivers thus helping them to stapport healthy, dynamic, biological
 communities  (Campbell  and Clark, 1983; Huriey, 1990; and Miller et aL
 1989). Some understanding of the distributional characteristics and envi-
 ronmental conditions affecting macrophytes (Hynes, 1970) enhance men-
 use in bioassessment strategies. Hynes (1970) and Wesflake (1975) discuss
 differences in lotic macrophyte assemblages based on habitat factors such
 as water hardness, pH, gradient, and propensity for siltation.
    Some investigators have emphasized the influence of macrophytes on
 habitat structure (Carpenter and Lodge, 1986; Gregg and Rose, 1982,1985;
 McDermid and Naiman, 1983; Miller et al. 1989; Pandit, 1984); others have
 studied water chemistry, nutrient cycling, and macroinvertebrate coloniza-
 tion (McDermid  and Naiman, 1983;  Miller «t al. 1989). Pandit (1984),
 Seddon (1972), and Westlake (1975) pointed to the use of macrophytes as
 an indicator assemblage in lotic situations.
    Aquatic macrophytes are an important food source for birds and mam-
 mals. Fassett  (1957)  lists 36 species of waterfowl, nine marshbirds, four
 shorebirds, and nine  upland game birds that feed on these plants. He also
 lists beaver, deer, moose, muskrat, and porcupines as aquatic macrophyte
 herbivores. The use  of macrophytes in bioassessment programs has nu-
 merous advantages:

    » Macrophyte taxonomy to the generic level is relatively straightforward.

    • Because the establishment of macrophyte populations in a specific
     habitat depends partly on local environmental conditions, they are
     potentially very  useful as site-specific indicators.
    • Because their specific microhabitat structure does not limit germination,
     macrophytes are potentially found in high population densities.
    • The growth patterns of individual macrophytes are directly influenced
     by herbivore activity.

    • The longevity, distribution, and rate of their population growth may
     directly reflect prevailing conditions.

• Macroinvertebrates. Macroinvertebrates are the visibly 
-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
Fish assemblages
are well suited to help
define environmental
conditions because
fish inhabit the
receiving waters
continuously, and with
lifespans up to 10
years, they can easily
represent the
integrated historical
effects of chemical,
physical, and
biological habitat
factors.

                             ever, the overall assemblage responds more slowly. Other advantages of
                             using macroinvertebrates include the following:
                                 • Sampling methods are well developed and require minimal personnel
                                  and inexpensive gear.

                                 • Macroinvertebrates play a major role in the nutritional ecology of
                                  commercial and sport fisheries.

                                 • Most streams support sufficient abundance levels for assessment.

                                 • Molluscs, many species of Crustacea, and some Insects are largely
                                  immobile. As residential organisms, they are particularly valuable
                                  indicators of site conditions over time.

                                 • Many states have already performed background benthic surveys, have
                                  personnel trained in benthic biology, and can often get assistance in
                                  sampling from lay groups.

                             • Fish. Fish assemblages are well suited  to help define environmental
                             conditions — either natural or impaired. Fish are long-lived and inhabit
                             the receiving waters continuously. With lifespans up to 10 years, they can
                             easily represent the integrated historical effects of chemical, physical, and
                             biological habitat factors (Ohio Environ. Prot. Agency, 1987). Power (1990)
                             found that fish exert  significant influence on the food chain in lotic sys-
                             tems. More specific advantages of using the fish assemblage for bioassess-
                             ment (Karr et aL 1986; Flafkin et aL 1989) include the following:
                                 • Fish are usually present in lotic systems except for some headwaters.
                                 • Their populations generally include species that feed at a variety of
                                  trophic levels.
                                 • Species composition and dominants are relatively stable in most areas.

                                 • The migration patterns and wide-ranging foraging behavior of some
                                  fish allow investigators to accumulate effects from relatively large-scale
                                  habitats.
                                . • In comparison to other potential bioassessmenl: groups, fish are
                                   relatively easy to identify.
                                 • Autecologjcal studies for many freshwater species are extensive, so their
                                   life histories are relatively well known.

                                 • Public, and therefore, legislative appreciation for fish is apparent in the
                                   fishable goal of the dean Water Act, the Endangered Species Act (50
                                   percent of "endangered" vertebrate species are fish), and in more
                                   specific commercial and sport fisheries legislation.

                                  • Historical survey data are probably best documented for fish.

                                  • Investigators can often get assistance from lay groups.

                              • Wildlife. Mammals, birds, reptiles, and amphibians can  also provide
                              valuable information for bioassessment decisions. Croonquist and Brooks
                              (1991), applying the  concept of response guilds, found  that bird  species
                              with high habitat  specificity decrease with increasing habitat alteration.

-------
                                                                           Conducting the Biosurvey
  This approach has considerable potential for development of an avian
  index of biotic integrity. Birds have been shown to reflect the condition of
  riparian systems.
     Because amphibians live part of their life cycle in an aqueous or damp
  environment, they are a link between the aquatic and terrestrial environ-
  ments. They are also sensitive to lifctoral zone and riparian disturbances
  and to changes in their food resources (macroinvertebrates  and peri-
  phyton). The latter may affect their fitness or force them to emigrate from
  the home range to another foraging zone. Other advantages of including a
  biosurvey of mammals, birds, and amphibians in biomdnitoring programs
  are the following:                                        aFiF«»

     * Their longer life spans make them well suited for evaluation of
      cumulative effects.

     • The relatively large body size of birds and their behaviors (e.g., singing)
      allow visual and auditory observation to supply most of the necessary
      information.       -

     • Birds are sensitive to riparian alteration.

     • Wildlife taxonomy is well understood.

     • Many biomarkers — physical and chemical alterations in the species in
      response to contamination—appear in these organisms, and an
      increased likelihood for sublethal effects in non-emigrating individuate.

    • Trapping techniques for small mammals axe relatively straightforward,
      and their tracks and droppings also provide easily attainable survey
      data.         '-'•••

    * The public is usually able to assist in conducting wildlife assessments.

 Synthesis

 Many bioassessment programs focus on a single assemblage for reasons of
 regulatory focus or mandate, available  expertise, resource limitations, or
 public awareness and interest. However, state agencies are encouraged to
 incorporate   more  than  one  assemblage  (e.g.,  fish  and  benthic
 macroinvertebrates) into their assessment programs. Biological programs
 that use two or three  assemblages and include different trophic levels
 within each group (e.g., primary, secondary, and tertiary consumers) will
 provide a more rigorous  and ecologically meaningful evaluation of a
 system's biological integrity (US. Environ. Prot. Agency, 1990)  and a
 greater range of temporal responsiveness.
    Impairments that are difficult to detect because of the temporal or spa-
 tial habits  Or the  pollution tolerances of one group  may be  revealed
 through impairments in different species or assemblages (Ohio Environ.
 Prot. Agency, 1987). Mount et al. (1984) found that benthic and fish assem-
blages responded differently to the same inputs in the Ottawa River in
 Ohio. Benthic diversity and abundance responded negatively to organic
loading  from a sewage treatment plant and exhibited  no observable re-
sponse to chemical input from industrial effluent. Fish exhibited no re-
sponse to the organic inputs and a negative response to metals. In a more
 Biological programs
 that use two or three '
 assemblages and
 include different
 trophic levels within
 each group will
provide a more
rigorous and
ecologically
meaningful evaluation
of a system's
biological integrity
and a greater range
of temporal
responsiveness.

-------
   -
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 Aquatic organisms
 respond to stress in a
 variety of ways
 ranging from
 alterations in
 community
 composition and
 structure to increases
 or decreases in the
 biomass of a single or
 multiple species, or
 mortality.
recent assessment, the Ohio EPA found that distinct response signatures
(Yoder, 1991) in both fish and macroinvertebrate assemblages indicated an
adverse effect from the sewage treatment plant Selection of aquatic com-
munity components that show different sensitivities and responses to the
same disturbance will help identify the nature of a problem (U.S. Environ.
Prot. Agency, 1990).
   The selection of a single assemblage for impact assessment risks pro-
viding inadequate resolution for certain impacts that are highly seasonal
in occurrence. Organisms having short life cycles may not reflect direct ex-
posure to highly variable impacts at critical times or when complex cumu-
lative impacts are present Depending on the collection period,  those
organisms may provide a false sense of ecosystem health though other as-
semblages of longer-lived populations are under stress. In cases in which
periodic pulses of contaminants may occur, long-lived populations may be
slow to exhibit response, whereas short-lived organisms may be severely
affected.
   The occurrence of multiple stressors and seasonal variation in the in-
tensity of stressors require that more than one assemblage be incorporated
into  biocriteria programs  whenever practical Not  all assemblages dis-
cussed here are in constant contact with the aquatic habitat component
Those  that are — the macroinvertebrates, macrophytes, fish, and peri-
phyton — will exhibit direct, and potentially more rapid, responses to
water resource degradation. The assemblage comprising mammals, birds,
and amphibians indicates the quality of the riparian corridor and may re-
flect local land use impacts on the water resource.
   Aquatic organisms respond to stress in a variety of ways ranging from
alterations in community composition and structure to increases or de-
creases in the biomass of a single or multiple species, or mortality. Fish
and  drifting macroinvertebrates also exhibit avoidance behavior by seek-
ing refugia from short-and long-term disturbances.
   Careful selection of target taxonomic groups can provide  a balanced
assessment that is sufficiently broad to describe the composition and con-
dition of an aquatic ecosystem, yet practical enough for use on a routine
basis (Karr et al. 1986; Lenat, 1988; Flafkin et al. 1989). When selecting
community components to include in a>iological assessment, primary
emphasis should be given to  including species or taxa that (1)  serve as ef-
fective indicators of high biological integrity, that is, those likely to live in
unimpaired waters, (2) represent a range of pollution tolerances, (3) pro-
vide predictable, repeatable results from consistent sampling, (4) can be
readily identified by trained  state personnel (U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency,
 1990), (5) show  a consistent  response to pollution stress, and (6) closely
 represent local, indigenous biota.


 Technical  Issues

 The methods and procedures used in bioassessment programs should be
 based on the study objectives and associated technical issues, including
 site selection and sampling regime, the selection of the proper sampling
 period, and determination of the appropriate habitats to be sampled.

-------
                                                                                     CHAPTER 4:
                                                                         Conducting the Biosurvey
  Selection of the Proper Sampling Periods

  The ideal sampling procedure is to survey the biological community with
  each change of season, then select the appropriate sampling periods that
  accommodate seasonal variation. Such indexing makes the best use of the
  biological data. It ensures that the sources of ecological disturbance will be
  monitored and trends documented, and that additional information will
  be available in the event-of spills or other unanticipated events.
     In this way, the response of the community to episodic events (e.g.,
  chemical spills) can be assessed throughout the year. Seasonal impacts,
 which may  be  highly variable, cam be  more effectively characterized
 through more frequent sampling. Impacts from certain stresses may occur
 or be 'worst-case* at specific times of the year, and it may be important to
 provide  adequate documentation of the biological condition during these
 times. EPA's Science Advisory Board (SAB) suggests that sampling should
— at a minimum — include the major components of the fall-winter and
 spring-summer (or wet season-dry season) community structure. The Flor-
 ida Department of Environmental Protection has instituted a program that
 encompasses sampling during two index periods that correspond to this
 approach.         .        ,    -—- •                .
    If some fish and invertebrate life cycles (e.g., spawning, growth, mi-
 gration, and emergence) cause marked seasonal changes in stream assem-
 blages, then  each sampling  season will require a separate  reference
 database, metrics,, and biocriteria. When such multiple index periods are
 used, the operational costs, at least initially, may be considerably higher
 than if surveys were conducted only once a year. Therefore states must
weigh their needs and the long-term  value of this information against
these costs. Seasonally must always be considered, and where possible,
year-round data should be developed even if it has to be phased in slowly
over time and as budgets allow.                       ,
 •   The alternative, a single index period, will be deficient it will hot doc-
ument spills or other single episode or transitory events including stresses
that take place in other seasons, it should be selected only if seasonality is
not a factor in the program Objectives. Still, the major or initial applications
of state biocriteria are  likely to be assessment and management planning
related to chronic habitat alteration and point and nonpoint sources. Such
chronic stress impacts are more efficiently assessed with a single index pe-
riod approach. Resident fish and benthic invertebrate assemblages inte-
grate stress effects  over the course of a year and their seasonal cycles of
abundance and taxa composition are fairly predictable, within the limits of
interannual variability. Single season indexing also represents a cost sav-
ings compared to seasonal or more frequent sampling.
   Given these considerations, state managers must choose the approach
most appropriate to their needs and budgets. They must avoid the tempta-
tion to spread multiseason sampling so thin that neither seasonal measure-
ments nor indexing are properly achieved. It is better to do a single index
period well than to do two poorly. Presuming, therefore, that most states
will initially design their biological criteria programs around single season
surveys, the following discussion emphasizes index period designs.
   The optimal biological sampling period will be consistent .with recruit-
ment cycles of the organisms from reproduction to emergence and migra-
 The ideal sampling
 procedure is to
 survey the biological
 community with each
 change of season,
 then select the
 appropriate sampling
 periods that
 accommodate
 seasonal variation.
State managers must
choose the approach
most appropriate to
their needs and
budgets.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  The optimal
 biological sampling
 period will be
 consistent with
 recruitment cycles of
 the organisms from
 reproduction to
 emergence and
 migration, such that
 the maximum amount
 of information can be
 derived from the data.
tion, such that the maximum amount of information can be derived from
the data. Optimal conditions for biological sampling can be defined as that
period of time during which the target assemblages have stabilized after
larval recruitment and subsequent mortality and the use of their niche
space is at its fullest. Where necessary, a compromise between biologically
optimal conditions and water and flow conditions appropriate for the
sampling gear must be made. Therefore,, selection of the sampling period
should be based on efforts to
   • minimize between-year variability resulting from natural events/
   • maximize gear efficiency, and

   • maximize target assemblage accessibility.

   Minimal between-year variability is partially addressed by sampling
within the same season as the previous year's sampling. Applying this
temporal consideration to sampling corrects for the natural variability re-
sulting from seasonal cycles. Water quantity and quality and climatic con-
ditions should be such that sampling gear is at its maximum efficiency. If
certain flow conditions are necessary for  gear performance, sampling
shouid-be targeted to coincide with those  conditions. Finally, sampling
should occur when there is maximum, accessibility to the targeted assem-
blage or assemblages. For fish, the optimal sampling period is likely to
avoid extremes in environmental and biological conditions.
   Field collections scheduled to correspond to the optimal biological
sampling period provide the most accurate  assessment of community re-
sponse to adverse conditions over an annual cycle. Sampling during these
periods may not be logistically feasible, however, as a result of adverse
weather conditions, staff availability, scheduling constraints, or other fac-
tors. The nature of the suspected stressor is an especially important con-
sideration.  An agency may be required to perform biological sampling
during periods of greatest environmental stress, such as low flow and high
temperature periods for point source discharges or high flow and runoff
periods for nonpoint source discharges.
    Although an estimate of aquatic community structure during optimal
biological conditions should reflect the effect of, or recovery from, environ-
mental stress periods (Ohio Environ. Prot  Agency, 1987), assessment of
worst-case conditions may be needed under certain permitting regulations
or as a follow-up to sampling during biologically optimal periods in which
impairment was detected.
    Ecological conditions and, thus, optimal sampling periods, vary sea-
sonally as a result of regional climate patterns  and the life cycles of the
biota. Seven major climatologjcal regions are represented within the con-
tiguous United States (Fig. 4-3). The primary influence of seasonal changes
in temperature and rainfall on stream biota is on biological processes (e.g.,
production, growth, reproduction, distribution, and locomotion). The level
of biodiversity may also change seasonally. Even within an ecological re-
gion, some scaling of the optimal collection period may be necessary, de-
pending on the elevation of the site, the habitat type, and other broad
environmental variables.
    Temperature and rainfall are the principal weather factors influencing
the selection of sampling protocols and timing. Most sampling will be im-

-------
                                                                                    CHAPTER 4:'
                                                                        Conducting the Biosuivey
 Rgure 4-3.—Classification of U.S. dlmatcloglcal regions.

 possible in frozen streams or during extreme  high flows. Even subtle
 changes in temperature and flow may preclude certain kinds of sampling
 by affecting the equipment or the distribution of target assemblages.
    The purpose of the biological sampling program (trend monitoring,
 special studies) also influences seasonal considerations. Special studies
 may be conducted at any time depending on need; but trend monitoring
 studies will focus on annual sampling events with varying sampling fre-
 quencies. The most appropriate season for such collections is determined
 by considering all technical and nontechnical factors. Technical factors in-
 clude the selected assemblage, recruitment cycles, and severity of degrada-
 tion or  contamination;  nontechnical, factors include such matters as
 logistics and personnel. From a practical standpoint, many states may se-
 lect a sampling period that includes the summer and early fall months.
    the investigator must carefully define the objectives of a monitoring
 program before the design issues can be resolved. Will specific questions
. be answered by sampling during periods of optimal biological condition
 or during periods of maximum impact? (These two periods may coincide.)
 Seasonal considerations are important because community  taxonomic
 structure and the functional composition of some assemblages undergo
 natural changes in each season and annual cycle.
    Natural cycles  may also be influenced by chemical or physical alter-
 ations. From  the traditional perspective of evaluating pollution impacts,
 summertime low flow conditions are often chosen to assess effects from
 point source discharges. Low flow conditions capture the effects of minimal
 effluent dilution in combination with the natural stressors of low water ve-
 locity and high temperature. Minima], effluent dilution occurs in summer
 because the lower quantity of water decreases the ability of the receiving
 waters to reduce the concentration levels of discharged compounds.
    The effects of nonpdint source pollution on the aquatic community are
 evaluated during the recovery period following high,flow because these
 effects are largely  driven by runoff in thfe watershed.  Nonpoint source
 loadings are  estimated using samples collected during periods  of  high
/
Special studies may
be conducted at any
time depending on
need; but trend
monitoring studies will
focus on annual
sampling events with
varying sampling
frequencies.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 The major factors     •
 that affect the
 selection of an
 appropriate sampling
 season include the
 seasonal attributes of
 the aquatic
 community and the
 administrative issues
 of sampling efficiency,
 safety, regulatory
 requirements, and
 appropriate metrics .
 for data analysis.
flow. Their actual effects, however, should be based on sampling outside
the flow extremes. The effect of regulated and minimum flows are a partic-  ;
ular problem during the winter season in the western United States. Regu-
lated flows are a function of anthropogenic activity, usually associated
with dams and reservoirs. Sampling activities should be avoided during
high and low extremes.                         .
   Special studies conducted by state agencies in response to specific reg-
ulatory, requirements or catastrophic events (e^g./ oil spills) may not occur
in an optimal season. In these situations, the data should be interpreted
through concurrent reference data or through a seasonal adjustment to es-
tablished reference data. If base biocriteria are established for a reference
database for a single season, then data collected from the test sites during
this season are directly comparable. ;
   Two options are available for collections at  test sites during seasons
other than that used for base criteria. First, selected reference stations can
be sampled concurrently with the test sites to provide baseline compari-
sons for data interpretation. Criteria established during the optimal season
represent a range of values that can be extrapolated to other seasons. In
this manner, a percentage of the reference may be acceptable as an alter-
nate criterion.
   The second option may be to develop adjustments for an annual cycle.
This can be done through seasonal collections of the reference database to
document natural seasonal variation. Alternatively, a knowledge of sea-
sonal appearance and disappearance of particular forms can be used to de-
velop adjustments.   -            ,      •
   The major factors mat affect the selection of an appropriate sampling sea-
son must be considered in light of the sampling objectives of the survey. This
discussion has focused on the seasonal attributes  of the aquatic community.
The administrative issues of sampling efficiency, safety, regulatory require-
ments, and appropriate metrics for data analysis are equally significant

Benthos
Maximum information for a benthic community is obtained when most of
its populations are within a size range (later instars) that can be retained
during standard sieving and sorting and be identified with the most confi-
dence. Reproductive periods and different life stages of aquatic insects are
related to the abundance of particular food supplies (Cummins and Mug,
 1979). Peak emergence and reproduction typically occur in the spring and
 fall, although onset and duration vary somewhat across the United States.
During peak recruitment of the young, approximately 80 percent are too
 small to be captured in sufficient numbers to characterize the community
 accurately, and the food source requirements for early instars may be dif-
 ferent from those for later instars. Therefore, the biologically optimal sam-
 pling season occurs following the period of initial recruitment  and high
 mortality of young, and when the food resource has stabilized to support a
 balanced indigenous community.
    The. comparative time frames for sampling the benthic community are
 illustrated in Figure 4-4. The seasonal timetable shows annual high and
 low flow periods, emergence peaks for aquatic insect communities, and bi-
 ologically optimal sampling periods (BOSP) for a stream in the New Eng-
 land region. High and low flow correspond to periods of high and low

-------
                                                                           Conducting the S/oso/vey
                                           Low Flow / Low Temp. (Ice)
                                                       High
                                                       Flow
 Low Flow
 High
 Temp.
 FJgura 4-4.—Biological and hydroteglcal (factor* for sampling parted aatoctton In tha
 Northaast (maeroinyartabrataa). Tha gray araa la tha oyariap batwean amorganea and
 raeuHmant                    •
rainfall and associated runoff. Emergence is triggered by average daily
temperature  and photoperiod and usually  occurs at peak  intervals in
spring and fall. The biologically optimal sampling period falls between the
peaks in late winter and late summer and occurs after the population has
been exposed to two-thirds of the aquatic phase of the organism's life
cycle measured in degree days (that is, in units calculated as the product
of time and temperature over a specified interval).
    In this example (Fig.4-4), sampling in July  and early August satisfies
most of the criteria for collecting a representative sample at a time of sig-
nificant chemical contaminant stress. It should be noted that chronic non-
point source impacts such as sedimentation will be reflected in the quality
of the benthic community after flow has returned to near normal following
high flow conditions.    .            .'.''..
    In the context of a single population, seasonality may be a significant
factor. The early instars are small and difficult  to identify, and the young
nymphs have a generalized feeding strategy of  collecting and scavenging.
Only in later instars does feeding specialization occur and the quality of
the food source become reflected in the condition of the population. In the
case of Stenonema, the middle and late instars specialize as scrapers. Scrap-
ers are Often considered a pollution sensitive  functional feeding group be-
cause their food source — diatom algae — responds to the early effects of
pollution within the stream.

Periphyton

Periphyton assemblages are associations of algae, bacteria, and fungi that
colonize the substrates in a stream. For purposes of bioassessment, most
periphyton evaluations focus on diatom algae. The periphyton assemblage
exhibits different seasonal abundance  patterns  than fish or benthos. The
key difference is that periphyton assemblages are sufficiently abundant to
be collected year-round  from streams in temperate zones. Their biologi-

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and SmaU Rivers
                            cally optimal sampling period may be based on relatively stable condi-
                            tions but must also account for the comparison of diatom assemblages
                            within similar stages of seasonal succession.
                                The limiting factors for diatoms are light,  temperature, nutrients,
                            water velocity, grazing, and interactions among algae via metabolites. Ob-
                            viously, the abiotic factors go through an annual cycle of change and, like
                            benthos, the  assemblage composition shifts as the changing conditions
                            favor hew species. This process of seasonal succession creates significant
                            seasonal differences in periphyton assemblages that must be considered in
                            developing a study design. Besides changes in periphyton species compo-
                            sition, additional seasonal issues must be controlled to compare collections
                            among sites and annual trends. Two major considerations are (1) the dif-
                            ferences in biomass related to light and temperature regimes and (2) the
                            comparisons of periphyton assemblages that have been subjected to heavy
                            rains and scour with those that have matured under more stable hydro-
                            logical conditions. Differences in light and temperature regimes may re-
                            flect human influences, for example, alterations of the stream channel and
                            removal of riparian vegetation.

                            Fish —
                            Like periphyton and benthic invertebrates, the fish fauna at a site is likely
                            to vary seasonally. In the Northwest, for example, annual spawning migra-
                            tions of anadromous salmonids set in motion a seasonal cycle of major im-
                            portance to the  biota. Seasonal migrations of fish are less striking but
                            common in other areas as well Most frequently, fish movements involve
                            upstream movements in search of spawning areas to serve as nesting and
                            nursery areas for young fish. Upstream  areas often provide richer food
                            supplies and lower predation rates than downstream areas.
                                Because of geographic variation in flows and temperatures, no general
                            pattern occurs across all  regions. A seasonal timetable representative of
                            physical conditions and fish assemblage activities in the New England re-
                            gion is illustrated in Figure 4-5, Unless the sampling objective includes the
                                                                 Low Flow / Low Temp. (Ice)
                              High
                              Flow
                             Low Flow
                             High
                             Temp.
                                                                             High
                                                                             Flow
Coldwater
Fish Spawning
Anadromous
Migration
Wannwater
                             Rgure 4-5.—Biological and hydrologlcal factors for aampllng period selection In the
                             Northeast (fish).

-------
                                                                        Conducting the Biosurvey
 study of unusual flow conditions and concurrent bibtic responses, field
 sampling protocols should avoid extreme flow conditions (low or high)
 that may represent unusual stress, assemblage instability, or result in dan-
 ger to field crews.
    Sampling in several regions of the country has demonstrated that opti-
 mal fish sampling periods can be defined with relative ease. Generally,
 sampling periods should follow the spring spawning migrations that coin-
 cide with periods of high flow. Most states in eastern North America select
 the summer period for sampling (June through August) to coincide with
 periods of low to moderate stream flow and avoid the variable flow condi-
 tions of early spring and autumn (Karr et al. 1986). Fish assemblages dur-
 ing summer are relatively stable and contain the fuU range of resident
 species, including  all major components of  age-structured populations.
 Angermeier and Karr (1986) have outlined sampling rationale, including
 the merit of excluding ypung-of-the-year (YOY) from spring and late sum-
 mer samples to  reduce variability and the problems of identifying and
 sampling very small fry. They demonstrate that excluding YOY from most
 analyses improves reliability and does not weaken the interpretation of the
 system's condition.                  ,
    The scenario  presented in Figure~4-5 identifies high and low flow peri-
 ods  in early  spring and late summer for streams in the northeastern
 United States. The number of species is likely to peak in the spring with
 the spawning migration; the number of individuals will peak in the early
 autumn with  the addition of YOY. The biologically optimal sampling pe-
 riod (BOSP) corresponds  to seasonal effects  within the fish assemblage
 and the flow dynamics that  influence sampling efficiency. Because the
 physical condition  of the streams affects the efficiency of fish sampling
 gear, it also affects the nature or quality of the resulting data. For example,
 the effectiveness of passive equipment (e.g., trap nets) can be substantially
reduced during periods of high or low flow, and the efficiency of active
equipment (e.g,, electrofishing gear) is reduced by turbidity, water temper-
ature, and conductivity.
   Sampling can typically begin in May or June in most areas and pro-
ceed into September unless unusually low flow periods occur during late
summer drought. The probability that low, flow periods will occur in late
summer increases in watersheds that have been severely modified by ur-
banization or agricultural land  use,  in which case low flow sampling
should be avoided.

 Selection of Habitat for Aquatic Assemblage Evaluations
Stream environments contain a number of macro- and microhabitat types,
including pools, riffles, and raceways, or surface and hyporheic zones. The
latter refers to regions of saturated sediment beneath or beside the stream
(Lincoln et al. 1982). Larger rivers have even more complex habitat config-
urations. Because no single sampling protocol can provide accurate sam-
ples of the resident biota in all habitats, decisions about habitats are critical
to the success of  a biocriteria program. These decisions are usually made
in concert with the decision about the assemblages to be sampled, the sam-
pling methods to be used, and the seasonal pattern of sampling.
   > Selection of habitats for sampling may be influenced by institutional
requirements, such  as sampling and analysis protocols that are part of an
Decisions about
which habitats to
sample are critical to
the success of a
btocriteria program.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 A major
 consideration in the
 development of
 bioassessment
 procedures is whether
 sampling all available
 habitats is necessary
 to evaluate biological
 integrity at a  site or
 whether sampling
 only selected habitats
 can provide sufficient
 information.
i
existing monitoring program, or the need to develop data that are consist-
ent with a historical database; however, historical approaches should not
be retained without careful evaluation of their ability to provide the data
necessary to make informed resource decisions in future years.
   Periphyton, invertebrates, and fish spedes in a .stream vary in their
distribution among major habitats. Depending on the data quality objec-
tives established for the specific project or program, one or more assem-
blages may be targeted for inclusion in biosurvey activities. Attributes of
several potential assemblages and their several advantages were described
earlier in this chapter.
   A major consideration in the development of bioassessment proce-
dures is whether sampling all habitats is necessary to evaluate biological
integrity or whether selected habitats can provide sufficient information.
The selection of single habitat over multiple habitat, or vice versa, influ-
ences study design and may influence selection of the biotic assemblage to
be sampled. Some taxa include individuals whose mobility or natural spa-
tial distribution requires multiple habitat sampling.
   Generally, fish sampling reduces the need to make more detailed habi-
tat decisions because most fish in small to medium rivers can be sampled
using seines or electrofishing methods that efficiently sample all major
surface water habitats except hyporheic zones and bank burrows. By sam-
pling the full diversity of stream habitats for fish, the importance of fish
movements among microhabitats for resting and foraging is reduced. Effi-
cient sampling of all local habitats limits the problem of correcting evalua-
tions of taxa in case the intensity of sampling varies among the range of
available habitats.
    Habitats to be sampled for periphyton require different analytical ap-
proaches. For example, periphyton assemblages may develop more easily
on rigid or hard substrates. Though periphyton can grow on the leaves and
stems of macrophytes, more prolific growths are generally seen on the hard
surfaces of large substrate particles (e.g., cobble or small boulders). Stein-
man and Mclntire (1986) found that substrate type is one of several charac-
teristics that affect the taxonomic structure of lotic periphyton assemblages.
Other factors are the dispersal and colonization rates of taxa in the species
pool, competitive interactions, herbivory, chemical composition of the envi-
ronment, and the character of ecological disturbances. Because it is difficult
to remove or collect periphyton from natural substrates (Austin et al. 1981),
hard surfaces (either natural or artificial) are usually the focus of sampling
efforts. Most strategies for sampling periphyton assemblages are single hab-
itat though other variables introduce additional complexity!
    Benthic macroinvertebrates inhabit various habitats in lotic situations,
 for example, riffles, pools, snags, or macrophyte beds. Complete character-
 ization  of the assemblage  requires a multihabitat and multisampling
 protocol such as that advocated by Lenat (1988). The benthic macro-
 invertebrate protocols for rapid bioassessment advocated by Plafkin et al.
 (1989) were developed for sampling the most productive and dominant
 benthic habitat in wadable streams. Consequently, riffles and cobble sub-
 strate were the primary focus of the rapid bioassessment protocols be-
 cause that habitat is predominant across the country.
     This approach  works for small streams and streams that are domi-
 nated by riffles; however, it requires additional evaluation and technical

-------
                                                                         Conducting the Biosurvey
 development for use in other habitats. Flafkin et al. (1989) argue that the
 habitat where riffles predominate, wall often be the most productive and
 stable habitat for the benthic community. The production of the habitat is
 related to provision of refugia, food resources, and necessary community
 interactions. It may be necessary to document the extent and character of
 the habitat because streams differ in these qualities, which differences may
 be, related to natural and anthropogenic causes. In some streams, riffles are
 not a dominant feature, and the emphasis on them may be misleading;
    Since the issuance of the Rapid Assessment Protocols (RBPs) in 1989,
 rapid assessment techniques have evolved to focus on sampling of more
 than one habitat type, usually in the proportion of their representation at
 the sites of interest. These techniques have been primarily designed for
 low gradient streams  (Mid-Atlantic Coastal Streams Workgroup, 1993;
 Florida Dep. Environ. Prot. 1994) and encompass the sampling of four or
 five habitat categories.
    The sampling of a single habitat type (e.g., riffles or runs) is  intended
 to limit the variability inherent in sampling natural substrates and to en-
 hance the evaluation of attributes in an assemblage that will vary substan-
 tially in various habitats. Double^ composited square  meter  kick net
 samples (2 m2) are used in RBPs to collect large representative samples
 from riffle  or run areas. Other gear can also be used to collect such com-
 posite samples.
    Multihabitat sampling  allows the evaluation of a broad range of effects
 on the benthic assemblage. However, it may also introduce variability into
 comparisons, of the benthic assemblage among sites. Multihabitat investi-
 gations of water resource  integrity are potentially confounded by (1) the
 absence of a particular habitat at a station, and (2) the potential differences
 in the quality and quantity of a habitat. As more habitats are sampled, the
 more difficult it is to control for comparable habitat among sites; and the
 absence of a habitat type at one or more stations exacerbates the  problem.
 However, some states, such as North Carolina, have been successful in
 using a multihabitat sampling approach and advocate this technique as
 being more appropriate than simply sampling the riffle or run  (Lenat,
.1988).                    \
    A case study in association with the North Carolina Department of En-
 vironmental Management  addressed the issue of sampling strategy and
 indicated that the riffle assemblage and the multihabitat assemblage re-
 sponded similarly to differences  among stations (Plafkin et al. 1989): For
 example, under stress, taxa richness was reduced by the same proportion
 in both the riffle and the multihabitat assemblage samples at a given sta-
 tion. These responses suggest that either the riffle assemblage or the multi-
 habitat assemblage can be used to assess biotic  integrity in streams in
 which riffles are prevalent.
    Kerans et al. (1992) examined patterns of variability and the  contribu-
 tion of pool versus riffle invertebrate samples to the evaluation of biotic in-
 tegrity and the detection of different kinds of degradation. They evaluated
 over a dozen attributes of the invertebrate assemblages including numbers
 of species  (total and for a number  of taxa) as well as several ecological
 classifications.  At least eight attributes  exhibited spatial or  temporal
 trends, or both, depending on whether the habitat was pools or riffles. At-
 tributes that were  temporally and spatially unpredictable included some
Several factors
related to habitat
selection should be
considered when
designing a
bioassessment
sampling strategy: (1)
target assemblage,
(2) single or multiple
habitat, and (3)
natural or artificial
substrates.

-------
"technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 In either the single
 habitat or multihabitat
 approach, the most
 prevalent and
 physically stable
 habitat that is likely to
 reflect anthropogenic
 disturbance in the
 watershed should be
 chosen.
i

  The habitat with the
 most diverse fauna is
 preferred — riffles
 followed by hard,
 coarse substrates,
 snags, aquatic
 vegetation, and soft
 substrates.
that are most commonly used in stream bioassessment. Kerans et al. con-
clude that measures of human impact on biotic integrity may be biased if
sampling is restricted to only one habitat
    The choice of sampling habitats also entails a choice of sampling meth-
ods because conventional sampling methods for invertebrates vary in their
efficiency among habitats. Surber and Hess samplers are used for riffles/
while grab samplers are used most efficiently in the soft substrate of pool
habitats. Several forms of net samplers have been developed for various
stream habitats: kick nets or seines (Plafkin et at 1989; Lenat, 1988), D-
frame nets (Montana Dep. Health Environ. Sti., 1990), and slack (rectangu-
lar frame) samplers (Cuffney et al. 1993). Passive colonization-dependent'
samplers (e.g., Hester-Dendy samplers) may also be used for evaluation of
invertebrate assemblages (Ohio Environ. Prot Agency, 1987).

Substrate Choices
In either the single habitat or multihabitat approach, the most prevalent
and physically stable habitat that is likely to reflect anthropogenic disturb-
ance in the watershed should be chosen. These habitats will vary region-
ally-because' of  differences in topography, geology,  and climate.  The
biological community in a particular stream may also change in response
to increasing stream size (Vannote et al. 1980). The key to sampling, perti-
nent to benthic invertebrate surveys, is to select the habitats that support a
similar assemblage of benthos within a range of stream sizes. Habitats that
have been used for benthos are riffles, snags, downed trees, submerged
aquatic vegetation, shorezone vegetation, and sediments, such as sand,
silt, or clay (Table 4-2). -
    The habitat with the most diverse fauna is emphasized by most inves-
tigators because it offers the highest probability of sampling the most sen-
sitive  taxa.  Riffles usually fit this criterion,  and when present,  are
preferred! This habitat type is followed by hard, coarse substrates, snags,
aquatic vegetation, and soft substrates.  If multiple habitats are selected,
similarity in habitat quality and comparable levels of effort among sam-
pling sites must be considered.

Tabl« 4-2.—Common benthlc habitats.                                	
     SNAGS/DOWNED TREES
                                          SHOREZONE VEGETATION
        Productive in biackwatar streams
          (Bank* et al. 1984)
        Diversity of ep'rfauna
        Community dependent on
          well-prepared substrate
                                      •  Present in most streams

                                      •  Measuros riparian impacts
                                      •  Dominated by shredders and collectors

                                      •  May be seasonal	
                              SUBMERGED AQUATIC VEGETATION
                                           SILT/MUD
                                Productive in coastal zones
                                High standing crop
                                Seasonal habitat
                                Snails usually abundant
                                             Pool communities
                                             DomlnatM by fauna
                                             Sediment quality and water quality effects
                                             Fauna uaually tolerant to tow oxygen
                              SHIFTING SAND
                                                                   LEAF LITTER/DEBRIS
                                Prevalent in erosional areas
                                Dominated by opportunistic infauna
                                Sediment quality and water quality effects
                                High dominance by monotypic fauna
                                             Prevalent in forested streams
                                             Measures riparian impacts
                                             Dominated by shredders
                                             Microbia) preparation of substrate

-------
                                                                                       CHAPTER',:
                                                                          Conducting the Biosurvey
 Natural and Artificial Substrates
 Most benthic surveys employ direct sampling of natural substrates. This
 method is  particularly important if habitat alteration is suspected as the
 cause of impairment. A major assumption is that every habitat has a bio-
 logical potential, which is reflected :in the resident biotic community. Be-
 cause interpretation depends on the level of assemblage development
 within the existing habitat, sampling natural substrates is recommended.
 If, however, an artificial substrate cam be matched to the natural substrate
 (e.g., using a rock basket sampler in a cobble substrate stream), men such
 artificial substrates may also be used (So. Advis. Board, 1993). Maine uses
 this rock basket approach. The Ohio EPA biooiteria program (Ohio Envi-
 ron. Prot. Agency, 1987) has successfully used Hester-Dendy multiplate ar-
 tificial substrate samplers supplemented by qualitative, natural substrate
 samples to assess biological integrity using benthic assemblages.
    The advantages  and disadvantages  of artificial  substrates (Cairns,
 1982) relative to natural substrates are the following:

 • Advantages of Sampling with Artificial Substrates

    1. Enhances sampling opportunities in locations that are difficult to
      sample effectively.

    2. Permits standardized sampling by eliminating subjectivity in
      sample collection technique.

    3. Minimizes confounding effects of habitat differences by providing
      a standardized microhabitat

    4. Directs the interpretation to specific water quality questions
      without interference of habitat variability.

    5. Increases the ease of placing samplers in discrete areas to discrimi-
      nate impacts associated with multiple dischargers.

• Disadvantages of Sampling with Artificial Substrates

    1. Requires the investigator to make two trips for each artificial
      substrate sample (one to set and one to retrieve).

    2. Measures colonization potential rather than resident community
      structure.

    3. Allows problems such as sampler disturbance and loss to occur.

    4. Complicates interpretation of She effects of habitat structure.

    If artificial  substrates are selected,  the surface area of the materials
should be standardized among units. Introduced substrates, in the context
of biological monitoring, are artificial substrates that are constructed to
match natural bottom materials at the site of the survey. An example of in-
troduced substrates are rock baskets, such as 'those used by Maine (Davies
et al. 1991), in which baskets that contain rocks native to the region of
known surface area are partially buried in the bottom sediment. Where

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 Production of and
 adherence to
 standard operating
 procedures in all
 phases offieldwork,
 data analysis, and
 evaluation, are
 essential for
 maintaining
 consistency and
 comparability among
 datasets, overall
 assessments, and for
 appropriate quality
 assurance and quality
 control.
possible, the use of introduced substrate is preferable to other types of arti-
ficial substrate as recommended by the SAB (1993). Rock baskets or other
substrates should be placed in waters of similar depths, velocities, and
daily sun and shade regimes.


Standardization of Techniques

Standard operating procedures should be adhered to in all phases of field-
work, data analysis, and evaluation. They are essential for maintaining
consistency and comparability among data sets and for appropriate qual-
ity assurance and control (Kent and Payne, 1988; Klemm et al. 1990; Smith
et al.  1988). Without standard operating procedures to mimic previous
studies, the difficulties encountered in comparing temporal and spatial
data or analytic results may be substantial. Care must be taken to reduce
the inherent variability of the.sampling process (Cairns and Pratt, 1986)
through standardization of sampling gear, gear efficiency, level of effort,
subsampling  methods, handling and processing procedures, and com-
puter software. Standardization of project activities provides considerable
strength in reducing, controlling, and understanding variability.

Sample Collection
A major influence on the comparability of field ecological projects is the
type and intensity of appropriate training and professional experience for
all personnel  (Barbour and Thornley, 1990). Similar exposure to sampling
methods  and standard operating procedures can reduce the amount of
variation from one sampling event or project to the next Standardizing the
equipment relative to operator efficiency, sampling effort, and the area to
be sampled greatly affects data quality. Operator efficiency depends on the
operator's experience,  dexterity, stamina, and adherence to specified sur-
vey requirements. Physical habitat conditions at the time of sampling (e.g.,
flow levels, current velocity, and temperature) also influence efficiency. Ac-
tive sampling efforts (e.g., using net samples or electrofishing) may be
standardized as a function of person-hours spent at each sampling station
and by tracking the physical area or volume sampled. Passive  methods
(e.g.,  artificial substrates, trap nets)  may be standardized by tracking the
person-hours and the exposure time. This.choice is often dictated by the
earlier selection of the assemblage to be sampled; for some, a relatively
small selection  of sampling techniques may be available. A certain sam-
pling area or volume  may be required to obtain an appropriate sample
size from a particular community and to estimate the natural variability of
that community at the sampling station.
    Once the  assemblage, sampling equipment; and method have been cho-
sen, standard operating procedures can be written for field operations, in-
cluding a clear description of the sampling effort to be applied during each
sampling event. All employees should have this documentation,  and new
employees should be accompanied in the field by experienced staff until they
are thoroughly familiar with all procedures (Ohio Environ. Prot Agency,
1987).
    Processing samples in the field  requires several critical steps. Sample
containers for benthic invertebrates and voucher fish should be marked
with appropriate and complete  information on internal and external la-

-------
                                                                                    ,          .
                                                                         Conducting the Biosurvey
 be\s. Other identifying information and descriptions of visual observations
 should be. recorded in a field notebook.
    Data on birds and mammals, which consist primarily of visual obser-
 vations and for which accurate field taxonomy is possible/ will not require
 subsequent processing in the laboratory. However, the details of each ob-
 servation should be carefully recorded so that they may be checked later.
 Most fish sampling requires sorting, recording, and releasing the fish at
 the site of capture. Fish sampling crews should have a reference collection
 available in the field, and specimens should be collected and accurately la-
 beled so that identifications can be confirmed.
    Sample  containers with preserved specimens should  be assigned
 unique serial  or identification numbers. These numbers should be re-
 corded in a logbook along with the appropriate labeling information. All
 sample containers or specimens should be appropriately packaged for
 transportation and continued processing in the laboratory.
    For assemblages in which extremely large numbers of individuals or
 associated substrate are obtained in each sample as is often the case with
 small fish, benthic macroinvertebrates, periphyton, or planktonic orga-
 nisms, it may be impractical ami-costly to process an entire sample. In
 such cases,  standardized random subsampling, similar to  that recom-
 mended by Plafkin et al. (1989), is a valid and cost-effective alternative.
    As a subsampling method is developed, every attempt must be made
 to reduce bias. Therefore, guidelines are needed to standardize the effort
 and to eliminate investigator subjectivity. Rapid bioassessment protocols,
 for example, maintain subsampling consistency by defining the mode (a
 gridded pan), by placing limitations on the mechanics of subsampling and
 the subsample size, and by assuring that the subsampling technique is
 consistently random.


 Sample Processing                      I

 The  need for specialized training and expertise is most necessary during
 the identification of organisms. Unless the project objectives direct other-
 wise, each specimen should be identified to the most specific taxonomic
 level possible using current literature. Some technigiws may require iden-
 tification only to the ordinal, familial, or generic level (Ohio Environ. Prot
 Agency, 1987; Plafkin et al. 1989), but the most accurate information on tol-
 erances and sensitivities is found at the species level.
   Nevertheless, taxonomic resolution should be set at a level achievable
by appropriately trained state personnel State water resource  agencies
 should find it  beneficial to establish  collaborative working arrangements
with local and regional experts who can provide training, technical sup-
port, and quality assurance and control. Stream ecology research over the
last decade indicates that a specific minimal level of resolution should be
 set (i.e., the "lowest achievable taxonomic level* is not a helpful criterion)
 and that additional refinement should be left to individual state groups as
 their capabilities permit (Sci. Advis. Board, 1993).
   The SAB further states that proposed levels of intensity and taxonomic
 resolution must receive a thorough evaluation (y'the scientific  research
 community. For example, adult and juvenile fish should usually be identi-
 fiable by species (Sci. Advis. Board, 1993). The identification of larval fish
 Standardized
 random subsampling
 is a valid and
 cost-effective
 alternative to
 processing an entire
 sample. Asa
 subsampling method
 is developed, every
attempt must be
made to reduce bias.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                             may provide useful information; however, it may only be feasible to iden-
                             tify them to the generic or familial levels. Reasonable candidate levels for
                             stream macroinvertebrates are given in Table 4-3.

                             Table 4-3.—Proposal  minimal  lavala  of taxonomlc resolution for atraam
                             maerolnvartabrataa (takan from 3d. Advta. Board, 1963).

                              TAXONOMIC LEVEL    GROUPS

                                                   Wacoptara (in part). Ephamareptnm, Odonata, Trichoptara,
                                                   Magatoptara, Nauraplara. Lapktopteia, Cotaoptara (to part, tar-
                                                   vaa and aduttt). Hamiptara, Dlptom (TipuMaa and Shnuldaa),
                              Triba
CMronominaa
                              Subfamily
Chkonomidaa
                              Famly
Diptara (othar than Chlronomidaa, TipulWaa and SimuMdaa).
Oigochaata, Ptocoptara On part). Colaoptara (In part)
                              Ordar
Othar noninaaet groups
                                 Once the samples have been analyzed (identified, enumerated, and
                             measured), reference (voucher) material should be placed in  the  well-
                             established network of federal, state, and university museums for region-
                             ally centralized  curation (Sri. Advis. Board, 1993). This action ensures a
                             second level of quality control for specimen identification. Preferably, col-
                             lection and identification of voucher specimens will be coordinated with
                             taxonomic experts in regional museums. These repositories, which have
                             always been the centers for systematic^ should continue to be used for
                             this function (5d. Advis. Board, 1993). The SAB recommends that once the
                             information on the samples has been entered into a database and verified,
                             the repository  institutions should be encouraged  to conduct additional
                             systematic studies on the material. Information from these additional anal-
                             yses can then be made available to state biocriteria programs.
                                  All identifications should be made using the most up-to-date and ap-
                             propriate taxonomic keys. Verification should be done in one of two ways:
                             (1) by comparison with a preestablished reference  or research specimen
                             collection, or (2) by having specimens confirmed by taxonomic experts fa-
                             miliar with the group in question (Borror et al. 1989). A regional consensus
                             of taxonomic certainty* is critical to ensure that the results are comparable
                             both spatially  and temporally. The taxonomists should always be con-
                             tacted by telephone or mail before any specimens are sent  to their atten-
                             tion. It is also important to follow their advice on the proper methods for
                             packing and shipping samples. Damaged specimens may be useless and
                             impossible to identify.


                              Suggested Readings

                             Hart, D. (editor). 1990. Proc. Third Annual Ecological Quality Assurance Workshop. U.S.
                                  Environ. Prot. Agency, Can, Min. Environ., Burlington, Ontario.
                              Karr, J.R. et al. 1986. Assessing Biological Integrity in Running Waters: A Method and Its
                                  Rationale. Spec. PubL 5. Illinois Nat. History Surv., Urbana, IL.

-------
                                                                                                •••  CHAPTER 4:
                                                                                    Conducting the Biosurvey
 Memm, D.J., P.A. Lewis, F. Fulk, and J.M. Lazorchak. 1990. Macroinvertebrate Field and
    Laboratory Methods for Evaluating the Biological Integrity of Surface Waters.
    EPA/600/4-90-030. Off. Res. Develop., U.S. Environ. Prot Agency/Washington, DC
 Mid-Atlantic  Coastal'Streams Workgroup. 1993. Standard Operating Procedures and
    Technical Basis: Macroinvertebrate Collection and Habitat Assessment for Low-gra-
    dient Nontidal Streams. Draft Rep. Delaware Dtp. Nat Res. Environ. Conserv.,
    Dover.                                           '               .

 Ohio Environmental Protection Agency. 1987. Biological Criteria for (the Protection of
    Aquatic life.  Volume 3: Standardized Biological Held Sampling and Laboratory
    Methods for Assessing Fish and Macroinvertebrate Communities. Monitor. Assess.
    Prog., Surface Water Sec, Div. Water QiiaL, Columbus, OR
	. 1990. The Use of Bkxxiteria in the Ohio EPA Surface Water Monitoring and As-
    sessment Program. Columbus, OR
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1980b. Interim Guidelines and Specifications for
    Preparing Quality Assurance Project  Plans. QAMS-005/80. QuaL Assur. Manage.
    Staff, Off. Resi Dev., Washington, DC.
	. 1984c. Guidance for Preparation of Combined Work/Quality Assurance Project
    Plans for Environmental Monitoring. Rep. OWRS QA-1. Washington, DC.
	—. 1989. Preparing Perfect Project Plans. A Pocket Guide for the Preparation of
    Quality Assurance Project Plans. EPAT600/9-89/087. Risk Reduction Eng. Lab., Off.
    Res. Dev., Cincinnati, OR                                ..'..'
	. 1990. Biological Criteria: National  Program Guidance for Surface Waters. EPA-
    440/5-90-004. Off. Water, Washington, DC.

-------

-------
                    CHAPTERS.
                   Evaluating
     Environmental  Effects
      Should a biological survey reveal a significant departure from refer-
      ence conditions or criteria, the next step is to seek diagnostic infor-
      mation leading to remedial action. This entails the investigation of
an array of physical, chemical, and biological  factors to determine the
likely source of degradation in the waiter resource.
   Five major factors affect and determine water resource integrity (Karr
and Dudley, 1981; Karr et al. 1986). These factors are water quality, habitat
structure, flow regime, energy source, and biotic interactions. Monitoring
programs must integrate, measure,  and  evaluate the influences of these
factors (Fig. 5-1). A comprehensive discussion of all five and the enormous
variety of human actions that alter them is beyond the scope of this docu-
ment. We can, however,  present a conceptual sketch of each one and how
it influences the integrity of the water resource. Several considerations are
involved in evaluating these complex factors.
   Human actions often alter one or more of those factors and thus alter
the resident biota. Alterations may be obvious, such as the extinction of
species or the introduction of exotics, or they may be more subtle, such as
altered survival rates, reproductive success, or predation intensity. Protec-
tion or restoration of biotic integrity requires identification of the proc-
esses that have been altered by human actions.  Careful evaluation  of the
conditions  in a study watershed can play a critical role in identifying the
potential causes of degradation. That: identification process is essential to
develop the most cost-effective approaches  to improving the quality of
water resources.
Water Quality

The physical and chemical attributes of water are critical components of
the quality of a water resource. Because the earliest water resource legisla-
tion (e.g., the Refuse Act of 1899) dealt with disease and oil pollution in
navigable waters, emphasis  has traditionally been on the physical and
chemical properties of water. Physical and chemical attributes of special
concern include but are not limited to temperature, dissolved oxygen, pH>
hardness, turbidity, concentrations of soluble and insoluble organics and
inorganics, alkalinity, nutrients, heavy metals, and an array of toxic sub-
Purpose:
To provide managers
with an understanding
of the factors that
affect and determine
water resource
integrity.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  Protection or
  restoration of biotic
  integrity requires
  identification of the
  processes that have
  been altered by
  human actions.
  Careful evaluation of
  the conditions in a
  study watershed can
  play z critical role in
  identifying the
  potential causes of
  degradation. That
  identification process
  is essential to
  develop the most
  cost-effective
  approaches to
  improving the quality
  of water resources.
ECOLOGICAL   \
MPACTOF
HUMAfUNDUCED
ALTERATIONS   I
                                                 1.En«rgySourc«
              2. W**r Quality
              3. Habitat Sftictura and Quality
              4. Flow Rtgiirw
                                                 5. Biotic Interaction*
                              Figure M.—Five major classes of environmental factors that affsct aquatic biota In
                              lotlc systems. Right column lists selected expected results of anthropogenic pertur-
                              ballon (Karr et al. 1916).

                              stances. These substances may have simple chemical properties or their
                              dynamics may be complex and changing, depending on other constituents
                              in a particular situation including the geological strata, soils, and land use
                              in the region. The number of elements and compounds  that influence
                              water quality is very large without human influences; with them, the com-
                              plexity of the problem is even greater. The human effects on biological
                              processes may be direct (i.e., they may cause mortality), or they may shift
                              the balance  among species as a result of subtle effects, such as reduced re-
                              productive rates or changing competitive ability. Aquatic life use designa-
                              tions  provide  protection at various  levels from the  multitude  of
                              anthropogenic effects.
                                  The EPA encourages states to fully integrate biological surveys, whole-
                              effluent and ambient toxicity testing, and chemical-specific analyses to as-

-------
                                                                                      CHAPTERS:
                                                                    Evaluating Environmental Effects
  sess attainment or nonattainment of designated aquatic life uses in state
  water quality standards (U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, 1991c). Ohio EPA
  used numeric biological criteria within an existing framework of tiered
  aquatic life uses to establish attainable, baseline expectations on a regional
  basis (Yoder, 1991). Use attainment status in the Ohio water quality stand-
  ards results in a classification of "full attainment," if all applicable numeric
  biocriteria are met; "partial attainment," if at'least one aquatic assemblage
  exhibits nonattainment but no lower than a 'fair" narrative rating; and
  "nonattainment," if none of the applicable biocriteria are met, or if one as-
  semblage reflects a "poor* or "very poor'narrative rating.
     North Carolina's Department of Environment, Health, and Natural Re-
  sources has used in-stream biota to assess water quality since the mid-1970s
  (Overton, 1991), and the  water quality regulations in the North Carolina
  code have been revised to take biological impairment into account In addi-
  tion, when fiscal realities in North Carolina required a more efficient water
  quality program, all NPDES permits within a given river basin were sched-
  uled to be issued within the same year (Overton, 1991). The same strategy
  makes biological assessment more efficient because it can now focus on
  specific river basins coincident with the renewal permits. Other states may
  have to consider similar strategies tor-conserve resources.
     The Maryland Department of the Environment, Water Quality Moni-
  toring  Division, uses biological assessment as part of a statewide water
  quality monitoring network (Primrose et al. 1991). Using biological assess-
  ment, Maryland has been able to differentiate among various degrees of
  impairment and unimpainnent, and to distinguish particular water qual-
  ity impacts.
     the Arkansas Department of  Polution Control and Ecology devel-
  oped a bioassessment technique in the mid-1980s to assess the impact on
  receiving waters from exceeding water quality-based limits (Shaekleford,
  1988). Using its bioassessment  approach as a screening tool, Arkansas fol-
  lows a formal decision tree for assessing compliance with established
  water quality limits (Fig. 5-2). The initial bioassessment screen may result
  in the application of other biological, lexicological, or chemical methods.
  After completion of screening,  an on-site decision can be made for subse-
 quent action.  In situations where "no impairment" or "minimal impair-
 ment" classifications are obtained, field efforts are reduced in frequency or
 intensity until further information indicates a problem. Streams classified
 as "substantially" or "excessively" impaired trigger additional investiga-
 tive steps that employ an integration of methods (Shackleford, 1988).
    The definitive evaluation of water quality impacts often requires ex-
 pensive laboratory analyses. However,, careful review of conditions in the
 watershed can provide early warning signals about the potential for water
 resource degradation. For example, the presence of industrial, domestic,
 and agricultural sources of chemical  contaminants may be indicated by.
 odors, froth, or colors in the water. These conditions should be noted dur-
 ing field surveys for their potential  diagnostic value.
                            *              -          ,  '

 Habitat Structure

The physical structure of stream environments is critical to the ecological
 health orjntegrity of lotic water resources. Attributes of significance to or-
 ganisms in streams are channel morphology including width, depth, and
  The EPA encourages
 states to fully
 integrate biological
 surveys,
 whole-effluent and
 ambient toxicity
 testing, and
 chemical-specific
 analyses to assess
 attainment or
 nonattainment of
 designated aquatic
 life uses in state water
 quality standards.
Careful review of
conditions in the
watershed can
provide early warning
signals about the
potential for water
resource degradation.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                                        D« *^platt>
                                                             9M»4pKMe dirt
                                                                  I
                                                          COtfUANCeUOHTOftlHOLEVB.
                                                        MmnMttonorComplm*
                                                          COMPLMWCC WSXC7KIN LEVEL
                                                              ofCer^mro.9MUK Ifcnd
                                 ngu» 5-2.-0«d«lon matrix for application of rapid blbnaaaaamanta In Arkanaaa for
                                 permitted point source discharge (ShacWaford, 1988).


                                 sinuosity;  floodplain shape and size; channel gradient; in-stream cover
                                 such as presence of boulders and woody debris; substrate type and the di-
                                 versity of substrates within a stream reach; riparian vegetation and the
                                 canopy cover that it provides; and bank stability.

-------
                                                                                ',     ;           ,    CHAPTER 5:
                                                                                Evaluating Environmental Effects
     Channel morphology in natural watersheds is typically meandering with
 substrate diversity created by varying velocities along and across the channel.
 As a result, substrates are sorted to form pools and riffles that create horizon-
 tal variation in the physical environment If a channel has been artificially
 straightened and dredged (channelized), .temporal recovery will recreate sub-
 strate diversity through vertical and lateral meandering processes (Hupp,
 1992; Hupp and Simon, 1986). Because no stream channel is stable, a tempo-
 ral dimension of diversity  also exists. These physical attributes are closely
 tied to other environmental conditions and impairments (Table 5-1).
Table 5-1.—Parameters that may be usoful In evaluating environmental condi-
tions and their relationship to geographic scales and the environmental factors
Influenced by human actions.
 CATEGORY BY
 GEOGRAPHIC SCALE
PARAMETER
ENVtRONUEirau.
FACTORS"
 1. Watershed
Land use
Row stability1
Flow regime
Physical habitat
 2. Riparian and        Upper bank stabittyf:Ml                  Flow regime
   bank structure       Sank vegetative stability*1'-81               Energy base
  .                   Woody riparian vegetation"        '       Physical habitat
                       —•species identity ,
                       —number of species
                     Grazing or other disruptive pressures*'
                     Streamside cover (% vegetation)*-1
                     Riparian vegetative zone width*1'
                     Streambank erosion'
3. Channel
   morphology
Channel alteration**'
Bottom scouring*
Deposition*
Pool/riffle, run/bend ratio*-*
Lower bank channel capacity*
Channel sinuosity*-'*
Channel gradient?-*
Bank form/bend morphology"
Flow regime
Energy base
Biotie interactions
Water quality
Physical habitat
4. In-stream.
Substrate composition/size; % rubble,
  gravel, submerged logs, undercut
  banks, or other stable habitat*-*-"*'
% pools'
Pool substrate charactnrization*
Pool variability'
% embeddedness of gravel, cobble,
 . and boulder parttelai by fine sediment;
  sedimentation**1'
Rate of sedimentation
Ftowrate*1"
Velocity/depth*-**
Canopy cover (shading)*-'
Stream surface shading (vegetation,
  cliffs, mountains, undercut banks,
  togs)"1*'                    .
Stream width0-"                     ,
Water temperature6
Flow regime
Energy base
Biotie interactions
Water quality
Physical habitat
REFERENCES:
•Plafkin et al. 1989
"Plans et al. 1987
'Plans et al. 1983; Armour at al. 1983
"Rankin, 1991
•Gorman. 1988
           'Osbome et al. 1991
           'Barton el: al. 1985
           "Hupp and Simon, 1936; 1991
           'Karr and Dionne, 1991
           iKarr. 1991         •

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  An assessment of
  habitat structure is
  critical to any
  evaluation of         -
  ecological integrity.
  Habitat assessment
  provides information
  on habitat quality; it
  also identifies obvious
  constraints on the
  site's potential to
  achieve attainment,
  assists in the
  selection of
  appropriate sampling
  stations, and provides
  basic information for
  interpreting biosurvey
  results.
   The influence of habitat structure spans the range from regional geog-
raphy to the pattern of interstitial spaces between rocks in the river sub-
strate.  Habitat structure on all scales is critical to  the biology of most
stream organisms, and subtle or  massive habitat alteration on any scale
may influence the quality of the water resource.
   The influence of habitat structure on the aquatic community causes
natural variability even in undisturbed communities. Understanding the
relationship of expected trends  in  biological condition as a result of
changes in habitat structure is an important feature of biological assess-
ments. Ohio  EPA found that their measurement of habitat quality, the
Qualitative Habitat Evaluation Index (QHEI), was significantly correlated
with the Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI) in Ohio streams (Fig. 5-3) with r -
0.47 (Rankin, 1991) on a broad scale over the state. Ranldn also found that
stream habitat quality and land use at various geographic scales are im-
portant influences on fish assemblages and that relatively intact stream
habitat throughout the drainage can compensate for short stretches of
poor habitat In contrast,  however,  habitat-sensitive species may be re-
duced or destroyed in stream basins with extensive degraded conditions,
even if short stretches of good habitat exist. The Maryland Department of
the Environment, using the relationship between habitat structure and bio-
logical condition, demonstrated effects from  various influences (Fig. 5-4)
including agricultural runoff, treatment plant effluent, channelization, and
landfill operations (Primrose et al. 1991).

 Habitat Quality and Biological Condition
The variability of environmental conditions directly affects patterns of life,
 population,  and the  micro- and macrogeographic distribution of  org?.-
 nisms (Cooper, 1984; Price, 1975; Smith, 1974). An assessment of habitat
 structure is therefore critical to any evaluation of ecological integrity (Kan
 et aL 1986; Plafkin et al. 1989). Habitat assessment provides information on
                                                Point Size is Related
                                                to Number of Data
                                                Points Overlapping
                                                             50     60
                                                                 QHEI
                               Figure 5-3.-Qualltatlve Habitat Evaluation Index (QHEI) veraua the index of Blotlc In-
                               tegrity (IBI) for 465 relatively unlmpacted and habitat modified Ohio stream sites
                               (Rankln, 1991).

-------
                                                                   Evaluating Environmental Effects
a
5
1

100-
 90-
 80
 70-

 60-
 50
 40
    30-
    20-
    10-
     0
1 ,
Unimpatrtd
Mod*nMty
Irnpvrad
54V
-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  Gradient is perhaps
  the most influential
  factor for segregating
  a totic waterbody
  because it is related
  to topography and
  landform, geological
  formations, and
  elevation, which in
  turn influence
  vegetation patterns.
  Implementation of
  water quality
  improvements can be
  independent of
  habitat quality,  but
  judgment of the
  improvement in
  bblogical integrity
  cannot.

potential cause of reduced biotic condition. If habitat structural differences
result from the natural landscape rather than human interference, then the
possibility that an inappropriate reference condition was used must be
considered.
   The habitat assessment approach outlined here (Barbour and Stribling,
1991; Plafkin'et aL 1989) is applicable to wadable streams and rivers. Be-
cause fish and benthic macroinvertebrates are the focal points of these rec-
ommended bioassessment procedures, habitat structural parameters were
chosen that influence the development of these communities. Although
streams across the country exhibit a wide range of variability, some gener-
alizations can be made Gradient is perhaps the most influential factor for
segregating a lotic waterbody because it is related to topography and land-
form, geological formations, and elevation, which in turn influence vegeta-
tion patterns. Four generic stream categories related to gradient can be
identified: mountain, piedmont, valley plains, and coastal plains. Several
habitat attributes serve as a framework for assessing habitat quality:
    * Substrate variety/in-stream cover
    • Bottom substrate characterization/embeddedness
    • Flow or velocity /depth
    • Canopy cover (shading)
    • Channel alteration
    • Bottom scouring and deposition
    • Pool to riffle and run to bend ratios, channel sinuosity
    • Lower bank channel capacity
    • Upper bank stability
    • Bank vegetative stability (grazing or other disruptive pressure)
    * Streamside cover
    • Riparian vegetative zone width
    While the investigator is on-site, the quality of each parameter can be
 assessed. First, numeric value from a scale based on a gradient of condi-
 tions is assigned to assess the quality of each parameter. Then, a composite
 of information from  each parameter is compared to a reference condition.
 Such a quantified assessment of habitat structure  provides a more mean-
 ingful interpretation of biological  condition. Habitat assessment incorpo-
 rates information on  stream segments or reaches. However, a linear
 relationship between site-specific quality of habitat and community per-
 formance may not exist to the point that habitat structural condition can
 be used to "predict"  biological performance with accuracy.
     If habitat degradation has occurred, mitigation or improvement of the
 habitat through stream restoration activities should be evaluated. Imple-
 mentation of water  quality improvements can be independent of habitat
 quality, but judgment of the improvement in biological integrity cannot.


 Flow Regime.

 Fluctuating water levels are an integral part of the stream ecosystem, and
 the biota are dependent on seasonal flow variation. High flow events are
 especially important in maintaining the habitat complexity of pools, riffles,

-------
                                                                                     **    .  ,  .
                                                                    Evaluating Environmental Effects.
 clean substrates, and bars  (Hill ct'al.  1991). Aquatic organisms have
 evolved to compensate for  changing now regimes, even periodic cata-
 strophic flow conditions. High water periods are determined by the fre-
 quency, occurrence, and type of precipitation event as well as antecedent
 conditions such as soil moisture, time since last rain, and amount and type
 of soil cover. Dewatering the channel lor major periods as a result of
 human actions is dearly a degradation of the water resource, but more
 subtle changes in the volume and periods of flow may have equally devas-
 tating effects on the resident biota.
    Jones and dark (1987) discuss the effects of urbanization on the funda-
 mental hydrology of watersheds and the natural flow regime. Increases in
 impervious surface area (e.g., roads, parking lofts) result in a substantial in-
 crease in the proportion of rainfall that is rapidly discharged from the wa-
 tershed as direct runoff and streamflow. Such runoff increases the volume
 of flood flows and  instances of channel instability. Leonard and Orth
 (1986) developed a cultural pollution index to evaluate the health of the
 fish community subject to. the effects of road density, population encroach-
 ment, mining, and organic pollution. These effects have substantial influ-
 ence on flow regime. Steedman (1988) also evaluated the condition of fish
 communities in heavily urbanized areas of Ontario. He found that certain
 attributes that are relatively sensitive to urbanization effects can serve as
 pertinent response, signatures.
    Ohio EPA found that the presence or absence c/channelization influ-
 enced the relationship between the quality of habitat structure and the
 condition of the fish community (Ohio Environ, Prot. Agency, 1990); In the
 absence of channelization, for example, Twin Creek and Kokosing River
 (Fig. 5-5) had high IBI values, even in the presence of sporadic degraded
 habitat. In these instances, the relatively good habitat quality throughout
 the watershed supported the fish community in short reaches of degraded,
 habitat (Rankin, 1991). In channelized lotic systems, for example, Tiffin
 River and Little Auglaize River (Fig. 5-5), the best habitats were degraded
 and IBI scores remained essentially unchanged as the habitat was de-
 graded further. The quality of habitat structure and the flow regime are in-
 tricately associated. In areas of extensive channelization, communities may
 consist only of generalists and opportunists able to withstand harsh flow
conditions directly, or the secondary effects of fthosf flow conditions (e.g.,
reduced abundance of food or presence of habitat refuges).

•  Effects of Channelization.  Unchannelized or  otherwise unmodified
streams have normal, low-level, and mostly consistent rates of sediment
deposition on the bed and low, convex banks. The channel usually has
some  degree of meandering, and the banks lose very little mass during ei-
ther low or high flows.
    Efforts to control flooding and to  drain wetlands often involve chan-
nelization of streams to provide more rapid removal of water. Unfortu-
nately, these activities create unstable channels with higher gradients and
without meanders. Hydrogeomorphic processes tend to restore the dy-
namic stability of these systems over  time (Hupp and Simon, 1991). The
stream continuum hypothesis (Vannote et al. 1980) depicts the stream as
an upstream-downstream gradient of  gradually -changing physical condi-
tions and associated adjustments in functional attributes of the biota.

Fluctuating water
levels are an integral
pan of the stream
ecosystem, and the
biota are dependent
on seasonal flow
variation.

-------
BIOLOGICAL Cfit JKHIA;
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                             m
60


50


40

30

20

10
                                       •  TWINCFL
                                       A  TIFFIN Ft.
                                       A  LAUGLMZEFL
                                       O  KOKQSINGFL
                                                                                8
                                     0   10    20   30   40   50   60   70   80   90   100

                                                         QHEI
                             Figure 54.—Relationship of the Indue of Blotlc Inttgrlty (IBB) to change* In the quality
                             of habitat structure through the Qualitative Habitat Evaluation Index (QHEI) In chan-
                             nelized (triangles) and unehannellzed (circle*) (Ohio Environ. Prot Agency, 1990).
                                Biological processes in downstream areas are linked to those in up-
                             stream areas by the flow of water, nutrients, and organic materials' Be-
                             cause channelization produces an increase in flow velocity or scour, active
                             bed degradation occurs, causing the  movement of substrate particles
                             downstream.  As  bed  degradation continues,  degradation of lower
                             streambanks begins, eventually producing bank failure and concave up-
                             ward banks. During this period of severe instability, the channel is rapidly
                             (in a geologic sense) becoming wider and the water level shallower, some-
                             times producing a braided flow pattern. Channel widening causes persist-
                             ent bank failure in  the downstream areas and results in losses of canopy
                             cover and detrital input. These degradation processes move upstream, re-
                             ducing the rate of channel widening and providing depositional sediment
                             in downstream areas.                                 ».
                                Hydrological processes in channelized stream!* have direct effects on
                             the substrate (embeddedness, scour, and particle size distribution). Trans-
                             ported sediment causes aggradation to occur downstream with deposition
                             on the bed and at the bases of banks. Accretion occurs on the banks with
                             the beginning of the stabilization processes, and seed supplies from ripar-
                             ian vegetation or windblown from other areas settle on these deposits. As
                             vegetation, particularly woody species, becomes established on bank de-
                             positional surfaces, stability increases. During this phase of the channel re-
                             covery process, meandering features  develop through deposition and
                             vegetative stabilization of point bars (inside bend). The return of disturbed
                             stream channels to a dynamically stable, meandering morphology results
                             primarily from the aggradation of banks and beds and the establishment
                             of riparian stands  of woody vegetation (Hupp,  1992; Hupp and Simon,
                             1986,1991; Simon and Hupp, 1987). Hupp (1992) has estimated that an av-
                             erage of 65 years is* needed for this recovery process in nonbedrock con-
                             trolled, channelized streams in west Tennessee.

-------
                                                                  Evaluating Environmental Effects
   A complete concrete lining of natural waterways in western states has
long been Used to control wet weather flooding. Low flows of reclaimed
water are the only source of water for most of the year in these "streams *
Wet weather flows are commonly enormous and rapid. Though technically
listed as streams and rivers, these engineered channels do hot dearly fit def-
initions commonly understood for either "aquatic habitat" or "streams."

• Effects of Flow Regulation. Many streams are characterized by highly
variable and  unpredictable  flow regimes  (Bain et al.  1988).  Aquatic
macrophyte stands have been shown to be affected by current velocity, but
the degree and manner varies with the size of the channel (Chambers et aL
1991). In regulated streams, the importance of a bank-to-midstream habitat
orientation becomes magnified.  Flow changes displace the shallow shore-
line zones, forcing fish restricted to these areas (small fish that use shallow,
slow microhabitats) to relocate to maintain their specific set of habitat con-
ditions (Bain et al. 1988). Therefore, if shallow-water habitats are unstable
and unable to sustain a well-balanced assemblage, then the functional
value of the assemblage is lost and a reduction in organismal population
density may follow.                         .
   Gislason (1985) illustrates a  similar pattern for aquatic insect distribu-
tion in fluctuating flows. Bain et al. (1983) also suggest that without the
functional availability of shallow, slow, shoreline areas, the stream  envi-
ronment becomes one  general type of unstable habitat, dominated by a
few habitat generalists and those species using mostly mid-stream  habi-
tats. In these cases, the dominance of generalists confounds the assessment
of contiguous impact  types  such as nonpoint source  runoff and  point
source discharges. Comparison  of historical and current  flow conditions
can provide valuable information about the extent to which flow alteration
is responsible for degradation in biological integrity.


Energy Source

Stream organisms have evolved to accept and use the energy available to
them in natural watersheds. For most small or headwater streams in for-
ested areas of North America, a period of major leaf fall occurs in the au-
tumn. Leaves, in a form referred to as coarse particulate organic matter
(CPOM), reach the water and are quickly colonized by bacteria and fungi.
The organisms then provide food for invertebrates, which are in turn eaten
by fish and other vertebrates. The relative balance of production and  respi-
ration varies as a function of stream size, according to the stream contin-
uum hypothesis (Vannote et al.  1980).
   Human alteration of the source, type, and quantity of organic  material
entering streams can affect biological integrity in  many ways.  Natural
shifts in the energy base occur along stream and river gradients, thus pro-
viding a major dimension of resource partitioning for the aquatic  commu-
nity. The stream continuum concept (Vannote et al. 1980) outlines different
attributes of communities as the energy base shifts from heterotrophic (ex-
ternal) to autotrophic (internal)  inputs. These shifts are generally related to
increases in drainage area catchments, but exceptions do.occur-that are re-
lated to localized conditions.
   Along the stream/river gradient (Fig. 5-6), Cummins (1983) describes
the measurement of this shift as a photosynthesis/respiration  (P/R) ratio.
Comparison of
historical and current
flow conditions can
provide valuable
information about the
extent to which flow
alteration is
responsible for
degradation in
biological integrity.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 Alterations to the
 energy base are not
 independent of
 alterations to habitat
 structure. In many.
 instances,
 assessment of habitat
 quality is an
 assessment of
 impacts to the energy
 base.

                             This P/R ratio is less than 1 in the headwater areas of streams and large
                             rivers. Therefore, these reaches are heterotrophic because in-stxeam photo-
                             synthesis is not a primary energy source. The P/R ratio is greater than 1 in
                             the mid-sized rivers where in-stream photosynthesis is a major contributor
                             to the energy base; the latter are autotrophic The removal of riparian veg-
                             etation for agriculture, channelization, or strip mining, or the shift from
                             natural riparian flora to introduced species for urbanization projects alters
                             the energy base of the aquatic system. Although the stream continuum is
                             thought to no longer hold true for the majority of watersheds, it does ex-
                             emplify the important considerations in energy base and aquatic ecosys-
                             tem interaction.
                                tr
                                UJ
                                o
                                oe
                                o
UJ
£E
I—
CO
                                   3

-------
                                                                      1  •        ; .    l^tlAr-' -n s.
                                                                   Evaluating Environmental Effects
    Alterations to the energy base are not independent of alterations to
habitat structure. In many instances, assessment of habitat quality is an as-
sessment  of impacts  to the  energy  base. However, the  evaluation of
changes in the energy base can be strengthened by a systematic riparian
assessment based on a delineation of natural flora. Alterations in the spe-
cies of  riparian plants  influence the functional representation of the
aquatic trophic structure biota.
    Wilhelm and Ladd (1988) developed a basic tool for conducting natu-
ral area assessments in the Chicago region. They presented a checklist of
vascular plants of the Chicago region and assigned each species a coeffi-
cient of conservatism. This measure expresses the value of the species rela-
tive to all other elements in the flora and its particular tie with ancestral
vegetation. Low scores are given to native species that are relatively ubiq-
uitous under a broad set of disturbance conditions; high scores are given
to species that are sensitive to disturbance; and ho scores are assigned to
non-native species. In this manner, vegetation can be assessed as repre-
senting natural or disturbance conditions.
    Applying this method to  riparian corridors would require a similar
classification of vegetation. However, much literature is available to aid in
classifying riparian flora. The U.S. Forest Service has compiled an exten-
sive database on riparian systems that has been published in several re-
ports  (e.g., Platts et al. 1983). Hupp and Simon (1991) recognize  early
successional species of woody vegetation in riparian zones of disturbed
and recovering stream channels in western Tennessee. Padgett et aL (1989)
provide a substantial list of references documenting vegetation classifica-
tion in many of the western states.


Biotic Interactions

Predation,  competition,  disease,  and mutualistic interactions influence
where and when species occur within, streams. Larval stages of mussels,
for example, must attach to the gills of specific fish  species to complete
their  life  cycles. Stream communities  are often dominated by a few
"strongly interacting" species that may have disproportionate effects on
the other members of the community (Hart, 1992; Power, 1990). The addi-
tion of human influences may alter the integrity of these interactions in
ways  that alter the abundances of local species and may even cause their
demise.  Additional human influences are harvests for sport and commer-
cial purposes and the introduction of exotic species, sometimes intention-
ally but  often inadvertently. The practice of stocking fish  can be an
ecological or genetic disturbance, especially if naturally occurring popula-
tions are replaced or infiltrated by stocked individuals. However, the ac-
ceptance of this practice is an important societal decision; its advantages
and disadvantages must be carefully weighed.


Cumulative Impacts

Even when human actions have an influence on only one of these factors,
the effect may cascade through several others. For example, clearing land
for agriculture alters the erosion rate and thus the extent to which sedi-
mentation may alter the regional biota. Removal of natural vegetation re-

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Techn!csl Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  The diversity of
  influences on the
  quality of water
  resources requires
  the kind of multipfe
  attribute approach
  common to recent
  biocriteria program
  efforts. The use of a '
  multiple attribute
  approach enables the
  development of
  biological response
  signatures to assess
  probable "causes and
  effects.'
duces shading, water infiltration, and groundwater recharge, thereby in-
creasing water temperatures, insolation, and the frequency of flood and
drought flows. The resultant agricultural activities may change the stream
through channelization/and thus further influence habitat structure. Alter-
ations in the land cover and the channel often have major impacts on
water quality (e.g., increased amounts of nitrogen and phosphorus in the
runoff from agricultural fields or pesticides in the water). Excess nutrients
in modified channels exposed to ample sunlight will enhance the growth
of nuisance algae, especially during summer's low flow periods..
   Unfortunately, human influences on stream ecosystems cannot be eas-
ily categorized (Karr, 1991). The dose  association between alteration of
habitat structure and other impact types complicates the determination of ,
'cause and effect" However, this dimension  becomes paramount when
mitigative measures are crucial to the  attainment of designated uses or
biocriteria. In many cases, deductive reasoning, thorough review of the bi-
ological data, and use of biological response signatures supported by other .
environmental data  (Le., physical characterization, toxidty testing, and
chemical analyses) aid the assessment of impairment.
   The_unplications of significantly  altered systems,  for example,  chan-
nelized streams in urban areas or stream flows regulated by hydroelectric
dams, are that reference conditions different from the natural system may
have to be established to represent these systems and to evaluate other im-
pact types (Karr and Dionne, 1991). When major impacts (Le., significant
habitat alterations)  are present; it  is  difficult to adequately evaluate
changes in community elements and processes that may be attributable to
other impacts.
   The diversity of influences on the quality of water resources requires the
kind of multiple attribute approach common to recent biocriteria program ef-
forts. The use of a multiple attribute approach enables the development of bi-
ological response signatures to assess probable "causes and effects."
   Using biological response signatures, the Ohio EPA (Yoder, 1991) was
able to assign each of their more  severely degraded situations to one of six
groups:
    • complex municipal and industrial wastes,

    • conventional municipal and  industrial wastes,

    •  combined sewer overflow and urbanization,

    •  channelization,

    • agricultural nonpoint source, or

    • other, often complex, impacts.

    The Ohio EPA also found that various impact types may have one or
 two biological response characteristics in common. In rare cases, they have
 three in common. Therefore, only a multiple assemblage,  multimetric ap-
 proach enables a differentiation  among impact types. In certain cases, the
 severity of the impact is related to the type of impact. The IBI  has been
 used by Ohio EPA to characterize these impact types (Fig. 5-7).

-------
                                                                              Evaluating Environmental Effects
      60
      IMP ACT TYPE
    •  •GRADIENT*
                                 BIOLOGICAL RESPONSE
      50 H
 I    40 r
B
 I
30f
     20
     10
                 UTlpactad.
STREAM/
      IMPACTS
                                         EXCEPTIONAL
            Conations
             Miner swinge and
            , meat agneultural
             NPS imoacei
            nwntsiitaitenjew
            DO.habiiat impacts
            CSCVUf&an impacts.
            UMUHC toacity
            Complex tone
            (acutt). acid mint.
            tone 3»dimena

                                                    i I  BIS OARSYCR.   I
                                                       (Municipal Agr.   1
                                                         NPS)         I
                                                       WALNUT CH.
                                                         (Industrial^
                                                       Conventional.
                                                         Municipal)
                                                             HOCKING R.
                                                            (MunicipiJ wPra-
                                                            tieanwm,CSO)
                                                        RUSHCR.
                                                        (AcidMn*
                                                        Oninag*)
                                    RIVER MILE
 Rgur« 5-7.—Biotoglead community response M portrayed by the Indtx of Blotte In.
 tvgrlty 0BQ In four slmlivly tlzwl Ohio riwra with dlffwwit type* of point and non-
 point source Impact* (Yoder, 1991).                                     .



 Suggested Readings

 Atkinson, SJF. 1985. Habitat-based methods ibr biological impact assessment Environ.
    Prof. 7:26532.

 Bain, M.B., J.T. Him, and HE. Booke. 1988. Streamflow regulation and fish community
    stmcture. Ecology 69(2)382-92.

 Ball J. 1982. Stream classification guidelines tot Wisconsin. In 1983 Water Quality Standards
    Handbook. Oft Water Reg. Standards, US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC

 Barbour, M.T. and J.B. Stribling. 1991. Use of habitat assessment in evaluating the biological
    integrity of stream communities. Pages 25-38 in Biological Criteria: Research and Regu-
    lation. EPA 440/5^1-005. Off. Water, US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC

 Karr, J JL et al. 1986. Assessing Biological Integrity in Running Waters: A Method and Its
    Rationale. Spec. PubL 5. Illinois Nat History Surv., Urbana, IL.
 Karr, JJL 1991. Biological integrity: a long-neglected aspect of water resource manage-
    ment EcoLAppL 1:66-84.            .  ,  •

 Leonard, P.M. and D.J. Orth. 1986. Application and testing of an index of biotic integrity
    in small, coolwater streams. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 115:401-14.

 Ohio Environmental Protection  Agency. 1990. The Use of Biocriteria in the Ohio EPA
    Surface Water Monitoring and Assessment Program. Columbus, OH

Platts, WJS., W1F. Megahan, and G.W. MirishalL 1983. Methods for Evaluating Stream,
    Riparian, and Biotic Conditions. Gen. Tech. Rep. INT-138. Intermountain Res. Sta.,
    Forest Serv., US. Dep. Agric., Ogden, UT.

Steedman, R.J. 1988. Modification and assessment of an index of biotic integrity to quan-
    tify stream quality in southern Ontario. Can. J. Fish. Aquat. So. 45:492-501.

   . Environmental Protection Agency. 1983. Technical Support Manual:  Waterbody
    Surveys and Assessments for Conducting Use Attainability Analyses. VoL 1-3. Off.
    Water Reg. Stand., Washington, DC

       1990. Biological Criteria: National Program Guidance for Surface Waters. EPA-
    440/5-90-004. Off. Water, Washington; DC
                      A multiple
                      assemblage,
                      multimetric approach
                      enables a
                      differentiation among
                      impact types.

-------
\

-------
                    CHAPTERS.
   Multimetric Approaches
               forBiocriteria
                Development
                   C' ' .           '           - ~ 1
       lassical approaches to the assessment of biological integrity have
       usually selected a single biological attribute that refers to a narrow
       range of perturbations or conditions (Kan et al. 1986). Likewise,
 many ecological studies have focused on a limited number of parameters,
 such as species distributions, abundance trends, standing crops, or pro-
 duction estimates, which are interpreted separately, then used to provide a
 summary statement about the system's overall health. These approaches
 are limited because a single attribute may not reflect the overall ecological
 health of the stream or region. An accurate assessment of biological integ-
 rity requires a method that examines the pattern and processes of biotic re-
 sponses from individual to ecosystem levels (Karr et al. 1986).
    An alternative approach is to define an array of metrics, each of which
 provides information on a biological assemblage and, when integrated,
 functions as an overall indicator of the stream or river's biological condi-
 tion. The strength of a multimetric assessment is its ability to integrate in-
 formation from individual, population, community, and ecosystem levels
 and evaluate this information, with reference to biogeography, as a single,
 ecologically based index of water resource quality (Karr, 1991; Karr et al!
 1986; Plafkin et aL  1989). Multimetric assessments provide detection capa-
 bility over a broad  range and nature of stressors. The Ohio EPA (1987) sug-
 gests  that  the  strengths  of individual metrics taken  in combination
 minimize any weaknesses they may have individually.
    Abel (1989), LaPoint and Fairchild (1989), and Karr (1991) do not rec-
 ommend using a single metric For the broad range of human impacts, a
 comprehensive, multiple metric approach is more appropriate. Similarly,
 each of the assemblages discussed in Chapter 4 has a response range to
 disturbing  events  and 'impairments (degraded  conditions).  Therefore,
biosurveys that target multiple assemblages provide the detection capabil-
ity that is needed to accomplish assessment objectives.
   Karr (1991), Karr etal. (1986), Ohio EPA (1987), and Plafkin etal. (1989)
recommend use of a number of biological assemblages and metrics that
can, when combined and compared with expected conditions/give a more
complete picture of the relative biological condition of the study site.
 Purpose:
 To describe a
 multimetric approach
 for analyzing
 biological data and to
 provide guidance for
 regional selection of
 metrics.
The accurate
assessment of
biological integrity
requires a method
that examines the
patterns and
processes of biotic
responses from
individual to
ecosystem levels.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 A biological attribute
 or metric is some
 feature or
 characteristic of the
 blotio assemblage   -.
 that reflects ambient
 condition, especially
 the influence of
 human actions.
 Metric Evaluation and Calibration

 Core metrics should represent diverse aspects of structure, composition/
 individual health, or processes of the aquatic biota. Together they form the
 foundation for a sound integrated analysis of the biotic condition and
 judge of the system's biological integrity. Thus, metrics reflecting commu-
 nity characteristics are appropriate in biocriteria programs if their rele-
 vance  can  be  demonstrated,  their  response range  verified  and
 documented, and the potential for program application exists. Regional
 variation in metric details are expected; nevertheless, the general princi-
 ples used to define metrics seem consistent over wide geographic areas
 (Miller etaL 1988).
    Candidate metrics are determined from the biological data. Good met-
 rics have low variability with respect to the expected range and response of
 the metrics: it must be possible to discriminate between impaired and un-
 impaired sites from the metric values. The use of percentiles is a useful tech-
 nique to evaluate variability of metric performance within stream classes. In
 operational bioassessment, metric values below the lower quartile of refer-
 ence conditions are typically judged impaired to some degree (e.g., Ohio En-
 viron. Frot Agency, 1990). The distance from the lower quartile  can be
 termed  a "scope for detection" (Fig. 6-la). The larger this distance, com-
 pared to the interquartile range, the easier it is to detect deviation from the
 reference condition.  Thus, we  can define a "detection coefficient" as the
 ratio of the interquartile range to the scope for detection (Gerritsen and
 Bowman, 1994). This coefficient is analogous to the coefficient of variation
 (CV), and the smaller the value, the easier it is to detect the impairment
    Metrics with high variability, or scope for detection, compared to the
range of response should be used with caution. Many metrics (e.g., num-
ber of taxa) decrease in value with impairment and the detection coeffi-
 cient for reference sites is thus a good measure of the metrics' potential
 discrimination ability. Some metric values (e.g., HBI, percent omnivores,
                            Max
                            Min
                                          maximum

                                      75th percentOe


                                            median


                                      25th percsntile

                                          minimum
                        T
                       T
                                       interquartile
                                         range
                                                                   scope for
                                                                   detecting
                                                                   mpairrnent
                            Figure 6-to.—Metrics that decrease with Impairment

-------
                                                    Multimetric Approaches for Biocriteria Development
 100%—
 0%
                      T
                                    scope for
                                    detecting
                                   impairment
                                   interquartile
                                      range
                     T
Flgura«.1b.—Metric* that IncrMM with ImpirirmMt

percent filterers) may increase under impaired conditions, and the scope
for detection would be from the 75th percentile to the maximum value
(Fig. 6-lb). The detection coefficient would be  calculated the same way
and used to judge the discriminatory power of the metrics.
    Certain metrics may exhibit a continuum of expectations dependent
on specific physical attributes of  the reference streams. For example,
Fausch  et al.  (1984) determined that the  total number  of fish species
changes as a function of stream size estimated by stream  order or water-
shed area (Fig. 6-2). They showed that when these data are plotted, the
points produce a distinct right triangle, the hypotenuse of which approxi-
mates the upper limit of species richness. Thus, a line with a slope fitted to
include about 95 percent of the sites is an appropriate approximation of a
maximum line of expectations for the metric in question and identifies the,
upper limit of the reference condition. The area  on  the graph beneath the
maximum line can then be trisected or quadrisected to assign scores to a
range of metric values as illustrated in Figure 6-2. The scores provide the
transformation of values to a  consistent: measurement scale to group infor-
mation from several metrics for analysis.                              .
    When different stream classes have different expectations in metric
values and a covariate that produces a monotonic response in a metric, a
plot of survey data for each stream class may be useful (Fig. 6-3). For each
metric, the sites are sorted by stream class (e.g., ecoregion, stream type)
and plotted to ascertain the spread in data and the  ability to discriminate
among classes (Fig. 6-4). If such a representation  of the data does not allow
discrimination of the classes, then it will not be necessary to develop a sep-
arate biocriterion for each class. That is, a single criterion  will be applica-
ble to a set of sites that represent different physical classes. Conversely, if
differences in the biological  attribute are apparent  and appear to corre-
spond to the classification, then separate criteria are necessary. This tech-
nique is especially useful if the covariates are unknown or do not east, but
a difference in stream class is apparent (Fig. 6-4).
Core metrics should
represent diverse
aspects of structure,
composition,
individual health, or
processes of the
aquatic biota.

-------
                                                           •i	,!>
3.CLOGICAL CRITERIA
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers.
                                   30—
                                   20—
                                   10—
                                                             Maximum Species
                                                             Richness Line'
                                                T
                                                 2
T
 3
T
 4
T
 5
T
                                   " —           -              Stream Order
                              Figure 6-2.—Total number of fish species vsreus stream order for 72 sHes along the
                              Embarras River In Illinois (Fausch et al. 1984).
                                                         (e.g., Stream S!z»)

                              Figure 6-3.—Metrics plotted with a continuous covarlate (hypothetical example).


                                  Pilot studies or small-scale research may be needed to define, evaluate,
                              and calibrate metrics. Past efforts to evaluate the use of individual metrics
                              illustrate procedural approaches to this task (Angermeier and Karr, 1986;
                              Harbour et al. 1992; Boyle et al. 1990; Davis  and Lubin, 1991; Karr and
                              Kerans, 1992; Karr et al. 1986; Kerans et al. 1992; Lyons, 1992; Resh and
                              Jackson, 1993). Metrics can be calibrated by  evaluating the response  of
                              metric values to varying levels of stressors.
                                  Sites must be carefully selected to cover the widest possible  range of
                              suspected  stressors. In general, impaired sites are selected that have im-
                              pacts from stressors singly and in combination. The selected impaired sites

-------
                                                                                           ,    .
                                                     Multimetric Approaches for Biocriteria Development
     VMll
                           Stream Class
 Figure 6-4.—Box and whisker plot* of metric valuu from hypothetical strum
 classes. Shaded portions ars above the median for each class. The box represents a
 pereentlle, the vertical line la 1.5 times the interquartile ranaa, and the horizontal line
 la the median of each distribution.

      '              '"                                "
 and the reference sites together are the basis for developing an empirical
 model of metric response to stressors. Categories of land  uses equated
 with potential impairment are listed in Chapter 7. Candidate metrics that
 do not respond to any of the stressors expected to occur in a region may be
 eliminated.
    As an example, the discriminatory power of macroinvertebrate metrics
 was evaluated for Honda streams. The judgment criteria for discrimina-
 tion were based on the degree of interquartile overlap between the least
 impaired site category and the impaired site category for each metric A
 metric was judged excellent if no overlap existed in the interquartile range
 (Fig.  6-5a); poor if the overlap was considerable, and no distinction be-
 tween the impairment categories could be made (Fig. 6-5b). An analysis of
 a metric's performance among all of the site classes indicated the metric's
 strength in discriminating between "good" and "bad" conditions.
    Additional research is needed to demonstrate the responses of metrics
 to different stressors in different ecoregions or stream systems. However,
 once  these  factors have been considered and demonstrated, the metrics
 can be incorporated into  localized biocriteria programs. It is also impor-
 tant that the metrics and necessary survey methods be appropriate to the
 logistical and budgetary  resources of the Investigating agency. Practical
 application is  the penultimate step in metric development. Continued
 evaluation of metrics and indices is  an essential feature of the use of
 biocritena.                                            ,


 Biocriteria Based on a  MuHtimetric Approach

 The validity of an integrated assessment using multiple metrics  is sup-
 ported by the use of metrics firmly rooted in sound ecological principles
 (Fausch et al. 1990; Karr et al. 1986; Lyons, 1992). For biocriteria, a biologi-
 cal attribute or metric is some feature or characteristic of the biotic assem-
blage that changes in a predictable way with increased human influence.
It is also important
that the metrics and
necessary survey
methods be
appropriate to the
logistical and   .
budgetary resources
of the investigating
agency.

-------
BIOLOGICAL
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                     20
                                               SS75A
                                                               Rctarano* O«w knpHrad
                                                                    73BCO
                                                i^ Min-Max .
                                              CD 25%-75%
                                               o   Median value
                               Figure «a.—SHe discrimination for the number of Ephomeroptera, Plecoptera, and
                               Trlchoptera (EPT Incta) In Florida atreama. (Referanet • leaat Impaired, ether •
                               unknown; Impaired • determined Impaired a priori.)
                                •8
                                *
28


24


20


16


12


 8
                                                                Rttannoa
                                                OS75A
                                                                      7SBCO
                                                _L_ Min-Max
                                                CZD 25%-75%
                                                 °   Median value
                               Rgure 6-5b.—Site discrimination for the number of Chlronomidae taxa In Florida
                               etreama.  (Reference » leaat Impaired, oUwr « unknown, Impaired » determined
                               Impaired a priori.)

                               The status of the biota as indicated by a composite of appropriate attri-
                               butes (metrics) provides an accurate reflection of the biological condition
                               at a study site. A large number of attributes have been used (e.g., see
                               Fausch et al. 1990; Karr, 1991; Karr et aL 1986; Kay, 1990; Noss, 1990), and,
                               each is essentially a hypothesis about the relationship between in-stream
                               condition and human influence (Fausch et al. 1990). Gray (1989) states that
                               the three best-documented responses to environmental stressors are reduc-
                               tion in species richness, change in species composition to dominance by
                               opportunistic species,  and  reduction in mean  size of  organisms. But

-------
                                                    Multimetric Approaches for Biocriteria Development
Figure 6-6.—Tl«r*d metric development procees (edcptod from Holland, 1990).
because each feature responds to different stressors, the best approach to
assessment is the incorporation of many attributes into the assessment
process.
    The development of appropriate metrics is dependent on the taxa to be
sampled, the biological characteristics at reference conditions, and to a cer-
tain extent,  the anthropogenic influences being assessed. They must be
pertinent to the management objectives to which the biocriteria will be ap-
plied. In many situations, multiple stressors impact ecological resources,
and specific  "cause and effect" assessment may be  difficult. However,
change over sets of metrics in response to perturbation by certain stressors
(or sets thereof) may be used as response signatures.
    A broad approach for program-directed development of metrics may be
modeled after Harbour et al. (1992), Fausch et al (1990), Holland (1990), or
Karr and Kerans (1992). Candidate metrics are selected based on knowl-
edge of aquatic systems, flora and fauna, literature reviews, and historical
data (Fig. 6-6). During the research process, these metrics are evaluated for
efficacy and  validity. Only after careful evaluation should the metrics be in-
troduced into the biocriteria program. Less robust metrics or those not well-
founded  in ecological principles are weeded out in this research process.
Metrics with little or ho relationship to stressors are rejected. The remain-
ing, or core,  metrics are those that provide useful information in differenti-
ating among sites having good and poor quality biotic characteristics.
    The use of multiple metrics to develop a framework for biocriteria is a
systematic process involving discrete steps. The process includes site classi-
fication (Chapter 3), conduct of a biosurvey and determination of metrics,
aggregation  into indices, and the formulation of biocriteria. The conceptual
model for processing biological data into a biooiteria framework is adapted
from Paulsen et al. (1991) and illustrated in Figure 6-7. A description of the
process is summarized in Table 6-1 and described as follows:

• Step 1 — Classification. Sites are classified as described in Chapter 3 to
determine the stream class designation and to ascertain the best and most
representative sites for each stream  class. The reference condition will be
7"he development of
appropriate metrics is
dependent on the
taxa to be sampled,
the biological
characteristics at  .
reference conditions,
and to a certain
extent, the
anthropogenic
influences being
assessed.

-------
Te&hnical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                              1. Classification
                             2. Survey of Biota and Habitat
                             3. Candidate Metric Evaluation
                             4. Core Metric Calibration
                             5. Index Development
                              6. Biocriteria Development
                                                          Indicators
                             Figure 6-7.—The conceptual process tar proceeding from measurements to Indica-
                             tors to assessment condition (modified from Pauhwn it si. 1991).
                             established from this step. Site classification is necessary to reduce and
                             partition variability in the biological data. Multistate collaboration is en-
                             couraged in the development of these calibration regions; a benefit is that
                             common methods and metrics can be established among states and cross-
                             state comparisons are enhanced.

                             • Step 2—Biosurvey. Surveys of the best sites and those known to be im-
                             paired are made for both biota and physical habitat to 'determine the dis-
                             criminatory power of the metrics using the impaired and best sites within
                             the stream class. The use of standardized methods (Chapter 4) provides a
                             better interpretation of the raw data than does a conglomeration of tech-
                             niques. The raw data  from a collection of measurements must be evalu-
                             ated within the ecological context that defines what is expected for similar
                             waterbodies (by reference to waterbody type and size, season, geographic
                             location, and other elements).

                             • Step 3 — Candidate Metrics Evaluation and Calibration. Analysis of
                             the biological data emphasizes the evaluation of biological attributes that
                             represent the elements and processes of the community. All potential met-
                             rics having ecological relevance are identified in this step.

-------
                                                                 .  ,                 -       CHAPTcri 6.
                                                       Multimetric Approaches for Biocriteria Development
Table 6-1.—Sequential progression of the blocrittda process.
                            •KXRrTERIA PROCESS
  Step 1.  Classification to Determine Reference Conditions and Regional Ecological
     Expectations
     • stream class designation
     • beet and representative sites (reference sites representative of class categories
      and natural background physical integrity)   ,
 Step 2. Survey Best Sites (reference sites)         . *
     • biota and physical habitat
     • database consists of raw data (taxonomic lists, abundance levels, and other
      direct measures and observations)
 Step 3. Candidate Metric Evaluation
     • data analysis (data summaries) of biological attributes
     • calculation of candidate metrics
 Step 4. Core Metric Calibration
     • testing and validation of metrics by stream class
     • calibration of metrics to discriminate Impairment
 Step 5. Index Development
     • determination of biological endpoints
     • aggregation of metrics
 Step 6. Biocriteria Development
    • adjustment by physiochemical covariates
    • adjustment by designated aquatic life use
• Step 4 — Core Metric Calibration. From the data analysis, metrics are
evaluated  for relevance to  the  biological community and validated by
stream classes. Calibration of the metrics must address the ability to differ-
entiate between impaired and nonimpaired sites.  •  •

• Step 5 — Index Development For aggregation purposes, transforma-
tion to scores from values of various scales of measurement relevant to in-
dividual metrics must be done. These  scores are normally incorporated
into an index, such as the IBI, which, in turn, becomes part of the final as-
sessment process. The individual metrics may also be used as indicators of
biological condition in the overall assessment of those endpoints — to sup-
port the aggregated index or as individual endpoints.

• Step 6 — Biocriteria Development Biocriteria are formulated from the
indices (Chapter 7) for the  stream cleisses and  adjusted by physical and
chemical covariates and designated aquatic life uses. The  biocriteria may
be based on a single aggregated  index or established for several biological
endpoints.                                           -
Potential Metrics for Fish and
Macroinvertebrates

A number of metrics have been developed and subsequently tested in field
surveys of benthic macroinvertebrate and fish assemblages (Karr,  1991).
Because metrics have been recommended for fish assemblages (Karr, 1981;
Karr et al. 1986) and for benthic maoroinvertebrates (Barbour et al. 1992;

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 A number of
 attributes can be
 characterized by
 metrics within five
 general classes:
 community structure,
 taxa richness, variety,
 dominance, and
 relative abundance.
Kerans et al. 1992; Ohio Environ. Prot. Agency, 1987; Plafkin et al. 1989),
they will not be reviewed extensively here. A list of the fish assemblage
metrics used in the Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI) is presented in Table 6-2,
which represents variations in regional fauna. Karr (1991) separates these
metrics into three classes: (1) species richness and composition, (2) trophic
composition, and (3) abundance and condition. These classes of character-
istics generally agree with the areas of assemblage response described as
being technically supported (Gray, 1989): reduction in species richness,
shift to numerical dominance by a small number of opportunistic species/
and reduction in the mean body size of individuals.
   Benthic metrics have undergone similar evolutionary developments
and are documented in the Invertebrate Community Index (ICI) (Ohio En-
viron. Prot. Agency, 1987), Rapid Bioassessment Protocols (RBPs) (Barbour
et al. 1992; Hayslip, 1992; Plafkin et aL 1989; Shackleford, 1988) and the
benthic IBI (Kerans and Karr, in press). Metrics used in these indices are
surrogate measures of elements and processes of the macroinvertebrate as-
semblage. Although several of these indices are regionally developed,
some are more broadly based; and individual metrics may be appropriate
in various regions of the country (Table 6-3).
   Figure 2-2 (see chapter 2) illustrates a conceptual structure for attri-
butes of a biotic assemblage in an integrated assessment that reflects over-
all biological condition. A number of these attributes can be  characterized
by metrics within five general classes: community structure, taxa richness,
variety, dominance, and relative abundance. Community structure can be
measured by variety and distribution of individuals among taxa. Taxa
richness, or the number of distinct taxa, reflects the diversity within a sam-
ple of an assemblage. Multimetric uses of taxa richness as a key metric in-
clude the Invertebrate Community Index (Ohio Environ.  Prot. Agency,
1987), the Fish Index of Biotic Integrity (Karr et al. 1986), the Benthic Index
of Biotic Integrity (Kerans and  Karr, in press), and  Rapid Bioassessment
Protocols (Plafkin et al. 1989). Taxonomic richness is also recommended as
critical-  information in assays of natural  phytoplankton assemblages
(Schelske, 1984). Taxa richness is usually species level but can also be eval-
uated as designated groupings of taxa, often as higher taxonomic groups
(e.g., family and order, among  others) in assessments of invertebrate as-
semblages.
    Relative abundance of taxa refers to the number of individuals of one
taxon as compared to that of the whole community.  Abundance estimates
are surrogate measures of standing crop and density that can relate to both
contaminant  and enrichment problems. Dominance (e.g., "measured as
percent composition of dominant taxon"' [Barbour et al. 1992]) or domi-
nants-in-common (Shackleford, 1988) is an indicator of community bal-
ance or lack thereof. Dominance roughly equates to redundancy and is an
important indicator when the most significant taxa are eliminated from the
assemblage or if the food source is altered, thus allowing  a few species
that are characterized as opportunists to become substantially more abun-
dant than the rest of the assemblage. As a general rule, dominance of one
or a few species increasing at a site indicates that the influence of human
activities has increased. Comparison to reference conditions provides an
important tool to evaluate the extent to which dominance  may reflect
human activities.

-------
                                                                                             101 oiociutma
       6-2.—fndtx of Btotte Integrity metrics used in various regions of North America.
ALTERNATIVE
IBI METRICS
1. Total number of species
# native fish species
# salmonid age classes*
2. Number of darter species
# sculpin spades
f benthidnsactivore species
* darter and sculpin species
# saimonid yearings (Individuals)'
% round-bodied suckers
# sculpins (Individuals)
3. Number of sunfish species
# cyprinid species
# water column species
# sunfish and trout species
f salmonid species
# headwater species
4. Number of sucker species
* adult trout species'
# minnow species
if sucker and catfish species
5. Number of intolerant species
# sensitive species
# amphibian species
Presence of brook trout
6. Percent green sunfish
% common carp
% white sucksr
% tolerant species
% creek chub
% dace species
7. Percent omnh/ores
% yearling salmonids*
8. Percent insectivorous cyprinids
% insectivores
% specialized insectivores
# juvenile trout
% insectivorous species
9. Percent top carnivores
% catchable salmonids
% catchable trout
% pioneering species
Density catchable trout
10. Number of individuals
Density of individuals
11. Percent hybrids
% introduced species
% simple lithophilis
# simple lithophilis species
% native species
% native wild individuals
12. Percent diseased individuals
I
X
X
X
X
X
X
•_x.
X
x
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
, a
£1
at IB
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
1
X
X



X
X
X

X

X
l!
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

x
- x
X
if
X
X
X
X
x
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
if
ii
X
X
x
X
X
X
X


X
x
X
X
X
X

at
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
1
X
x
•Metric suggested by Moyle or Hughes as a provisional replacement metric in small western salmonid streams.
X « metric used in region. Many of these variables are applicable crisewhere.
•Excluding individuals of tolerant species.                     -
Taken from Kan- et al. (1986), Hughes and Gammon (1987), Miller et al. (1988), Ohio EPA (1987), Steedham (1988), Lyons (1992).

-------
3,CLOGiCAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
\
1
Table 6-3. — Examples of metric suites used for analysis
semblages.
ALTERNATIVE
SENTHIC
METRICS tBf RBP»
1. Total number taxa X X
% change in total taxa richness
2. Number EPT taxa X X
# mayfly taxa X
tfcaddisflytaxa • , X
# stonefly taxa
• Missing taxa (EPT)
3. Number dJptera taxa X
# chironomidae taxa
4. Number intolerant snail and mussel species
5. Ratio EPT/chirenomidae abundance
Indicator assemblage Index
SEPT taxa
% mayfly composition ' X
% caddisfly composition X
of macrolnvertebrate aa-
RBP-
RBP8 » OR WA WBI*
X X X XX
XXX
XX X
X
X
X
X
X X '
X
XXX
XXX
X
6. Percent Tribe Tanytarsini X
7. Percent other diptera and noninsect X
composition
8. Percent tolerant organisms X
% corbicula composition
% oligochaete composition
Ratio hydropsychidae/trtooptera X
9. Percent individual dominant taxa X
% individual two dominant taxa
Five dominant taxa in common X
Common taxa index
10. Indicator groups • •
11. Percent individual omnivoree and scavengers
12. Percent individual collector gatherers and flHeren
% Individual fitterers .
13. Percent individual grazers and scrapers
Ratio scrapers/filterer collectors
Ratio scrapers/(scrapers + filterer collectors) X
14. Percent individual strict predators
15. Ratio shredders/total ind. (+ % shredders) X
T6. Percent similarity functional feeding groups (QSI) X
17. Total abundance
18. Pinkham-Pearson Community Similarity Index X
Community Loss Index
Jaccard Similarity Index
. 19. Quantitative Similarity Index (taxa) X
20. Hilsenhoff Biotic Index X
Chandler Biotic Index
21. Shannon-Weiner Diversity Index
Equitability
Index of Community Integrity
' . X
X
x —
XXX
X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X X
X . X
XXX
X
X X
X
X X
XX
X
X
XXX
X
X
X
X
•Onto EPA (1987)
"Barbour et al. (1992) revised from Plafkin et al. (1989)
cShackelford (1988)
"Hayslip (1 992): ID « Idaho. OR « Oregon. WA « Washington (Note: These metrics In ip, OR. and WA
are currently under evaluation.) . • .
*Kerans and Karr (in press)
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^g^^^gjM^^^^^MH^^H^^^^^MM^H^H^MMHHMI^^^H^HH^HMM

-------
                                                               .                  .
                                                     Multimetric Approaches for Biocriteria Development
    Taxonomic composition can be characterized by several classes of in-
 formation, including identity and sensitivity. Identity is the knowledge of
 individual taxa and associated ecological principles and environmental re-
 quirements. Key taxa (Le., those that zire of special interest or ecologically
 important) provide information important to the identity of the targeted
 assemblages. The presence of exotics or nuisance species may be an impor-
 tant aspect of biotic interactions that relates to both identity and sensitiv-
 ity. Sensitivity refers to the numbers of pollutant tolerant and intolerant
 species in the sample. The IGI and RBPs use a metric based on species tol-
 erance values. A similar metric for fish assemblages is included in the IBI
 (Table 6-2). Recognition of rare, endangered, or important taxa provides
 additional legal support for remediation activities or recommendations.
 Species status  for response guilds of bird assemblages — for example,
 whether they are threatened or endangered,  their endemidty, or some
 commercial or recreational value — also relates to the composition class of
 metrics (Brooks et al. 1991).
    Individual condition metrics characterize assemblage features that re-
 sult from sublethal or avoidance response to contaminants. These metrics
 focus on low-level chronic exposure to chemical contamination. The condi-
 tion of individuals can be rated by-observation of their physical (anatomi-
 cal) or behavioral characteristics. Physical characteristics that can be useful
 for assessing habitat contaminations result from microbial or viral infec-
 tion, teratogenic or carcinogenic effects arising during development of that
 individual, or from a maternal effect. These characteristics are categorized
 as diseases, anomalies, or metabolic processes (biomarkers).
    The underlying concept of the biomarkers approach in biomoxutoring
 is that contaminant effects occur at the lower levels of biological organiza-
 tion (Le., at the genetic, cell, and tissue level) before more severe disturb-
 ances are manifested at the  population or ecosystem level (Adams et al
 1990). Biomarkers may provide a valuable complement to ecological met-
 rics if they are, pollutant specific and if the time and financial costs can be
 reduced. Unusual behaviors regarding.motion, reproduction, or eating
 habits are often an indication of physiological or biochemical stress. Often
 behavior measures are difficult to assess in the field.
    A metric of individual condition is used for fish in the IBI as "percent
 diseased individuals"  (Table  6-2). The potential for development of
biomarkers in biological monitoring exists. McCarthy (1990) briefly dis-
 cussed several studies that have shown biomarker responses to correlate
with predicted levels of contamination and site rankings based on commu-
nity level measures of ecosystem integrity.
    Assemblage processes can be divided into several categories as poten-
tial metrics. Trophic dynamics  encompasses functional feeding groups,
and relates to the energy source for the system., the identity of the herbi-
vores and carnivores, the presence of .detritivores in the system, and the
relative representation of the functional  groups. Inferences on biological
condition can often be drawn from a knowledge: of the capacity of the sys-
tem to  support the survival and propagation of the top carnivore. This at-
tribute can be a surrogate measure for predation rate. Without relatively
stable food dynamics, populations of the top carnivore reflect stressed con-
ditions. Likewise, if production of a site is considered high based on or-
ganism abundance  or biomass, and high  production is natural  for the

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                            'habitat type under study (as per reference conditions), biological condition
                            would be considered good.
                                Process metrics have been developed for a number of different assem-
                            blages. For example, Table 6-2 indicates at least seven IBI metrics dealing
                            with trophic status or feeding behavior in fish, focusing on insectivores,
                            omnivores, or herbivores. Also, number or density of individuate of fish in
                            a sample (or an estimate of standing crop) may be considered a measure of
                            production and, thus, in the process class of metrics. Additional informa-
                            tion is gained from density measures when considered relative to size or
                            age distribution. Three RBP metrics for benthic macroinvertebrates focus
                            on functional feeding groups (Table 6-3; Harbour 
-------
                                                     Muitimetric Approaches f.or Biocriteria Development
that a single index value is used to determine whether action is heeded.
The exact nature of the action needed (e.g., restoration, mitigation, pollu-
tion enforcement) is not determined by the index value, but by analysis of
the component metrics.
    The stream invertebrate index for Florida was developed by aggregat-
ing  the metrics that  proved responsive to  independent (but imprecise)
measures of impacts. The approach was to develop expectations for the
values of each of the metrics from the reference data set, and to score met-
rics according to whether they are within the range of reference expecta-
tions. Metric values were normalized into unitless scores. Metrics have
different numerical scales (e.g., percent Diptera; Shannon-Wiener Index)
and  must be normalized as unitless values  to be  aggregated. Metrics
within the range received a high score; those outside received a low score.
The  index value was then the same as the metric scores. The index was
further normalized to reference condition, such that the distribution  of
index values in the reference sites formed the expectations for the region.
   Ohio EPA (1987) establishes tables based on some predetermined per-
centiles as discussed above. They recognize three categories of metric scor-
ing ranges for  fish assemblage date collected at nonwadable sites  (boat
sites) (Table 6-4). Ohio EPA (1987)  compared individual metric values from
sites constituting the reference database to Table 6-4 or similar tables to de-
velop total site scores (aggregated values from 12 normalized metrics) for
Table 6-4.—Index of Biotic integrity metrics and scoring criteria based on fish
community date from more than 300 reference sites throughout Ohio applicable
only to host (!•••. nonwadable) sites. Tablo modified from Ohio EPA (1987). For
further Information on metrics see Ohio EPA (1987).

IBI Metric ,
Total no. species
% round-bodied suckers
No. sunfish species
No. sucker species
No. intolerant species
% tolerant species
% omnivores
% insectivores
% top carnivores .
% simple lithophils*
% DELT anomalies
Fish numbers
SCORING OMSIONS
5
3
1
METRIC VALUE RANGES
> 20
> 38
> 3
>. s
> 3
< 15
< 16
> 54 -
> 10
> 50
< 0.5
<200
10-20
19-38
2-3
3-5
2-3
15-27
16-28
27-54
5-10
25-50
0.5 - 3.0
200 - 450
< 20
< 19
< 3
< 3
< 2
> 27
> 28
< 27
< 5
< 25
> 3.0
>450
 * For sites of a drainage area * 600 miles2: for sites of of an area > 600 miles2, scoring cate-
 gories vary with drainage area

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                             Table 6-5.—Rangts for Indax of Biological Integrity values representing different
                             narrative descriptions of fish assemblage condition In Ohio streams. Site cate-
                             gory descriptions — wading, boat, and headwaters — Indicate the type of site
                             and style of sampling done at those sites. Modified from Ohio EPA (1987).
SITE CATEGORY
Wading
Boat
Headwaters
EXCEPTIONAL
80-60
50-60
50-60
0000
36-48
36-48
40-48
MIR
28-34
26-34
26-38
•OOH
16-26
16-24
16-24
VERY POOR
<18
<18
<18
                                   34
                                   30
                                   22
                                    14
                                        Rrfmra Othv knprirad
                                              9S75A
RMrara OtMT knpatai
      75BCO
_C_ Min-Max
dl 25%-75%
  °   Median value
                              Figure 6-8.—Invertebrate stream Index scores for Florida streams.
                              each of three different types of sites: (1) wadable, nonheadwater streams;
                              (2) nonwadable channels requiring boats for sampling; and (3) headwater
                              streams. These total scores were then used to establish assessment catego-
                              ries (Table 6-5), which are the quantitative basis of biological criteria.
                                 The test of the aggregated index is in the ability to strengthen the dis-
                              crimination between least impaired and impaired conditions beyond that
                              of the individual metrics. This concept is illustrated in Figure 6-8, as it was
                              done for Florida streams. In some state programs, e.g., Maine and North
                              Carolina, the metrics are treated as individual measures and are not aggre-
                              gated to form a composite index. For instance, Maine DEP uses as many as
                              30 biological  metrics  (macroinvertebrates) to  assess  attainment of its
                              aquatic life use classes. A  threshold coefficient has been established for
                              each metric to be used in a linear discriminant model to test for class at-
                              tainment. In North Carolina, macroinvertebrate metrics of Taxonomic
                              Richness, Biotic Index, and EFT Index are the primary metrics of concern
                              in evaluating  attainment  of their bioclassification  criteria for North
                              Carolina's three physiographic provinces.

-------
                                                     Muitimetric Approaches for Biocriteria Development
 Other Developments

 An alternative approach to multimetric indices is multivariate analysis of
 species composition (e.g., Wright et al. 1984; Moss et al. 1987; Furse et al.
 1987). The approach consists of developing a model that predicts the ex-
 pected species composition for sites given their physical and .chemical
 characteristics. Then the observed species composition at a site is com-
 pared to the expected species composition predicted by the model. The
 model characterizes reference conditions, and assessment sites are com-
 pared to model-predicted reference conditions.
    In the first step, of this approach, a classification is developed from spe-
 cies abundance data at reference sites using one or more multivariate
 clustering or ordination techniques (Ludwig  and Reynolds, 1988). Dis-
 criminant analysis is then applied to the class assignments and the corre-
 sponding physical-chemical data to develop the model for predicting class
 membership from subsequent physical-chemical site  data (Wright et al.
 1984). An assessment site is then assigned to a class using the discriminant
 functions, and its observed species composition is compared to the  ex-
 pected species composition (Moss et al. 1987; Furse et al. 1987). An alterna-
 tive to  discriminant analysis is direct  analysis of associations between
 species composition and environmental, variables using methods such as
 canonical  correlation analysis,  canonical correspondence analysis, or
 multidimensional scaling.
    Such multivariate approaches for bioassessment are still under devel-
 opment. A predictive model requires extensive physical-chemical data on
 the reference sites, and there is no assurance  that a discriminant model
 will work well and produce a minimum of misdassifications. The better
 discriminant models using the above approach misdassify in the range of
25 to 34 percent (Moss et al. 1987). Assessment thresholds and standard
procedures are not yet well developed for multivariate assessment, other
 than professional judgment on missing itaxa, similarity indices, or metrics.
Nonetheless, as this approach becomes more refined/it may prove to be a
viable option to multimetric indexing. In fact, Maine is presently vising a
combination of the two with promising results.


Suggested Readings

Harbour, MT. et al. 1992. Evaluation of EPA's rapid bioassessment benthic metrics: met*
   ric redundancy and variability among reference stream sites. J. Environ. Toxicol.
   Chem.ll(4).                                    "
Brooks, R.P. et al. 1991. Selection of biological indicators for integrating assessments of
  . wetland, stream, and riparian habitats. Pages 81-89 in Biological Criteria: Research
   and Regulation. EPA-440/5-91-005. Off. Water, U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency, Wash-
   ington, DC                                                      -
Gray, J.S. 1989. Effects of environmental stress on species rich assemblages. Biolog. J.
   linnean Soc. 37:19-32.
Hayslip, G.A. 1992. EPA Region 10 In-stream Biological Monitoring Handbook for Wad-
   able Streams in the Northwest Draft. EPA-910/9-92-013. Environ. Serv. Div., Reg.
    10, US. Environ. Prot. Agency, Seattle, WA.
Karr, J.R. et al. 1986. Assessing Biological Integrity in Running Waters: A Method and Its
   Rationale. Spec. Publ. 5. Illinois Nat. History Surv., Urbana, IL.
Multivariate
approaches for
bioassessment are
still under
development.

-------
Technical Guidance (or Streams and Small Rivers
                                 Kerans, B.L., and J.R. Karr. In Press. A benthic index of biotic integrity (B-IBI) for rivers
                                     -of the Tennessee Valley. Ecol. Appl. 4.
                                 Kerans, B.L., LR. Karr, and S.A. Ahlstedt 1992. Aquatic invertebrate assemblages: spatial
                                     and temporal differences  among sampling protocols. J. N. Am. Benthol. Soc.ll(4):
                                  .   377-90.
                                 Miller et aL 1988. Regional applications of ah index of biotic integrity for use in water re-
                                     source management Fisheries 13(5):12-20.                      •
                                 Ohio Environmental Protection Agency. 1987. Biological Criteria for the Protection of
                                     Aquatic Life. VoL 1-3. Surface Water Sec., Div. Water Qual. Monitor. Assess., Colum-
                                     bus, OR
                                 Plafidn, J.L. et aL 1989. Rapid Bioassessment Protocols for Use in Streams and Riven:
                                     Benthic Macroinvertebrates and Fish. EPA/444/4-89-001. Off. Water, US. Environ.
                                     Pzot Agency, Washington, DC

-------
                  CHAPTER?.
  Biocriteria Development
       and Implementation
     The first phase in a biocriteria program is the development of 'narra-
     tive biological criteria" (Gibson, 1992). These criteria are essentially
     statements of intent incorporated in state water laws to formally
consider the fate and status of aquatic biological communities. As stated in
that guidance, attributes of sound biological criteria include the following
objectives:

   1. Support the goals of the Clean Water Act to provide for the protec-
     tion and propagation of fish, shellfish, and wildlife, and to restore
     and maintain the chemical, physical, and biological integrity of the
     nation's waters.

   2. Protect the most natural biological community possible by empha-
     sizing the protection of its most sensitive components.

   3. Refer to specific aquatic, marine, and estuarine community charac-
     teristics that must be present for the waterbody to meet a particular
     designated use, for example, natural diverse .systems with their re-
     spective communities or taxa indicated.

   4. Include measures of community characteristics, based on sound sci-
     entific  principles,  that are quantifiable and written to protect
     and/or enhance the designated use.

   5. In no case should impacts degrading existing uses or the biological
     integrity of the waters be authorized.
Establishing Regional Biocriteria

The first decision that a resource agency must make is to determine the set
of sites or class to which a biocriterion applies. Site classification (Chapter
3) permits more refined characterization of the reference condition and
therefore better resolution in detecting impairment. Any characterization
of a reference condition should account for the variability in the biological
data used to establish the biocriteria. Thus, the reference condition can be
characterized by measures of central tendency (mean, median, trimmed
mean) and by variability (standard deviation, quartiles, ranges).
Purpose:
To provide water
resource agencies
with guidance for .
biocriteria
development and
implementation.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                Statewide characterization of reference condition can be expected to
                            exhibit high variance; however, successive intrastate classification will par-
                            tition the variance from within a large class to among several different
                            component classes. The goal of classification is to minimize within-class
                            variability by allocating the variability to among-dass differences. When
                            this goal is achieved, it results in less variation per class and greater reso-
                            lution of the criteria.
                                Classification into aquatic types (regional or specific habitat types) should
                            partition overall variance (to achieve lower variability within each class man
                            among classes). The central tendency of each class may be expected to  differ
                            (otherwise variability would not be reduced within classes as compared to all
                            classes combined). Investigators for Ohio EPA chose to classify by eccregion
                            and by aquatic life use. Thus, for each ecoregion and for each aquatic life use .
                            within that region, they can characterize a central tendency and variability for
                            the reference condition (from their reference sites).
                                The more refined the classification, the  more precisely the reference
                            condition can be defined; however, an agency also needs to decide  when
                            enough  classification is  enough. Classification can be discrete,  as in
                            ecoregions, or continuous, as along a gradient where, for example, ex-
                            pected species richness is a function of stream size.
                                Biocriteria programs can use discrete and continuous classifications si-
                            multaneously; Ohio EPA (1987) has biocriteria that vary by stream size and
                            drainage area within its established ecoregions. The agency's calibration
                            procedures allow investigators to normalize the effects of  stream size so
                            that index scores, such as the IBI, can be compared among all streams of a
                            region. For example, the ratio of fish species richness to stream size is an
                            empirical model that accounts for overall variation  in species, regardless
                            of stream size. In evaluating whether a test site achieves its species rich-
                            ness  potential (a possible biological criterion), one would surely like to
                            take  into account the stream size factor. It would be unfair to expect a
                            small stream (with a limited capacity to support a species-rich fish  biota)
                            to  achieve a high species richness (relative to all streams). By the same
                            token, it would not be good stewardship to allow a large stream (with ex-
                            pected high species richness) to  meet attainment merely because its size
                            achieves the statewide criterion.

                             Designing the Actual  Criterion

                            Having selected its classification scheme, reference  sites, and metrics, the
                             agency now has the basic material needed  to design the actual criterion.
                             What statistic should be used? A variety of choices are available for meas-
                             uring central tendency  and variability. Two general approaches have
                             evolved, however, for the selection of a quantitative regional biocriterion:
                            -the first uses an aggregate or index of metric values, each of which has
                             been assigned a percentile along the distribution of represented minimally
                             impaired sites (Ohio and Florida); the second, a multivariate analysis of
                             metrics or other basic biological data to develop expected thresholds or at-
                             tainment (Maine).
                                The percentile that is established for each metric in the first approach
                             is  a threshold from which quartiles can be determined for  a score ranking
                             system  (see chapfer 6). The aggregation of these scores for the reference
                             condition functions as the basis for biocriteria.

-------
                                                          BiocriteriaDevelopment and Implementation
    An example of the second approach is the hierarchical decision-mak-
ing technique used by Maine. It begins with statistical models (linear dis-
criminant analysis) to make an initial prediction of the classification of an
unknown sample by comparing it to characteristics of each class identified
in the baseline database (Davies et al. 1991). The output from analysis by
the primary statistical model is a list of probabilities of membership for
each of four classes (A, 8, C, and nonattainment of Class Q. Subsequent
models are designed  to distinguish between a given class and any higher
classes as one group,  and any lower classes as a second group (Fig. 7-1).
   .An important consideration is how  conservative or protective the
agency wants to be. The more conservative the resource agency, the more
likely it is that the criterion will be seit at the upper end of the condition
spectrum. The more  liberal  the agency is in assessing impairment and
maintaining the aquatic life use, the more liberal the criterion will be. Ex-
amining the variance structure in a manner similar to that described ear-
lier helps validate the extent to which particular biocriteria apply. If there
is little biotic variation evident among the initial regions, or if their differ-
ences can be associated with management practices that can be altered, it
seems wise to combine those regions to adhere to the same biocriteria.
    In the absence of a strong case for subregional biocriteria, it is probably
better to overprotect  than to underprotect by setting high biocriteria over
broad regions. Procedures could then be developed that allow for both re-
gional and subregional deviations from  the broadly established biocriteria
if, and only if, the deviation is justified by natural anomalies.
    In  these instances, some site-specific rules of  exception to regional
biocriteria are necessary to accommodate such natural limitations. For exam-
ple, certain natural channel configurations, such as those flowing through
bedrock or those that have natural barriers to dispersal, do not offer the habi-
tat diversity of other channel configurations. They cannot, therefore, support
the richness and diversity of other nearby channel types. Other natural re-
FIRST STAGE MODEL-
SECOND STAGE MODELS-
 C or Better Key
 B or Better Key
 Class A Kev
VS
VS
                                         VS
 Figure 7-1.—Hierarchy of statistical modem used in Maine's biological criteria pro-
 gram (taken from Davies et al. 1993).
                                The objective in
                                setting biocriteria is to
                                improve the quality of
                                our water resources.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 In significantly
 impaired areas, the
 lowest potentially
 acceptable criterion is
 the "best, most
 natural condition
 remaining in the
 region."
strictions to achievement .can also be identified, but care must be taken
that culturally degraded conditions are not included as evidence for re-
gional biocriteria modification.                          .


Biocriteria for Significantly Impacted Areas

A key element in setting biological criteria is to avoid establishing unduly low
thresholds. The objective is to improve the quality of our water resources;
therefore, criteria must not be predicated on accepting the existing degraded
conditions as a matter of course. In significantly impaired areas, the lowest
potentially acceptable criterion is the "best, most natural condition remaining
in the region* as defined by a review of the classification data.  The upper
range for such criteria should be the best condition that is physically and eco-
nomically achievable by restoration management activities.
   This determination is best made by an objective and balanced panel of
experts representing academia, industry, and local, state, and federal water
resources specialists using information gleaned from current and historical
data. The actual selection, that is, the exact point within this range that will
becomethe criterion, should also be chosen by this panel. This  criterion is
expected to move upward periodically as management efforts improve the
resource condition. A review process should be keyed to the periodic cali-
brations of regional reference conditions conducted by the states.
   The availability of reference sites in significantly impaired regions may
be nonexistent In these areas, an ecological model based on (1) neighbor-
ing site classes; (2) expert consensus, and (3) composite of "best* ecologi-
cal information, may be used (Fig. 3-1). The resultant biocriteria may be an
interim or hypothetical expectation that will improve with restoration and
mitigation.

Selecting the Assessment Site

Assessment sites should be established to evaluate the effects of human ac-
tivities on water resources. Potential assessment sites can be identified
from land use and topographic maps; specific information can be pro-
vided by state and county personnel familiar with the areas. Such sites are
generally selected to reflect the influence of known or suspected point and
nonpoint source pollution loadings. Final selection should be made only
after field reconnaissance by qualified staff at the site verifies that the doc-
umented conditions are accurate.
    For discrimination of sources and causes of impairment, an agency
may need to establish an "impaired" sites database with similar impair-
ments to compare with information at aquatic community test  sites. These
comparisons can be made  using biological  response signatures (Yoder,
1991). A biological response signature is a unique combination of biological
attributes that identify individual impact types or the cumulative impacts
of several related human influences. For best results, this process requires
the development of an extensive database.

• National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)  Permit
Requests or Renewals. Public or private wastewater treatment plant admin-
istrators and industrial  dischargers must apply for NPDES permits. If the

-------
                                                          Bipcriteria Development and Implementation
 number of test Sites prohibits annual or more frequent monitoring sur-
 veys, a percentage can be surveyed on a rotational basis each year. Priori-
 ties can be assigned to permits requiring the  earliest renewal or permit
 award and those in the same geographical area or watershed Other per-
 mitting programs include hazardous waste site regulation, Clean Water
 Act, section 404/401, dredge and fill certification programs, and construc-
 : tion sites.                      •             •

 • Locations of Concentrated Commercial or  Industrial Discharges. In
 addition to specified permit  locations, states may find it appropriate to es-
 tablish nonspecific monitoring stations along the stream system. These sta- -
 tions can be particularly helpful if located between dusters of commercial,
 industrial, or municipal operations to help distinguish among potential
 sources and between groups of users. In addition, the use of nonspecific
 monitoring stations  will help to distinguish discharge effects from pre-
 existing upstream impacts, a distinction particularly helpful given the typ-
 ical sequential placement of textile  or lumber mill operations along small
 river courses.               ,

 • Agricultural Concentrations. Areas of intensive and extensive farming
 activities are appropriate for the placement of test sites because they can
 help isolate potential nonpoint source loadings or impairments. Such areas
 of interest include croplands, rangelands, dearcuts, feedlots, animal hold-
 ing facilities, manure holding systems, convergent field drainings, contig-
 uous farms, and fertilizer, feed, and pesticide  storage facilities. County"
 agricultural extension agents can help determine site placements. They can
 also identify high risk localities and farms engaged in cooperative conser-
 vation programs and suggest appropriate remedial land use practices and
 programs if and when problems are identified.

 • Urban Centers. The locations of shopping centers, commercial districts,
 and residential areas that include stormwater runoff  concentrations are a
 source of impact to watersheds. Also of interest are urban developments in
 riparian zones (areas bordering waterbodies), whether or not they contain
 wastewater treatment plants, On-site wastewater disposal is common in
 older communities on small lots concentrated near the waterway. The po-
 tential septic system problem in these communities can be compounded
 by an overburdened stormwater drainage network.

 • Transportation Services.  Vehicle and other  traffic modes also affect
 water resources: major highway interchanges near a watercourse; streams
 paralleled by extensive, heavily traveled roads or railroads; heavily trav-
 eled bridge or overpass systems; pipelines; and maintenance facilities in-
 duding stockpiles of deicing salt located near a stream system.  Airports
 and railroad or truck marshaling yards may also generate surface runoff
 problems for nearby stream systems.

• Mining and Logging Activities.  Any area affected by cumulative and
sequential mining activities and effects including road construction, drill-
ing wells, logging prior to mineral extraction,  and  add mine drainage
should be evaluated for test  site placement. The basis for such decisions
will be state mining permit records and associated maps because the areas
of potential impact, especially from subsurface mining and abandoned
mines, may not be self-evident.
For discrimination of
sources and causes
of impairment, an
agency may need to
establish an
"impaired" sites
database with similar
impairments to
compare with
information at aquatic
community test sites.

-------
.Assessment s/tes are
po/nte or reaches on
a stream at which
disturbance is
suspected or from
which information
about the location's  ••
relative quality is
desired.
• Forest Management Activities. Any areas affected by logging and saw-
mill activities should be evaluated for test site placement. Instability cre-
ated by road construction in timber areas is especially damaging to water
resources. Effective forestry best management practices (BMPs) will be im-
portant influences in these areas. Protection of these  areas is critical be-
cause many of the representative reference sites will be located in forested
lands. Federal and state foresters need to interact with state water  quality
agencies for identification of sensitive areas.
                                               •.        •'        i
• Disruptive Land Use Activities. This category will  include a variety of
planned or existing construction projects: landfills; channelization or other
in-stream projects such as dams and flood control structures, fish hatcher-
ies, or  aquaculture. Any of these activities on a significant scale or near
streams should be monitored and evaluated. If advance notice of these ac-
tivities is provided, states should establish both spatial and temporal mon-
itoring before, during, and after the activities for biological assessments.

• Land Use Activities in Unsurveyed or Remote Areas. This category in-
cludes  regions not previously surveyed for which no preexisting informa-
tion would be available in the event of a spill or  major hydrological
calamity and remote sites for which development is planned in the near or
distant future. Long-term antecedent biological  information should be a
component in new development planning.


Evaluating the Site Assessment

Statistically evaluating the test site(s) against the reference condition to as-
sess the extent and degree of impairment is the focus of another document
(Reckhow, in review); however, the basic question is  this: What evidence
do we  have that indicates impairment (or absence of  impairment)? If the
assessment is based on a reference condition determined from a composite
of sites, the manager's confidence in the judgment  is  improved over that
from use of a single reference site — notwithstanding that some  level of
precision may be lost (see Chapter 3).
    The simultaneous comparison of an assessment site  to a site-specific
reference condition is an alternative that is generally undertaken as an up-
stream/downstream or paired watershed approach. Presumably the site-
specific reference condition represents the best attainable condition of the
assessment site(s). In this approach, the percent-of-reference may be the
most appropriate criterion from  which to assess impairment. States that
have limited resources may wish to implement this approach as an interim
until a larger database is developed. The assessment of sites follows the
same guidelines whether reference data are site-specific or regional (Table
7-1).                                       .
    Assessment sites are points or reaches on a stream at which  disturb-
ance is suspected or from which information about the location's relative
quality is desired. In selecting assessment sites, the  latitude of selection
compared to the choice of reference sites may be considerably reduced. If
the area is suspect, it must be investigated regardless  of its stream charac-
teristics or channel configuration. Thus, regionalized reference conditions,
while  necessary for criteria development, may not  always be sufficient to
serve as a foundation for expecting a specific biological condition. The in-

-------
                                                                    ueveiCpmeni ana
      7-t.—Sequential process for assessment of tMt *!te» and determination of
 the relationship to established blocrlteria. Refer to Chapter 6 for an explanation
 of blocrlteria establishment
ASSESSMENT PROCESS
Stspl.
Step 2.
Step3.
Step 4.
StapS.
Stop 6.
Determine Claw
• same classification schema as for reference sites
Survey Assessment Sites
• biota and physical habitat
Calculate Metrics
• convert raw data to metric values
Aggregate Metrics to Form indices
• use scoring rules establshed for metrics .. " \.
• sum normalized metric values •
Compara to Reference (Btocritaria)
• use established regional btocritaria for assessment
Statement of Condition
• characterize existence and extent of impairment
• diagnostics as to stressors
 vestigator feeing a potentially contentious situation may find it prudent to
 augment the regional reference data with results of locally matched refer-
 ence sites, such as upstream sites or sites in similar, nearby streams.
    The assessment process is essentially a replication of the procedure de-
 scribed earlier to develop multiple metrics (see Chapter 6 and Fig. 6-2).
 Note, however, that the move from the development of metrics and indices
, to their use in the assessment process leads directly to the development and
 implementation of biocriteria. The assessment process,  summarized in
 Table 7-1 and illustrated in Figure 7-2, is described as follows:

    Step 1 — Classification of Assessment Sites. Sites selected for assess-
    ment are assigned to the appropriate classification derived from the
    initial reference classification scheme. The assessment site is classified
    according to the stream class designations, not the nature of a sus-
    pected land use or point-source discharge impact. In other words, sim-
    ilar receiving waters should be in (the same classification whether or
    not there are similar discharges to those waters.

    Step 2 — Biosurvey. Stream or small river biological communities and
    habitat characteristics should be measured using the same techniques
    and equipment as the designated reference site(s). It will also be neces-
    sary to gather data during the same time frame. This schedule may not
    coincide with a predetermined indexing period. For example, if a con-
    struction site is scheduled to be opened on a particular date or if a crit-
    ical period of operation is approaching, both the  test and reference
    site(s) will have to be surveyed accordingly.

    Step 3 — Calculate Metrics. Many of  the intermediate steps used in
    the criteria development process become unnecessary at this point. In-
    vestigators can simply enter the appropriate raw data from the refer-
    ence and test sites into a preselected format to generate current metrics.
    In all cases, the integrity of the raw data should be  presumed for sup-
    port and as additional information for more  definitive assessment.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                  1H3c«tor»
 Final selections of
 reference and
 assessment sites
 should be made only
 after field
 reconnaissance by  "
 qualified staff at the
 site verifies that the
 documented
 conditions are
 accurate.
Geographic region
and tirMm type
                             Figure 7-2.—Tht process for proceeding from measurements of fish assemblage to
                             Indicators such as tha Indsx of Blotlc Integrity (IBI) or Indax of Well Being (IWB) — as
                             used to develop criteria and apply those criteria to streams (modified from Paulsen et
                             al. 1991).
                                 Step 4 — Calculate Indices. Where indicated, these metrics are simi-
                                 larly summarized in indices of relative biological condition and habitat
                                 description. Some states do not use indices but evaluate the informa-
                                 tion from the individual metrics as independent measures of biological
                                 condition.

                                 Step 5 — Compare to Appropriate Biological Criteria. The biological
                                 data from the site under assessment are compared to the established
                                 criteria to ascertain the status. Both the indices (aggregation of metrics)
                                 and the individual metrics are evaluated as part of the assessment. All
                                 available information must be used to confirm the status of the biologi-
                                 cal condition find to diagnose the cause and effect relationship if im-
                                 pairment is detected.

-------
    Step 6 — Statement of Condition. At this point, the assessment sites
    are evaluated to determine whether they do or do not meet the criteria.
    .The sites can also be placed in priority order using the details of this
    evaluation to support management plans and resource allocations.
    Further refinement of the data collected and  additional investigations
    can help determine cause and effect relationships among the stresses
    identified by this process. Such information will be essential to sue*
    cessful remedial management

 Overview of Selected State Bioeriteria Programs
                      . i   .       .                -      .
 • Maine. In 1986, the State of Maine enacted legislation that mandated an
 objective "to restore,and maintain the chemical, physical, and biological
 integrity" of Maine waters. In addition, a legislative water quality classifi-
 cation system was established to manage and protect the quality of Maine
 waters. The classification system established minimum standards for des-
 ignated uses of water and related characteristics of those uses (Table 7-2).
 Within each use-attainability class, the minimum condition of aquatic  life
 necessary to attain that class is described.
    The descriptions or narrative standards in this  legislation range from
 statements such as "Change in community composition may occur" (Class
 Q to "Aquatic life as naturally occurs" (Class A and AA). The designated
 use classes were recombined into four biologically discernible classes
 (Table 7-2): Classes A and AA were combined, and a fourth class, non-
 attainment of Class C, was added.
    The Maine Department of Environmental Protection  has assessed a
 large, standardized macroinvertebrate community database from samples
 taken above and below all major point-source discharges,  as well as sam-
 ples from relatively undisturbed areas. Maine used  this database as a call-.
bration dataset to develop discriminant functions for classifying sites
 among the four analytical classes.
    The calibration data set consisted of the general level of abundances
 from 145 rock basket samples collected from first to seventh order streams
 throughout Maine, and covering a wide range of  relatively uniinpacted
and impacted streams. General  abundances were reduced  to approxi-
mately 30 quantitative metrics.
    The calibration data set was given to five stream biologists to assign
the 145 sites to the four classes (A, B, C, and NA) using professional judg-
ment. The biologists  used only the  biological  data; they did not  see
locations, names, habitat, or site chemistry. Disagreements  on class assign-
ments were resolved in conference.
    The resultant metrics and class assignments were then used to develop
linear discriminant models to predict class membership of unknown  as-
sessment sites. Two stages of discriminant  models were developed from
 the calibration data set: the first stage estimates the probability  that a site
belongs to one of the four classes (A, 8, C,  or NA); the  second  stage esti-
 mates two-way probabilities that a site belongs to higher or lower classes
 (i.e., A, B, C. vs. NA; A, B, vs. C, NA; and A vs. B, C, NA). Each model uses
 different metrics.
    In operational assessment, sites are evaluated with the two-step hierar-
 chical models. The first stage linear discriminant  model is applied to esti-

-------
BIOLOGICAL
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                Tablt 7-2.—Maine's water quality classification system for rivers and streams,
                                with associated biological standards (taken from Davlcs et al. 1993).
                                  AQUATIC LIFE
                                   USE CLASS
MANAGEMENT
                        BIOLOGICAL
                        STANDARD
DISCRIMINANT
   CLASS
                                              High quality water for
                                              recreation and ecological
                                              interests. No dischargee or
                                              impoundments permitted.

                                              High quality water with limited
                                              hummn interference.
                                              Discharges restricted to
                                              noncontact process water or
                                              highly treated wastewater
                                              equal to or better than the
                                              receiving water.
                                              Impoundments allowed.	
                  Habitat natural and free
                  flowing. Aquatic life as
                  naturally occurs.
                  Habitat natural. Aquatic
                  Hfe as naturally occurs.
A and AA are
indistinguishable
because biota
are "as
naturally.
occurs.*
                                              Good quality water. Discharge
                                              of well treated effluent with
                                              ample dilution permitted.
                   HcMtat unimpaired.
                   Ambient water qua&ty
                   {sufficient to support Hfe
                   stages of al Indigenous
                   aquatic spedes. Only
                   nondetrimental changes
                   in community
                   composition allowed.
                                                                                             B
                                               Lowest water qualty.
                                               Maintains the interim goals of
                                               the Federal Water Quality Act
                                               (flshabto/swimmable).
                                               Discharge of well-treated
                                               effluent permitted.
                   Ambient water quality
                   sufficient to support life
                   stages of all indigenous
                   fish species. Change in
                   community composition
                   may occur but structure
                   and function of the
                   community must be
                   maintained.	
                                      MA
                                        Not attaining
                                        Class C
                                mate the probability of membership of sites into one of four classes (A, B,
                                C, or NA). Second, the series of two-way models are applied to distinguish
                                the membership between a given class and any higher classes, as one
                                group (Fig. 7-1). The resultant probabilities allow assignment of monitored
                                test sites to one of the four classes, with expression of uncertainty for sites
                                that may be intermediate. The classification can be the basis for manage-
                                ment action if a site has gone down in class, or  for reclassification to a
                                higher class if the site has improved.
                                    The Maine biocriteria are an example of establishing a direct relation-
                                ship between management objectives (the three aquatic life use classes and
                                nonattainment) with biological measurements. The relationship is immedi-
                                ately viable for management and enforcement as long as the aquatic life use
                                classes remain the same. If the classes are redefined, a  complete reassign-
                                ment of streams and a review of the calibration procedure will be necessary.

                                • North Carolina. .The North  Carolina Department of Environment,
                                Health and Natural  Resources, Division of Environmental Management,
                                Water Quality Section has written Standard Operating Procedures for the
                                collection of biological data and  the bioclassification of each station sam-

-------
pied. Biological criteria have been included in the North Carolina water
quality standards as written narratives. Narrative standards have been in
place since 1983. They support the use of biological assessments in point
and nonpoint source evaluation, and help identify and protect the best
uses of North Carolina waters. High Quality Waters, Outstanding Re-
source Waters and Nutrient Sensitive Waters are assessed using biocriteria.
    Phytoplankton, aquatic macfophytes, benthk macroinvertebrates, and
fish are routinely collected as part of North Carolina's biosurvey effort
Only the macroinvertebrate biosurvey data and the associated bioclass-
ification system are summarized here.                         -
    Macroinvertebrates are sampled qualitatively by one of two methods:
a Standard Qualitative Method or the Ephemeroptera, Plecoptera, and
Trichoptera (EPT) Survey Method. When following the Standard Qualita-
tive Method, two kick net samples from cobble substrate, three dip-net
samples (sweeps) from vegetation and shore zones, one leaf pack sample,
two fine-mesh rock and/or log wash samples, one fine-mesh sand sample,
and visual inspection samples are taken.
    The EPT survey  method  focuses  on qualitative  collection  of
Ephemeroptera, Plecoptera/ and Trichoptera, by collecting one kick sam-
ple, one sweep sample, one leaf-pack sample and visual collections. With
both methods, invertebrates are sorted in the field using forceps and white
plastic trays, and preserved in glass vials containing 5 percent ethanol. Or-
ganisms are sorted in approximate proportion to their relative abundance.
    Currently, site-specific reference conditions  are typically  used when
conducting surveys. However,  where site-specific reference sites are not
available, ecoregional reference conditions are used to define unimpaired
conditions. North Carolina is developing ecoregional reference conditions
based on the available land use information. The  three major ecoregions
identified in North Carolina are Mountain, Piedmont, and Coastal Plain.
    Specific macroinvertebrate metrics, including taxonomic richness, biotic
indices, an Indicator Assemblage Index (IAI), diversity indices (Shannon's
Index), and the Index of Community Integrity (K3) are used to rate sites as
poor, fair, good/fair, good, and excellent. The ratings are conducted in addi-
tion to the narrative descriptions for biocriteria. These metrics are used as
independent measures, and are not aggregated into an overall index.
    Biodassification criteria for the Mountain, Piedmont, and Coastal Plain
ecoregions in North Carolina have bam developed for EPT taxa richness
values. This community metric has been developed using both the Standard
Qualitative Method and the EFT Survey Method. The biodassification rat-
ings for the number of EFT taxa in each ecoregjon for both the Standard
Qualitative Method and the EPT method are summarized in Table 7-3. Note
that the rating system has been developed solely on summer (June-Septem-
ber) collections. Samples collected in other seasons, therefore, must be sea-
sonally corrected before a biodassification can be assigned.         .  •
    The North Carolina dassification system was developed for chemical
impact assessment and does not address sedimentation or other habitat al-
teration effects. A special biodassification rating has also been developed
for small, high quality mountain streams  which  naturally exhibit a re-
duced macroinvertebrate taxa number. Streams possessing these particular
characteristics, having EPT taxa of % 29  (Standard  Qualitative Method) or
% 26 (EPT Survey Method) are considered excellent.

-------
I S,CLCGiCAL CfHTEfiiA.
 Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                              Ttblt 7-3.—Bioclassiflcatlon criteria scores for ERT taxa richness values for
                              three North Carolina ecoreglons based on two sampling methods.

                                                             STANDARD QUAUTA11VE METHOD
                                SroCLASSIFICATION
                                                    MOUNTAIN
                                                                     PIEDMONT
                                                                                    COASTAL PUUN
                               Excalertt
                                                                                        >27
                               Good
  32*41
                                                                       24-31
                                                                                        21-27
                               Pair
  12-21
                                                                        8-15
                                                                                         7-13
                               Poor
  0-11
                                                                        0-7
                                                                                         0-8
                                                                •PT QUALITATIVE METHOD
                                WOCLASSOTCATiON
MOUNTAM
                                                                     PIEDMONT
                                                                                    COASTALMJUN
                               Excelatt
  >3S
                                                                        »27
                                    >23
                               Good
 28-35
21-27
                                                                                        18-23
                               Good-Fair
  19-27
                                                                       14-20
                                    12-17
                               Fair
  11-18
                                                                        7-13
                                     8-11
                               Poor
  0-10
                                                                        0-6
                              • Ohio.. Ohio's biological criteria program was developed for complete
                              integration with  state water quality standard  regulations.  As  such,
                              biocriteria in Ohio are fully integrated with typical water quality meas-
                              ures, and address three key strategic goals:
                                  • The protection of aquatic life in all Ohio waterways capable of support-
                                   ing aquatic life is an immediate goal of the Ohio EPA to be accomplished,
                                   wherever possible, through a "systems'  (biological  community re-
                                   sponse) approach.
                                  • Short-term and long range goals must be established for the control of
                                   toxic substances in Ohio's surface waters.

                                  • The protection of human health through the assurance of a *safe" level of
                                   exposure to toxic substances in water and fish is an immediate goal of the
                                   OhioEPA.
                                  To accomplish these goals, the Ohio EPA program combines biocrite-
                              ria, effluent toxirity, and water chemistry. This integrated approach has
                              significantly increased Ohio EPA's ability to detect degradation, particu-
                              larly in streams receiving point and nonpoint sources and both toxic and
                              conventional pollutants.
                                  The Ohio EPA has employed the concept of tiered aquatic life uses in
                              the Ohio Water Quality Standards (WQS) since 1978. Aquatic life uses in
                              Ohio include the  Warmwater Habitat (WWH), Exceptional Warmwater
                              Habitat (EWH), Cold-water Habitat (CWH), Seasonal Salmonid Habitat
                               (SSH), Modified Warmwater Habitat (three subcategories: channel-modi-
                              fied, MWH-C; affected by mines, MWH-A; and impounded,  MWH-I),
                              Limited Resource Water (LRW) (Ohio  EPA 1992). Each of these use desig-
                              nations are defined in the Ohio WQS (OAC 3745-1).
                                   Water quality standards constitute the numerical and narrative criteria
                               that, when achieved, will presumably protect a given  designated use

-------
                                                          Biocriteria Development and Implementation
 (.Ohio EPA  1992). Chemical-specific criteria serve as the "targets" for
 wasteload allocations conducted under the TMDL (Total Maximum Daily
 Load) process, which is used to determine water quality-based effluent
 limits for point source discharges and, theoretically, load allocations for
 nonpoint sources (in connection with best management practices (BMPs).
 Whole effluent toxicity limits consist of  acute  and chronic  endpoints
 (based on laboratory toxicity tests) and a dilution method similar to that
 used to calculate chemical-specific limits, the biological criteria are used
 to directly determine aquatic life  use attainment status for the EWH,
 WWH, and MWH use designations as is stated  under the definition of
 each in the Ohio WQS.
    The biological criteria designed for Ohio's rivers and streams incorpo-
 rate the  ecoregional reference approach. Within  each of the State's five
•ecoregions, criteria for three biological indices have been derived. The in-
 dices include two measures of fish community structure and one measure,
 of the benthic macroinvertebrate community. The combined indices pro-
 vide a quantitative measure which can be compared to the regional refer-
 ence indices to assess use attainment.
    The two fish community measures include the Index of Biotic Integrity
 (IBI) and the modified Index of Welt Being (IWB). Both indices incorporate
 structural attributes of the fish community, while the IBI additionally in-
 corporates functional (trophic) characteristics. The two indices incorporate
 a much broader range of fish communities attributes than only species
 richness and relative abundance. For macroinvertebrate community meas-
 urements, Ohio EPA uses the Invertebrate Community Index (ICI). The Id
 is a  modification of the IBI concept, but has been adapted for use with
 macroinvertebrates. Like the IBI, ICI values incorporate functional aspects
 of the community.                          •
   Derivation of the above indices require extensive sampling to provide
 the quantitative data necessary for analysis. The IBI and IWB require sam-
 pling of approximately 500  meters of a river or stream by electroshocking
 to characterize the community of fish. Data recording is extensive, and
 includes  fish  species, number of individuals per  species, and various
 observations of fish condition. The ICI requires that quantitative  (Hester-
 Dendy) and qualitative macroinvertebrate  samples be collected. Labora-
 tory analysis of these samples includes taxon determination to genus or
 species, and quantification of the organisms collected.
   The Exceptional Warmwater Habitat (EWH) is the most protective use
assigned to warmwater streams in Ohio. Ohio's biological criteria for
 EWH applies uniformly statewide and is set at the 75th percentile index
 values of all reference sites  combined. The Warmwater Habitat (WWH) is
 the most widely applied use designation assigned to warmwater streams
 in Ohio. The biological criteria for fish vary by ecoregion and site type and
 are set at the 25th percentile index values of the applicable reference.sites
 in each ecoregion (Fig. 7-3). A modified procedure was used in the exten-
 sively modified HELP ecoregion.
    The Modified Warmwater Habitat (MWH), first adopted in 1990, is as-
 signed to streams that have  had extensive and irretrievable physical habitat
 modifications. The MWH use does not meet the Clean Water Act goals and
 therefore requires a Use Attainability Analysis. There are three subcategor-
 ies: MWH-A, non-acidic mine runoff affected habitats; MWH-C, channel
 modified habitats; and MWH-I, extensively impounded habitats. Biologi-

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                          Fish—Boat Sites

                                              3I/Iwb)
Fish —Wading Sites

      Sl/Iwb)
                                                           EWH
                                                          EWH
                                                                                       EWH
                                                                                        EWH
                                 j Km* fcte Lfkt rUta • HBJP

                                          -IT
                             Flgur* 7-3a.—BlologtettI criteria In th« Ohio WQS for tn« Warmwatar Habitat (WWH)
                             and Exceptional Warmwatar Habitat (EWH) uaa daalgnationa arranged by biological
                             Indax, alta typa for flan, and ecoregion. Indax valuea In the boxaa on aach map ara
                             tha WWH btoeritarla that vary by aeoraglon aa follow*: IBI/Mlwb for Boat Sltaa (uppar
                             Ian), IBI/Mlwb for Wading Sltaa (uppar right), IBI for Headwater* Sltaa (tower laft), and
                             tha ICI (lower right). Tha EWH critaria for aach Indax and site typa ara located In tha
                             boxaa Juat outalda aach map (Ohio EPA, 1992).
                             cal criteria were derived from a separate set of modified reference sites.
                             The biocriteria were set separately for each of three categories of habitat
                             impact. The MWH-C and MWH-I subcategory biocriteria were also de-
                             rived separately for the HELP ecoregion. The MWH-A applies only within
                             the WAP ecoregion.


                             Costs for State Programs Developing

                             Bioassessments and  Biocriteria

                                Biocriteria programs must begin with the development of a bioassess-
                             ment framework. Expertise in ecological principles and resource invest-
                             ment by the  agency is required  to develop this framework and  to
                             implement biocriteria. State agencies  will vary in their investment of re-
                             sources and effort in this process.
                                Several  states  that  have initiated  their biocriteria programs were
                             polled to obtain estimates of their costs and resource estimates. These cost

-------
                                                         'Biocriteria Development and Implementation
              Fish —Boat Sites
                  IBI/Iwb
                                           —Wading Sites
Rgura 7-3b.-Blologleal crttarla In tha Ohio WOS for tha ModHlad Warmwalar_ Habitat
(MWH) uaa dwJgn«Uon arranged by Wolofllcal lnd«t, «lt. typ. ^^^"SJ^l
tviM. and •cornalon. Indtx valuaa In tha boxaa on aaeh map ara tha MWH bloerltaria
SnTdlSffiTniSlflcrton typ. that v«y by ^ragfon .irfoUowa: mm* tor
Boat SItaa (uppar latt), IBWIIwb for Wading Sltaa (uppar rlghQ, 111 for M««dwatara
1ST. Oow« litt^-nd th. ICI (low« right). Th« MWH erttari. for ^Impound*hMdh
flcatlon typa ia locatad In tha box Juat outolda tha Boat Sltaa map. Tha Wocrltarla for
tha mln««actad modlflcatlon typa la rapraaantad by tha clrclad valua loeatad In tha
WAP aeoraglon on aach map (Ohio EPA, 1992).
estimates represent a range of program elements including assemblage se-
lection (benthic macroinvertebrates and fish) and geographical coverage
(statewide or targeted regions of the state). A summary of the state pro-
grams polled is as follows:

• Delaware. The nontidal streams in Delaware are mostly low-gradient
coastal streams that drain agricultural lands. Delaware  Department of
Natural Resources  and Environmental Control (DNREQ developed a
modification of the EPA's rapid bioassessment protocols to sample benthic
 macroinvertebrate from multihabitats in these coastal nontidal  streams.
 Technical issues addressed in their bioassessment development included
 standardized methods, level of subsampling, taxonomic level (family or
 genus), and the selection of appropriate metrics. The state samples durmg
 a specified index period that extends from late summer through the fall

-------
BiCLOGiCAL Zr
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                            season. Biosurveys done by department biologists include survey plan-
                            ning, collection, processing, and data analysis. Consultants are used to as-
                            sist in processing benthic samples for large projects.

                            • Florida. Florida Department of Environmental Protection (DEP; for-
                            merly the Department of Environmental Regulation) used  a combination
                            of in-house biologists, scientists from the EPA's Environmental Research
                            Laboratory in Corvaffis, and consultants to develop a statewide stream
                            bioassessment program based on thorough site regionalization and meth-
                            ods  development  projects.  Florida  DEP  samples  benthic  macro-
                            invertebrates from multiple stream habitats in a modified RBP method,
                            and assesses biological condition using a suite of metrics. Their sampling
                            sites are classified into aggregated subecoregions for determination of ap-
                            propriate reference conditions. Currently, the portions of Florida that are
                            not adequately delineated are south Florida, south of Lake Okeechobee,
                            and northeastern Florida around Jacksonville. Two index periods currently
                            are used to assess biological condition—August through September, and
                            January through February. Florida DEP biologists collect and process all
                            samples. Outside consultants are used to assist in data analysis and devel-
                            oping-taxonomic keys.

                            • Idaho. Both fish and benthic macroinvertebrates are surveyed by Idaho
                            Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ) as part of Idaho's monitoring
                            program. Their biological program is relatively intensive, and is part of a
                            multi-year monitoring effort to assess nonpoint source impacts. Idaho DEQ
                            is now evaluating their current program and refining their biological meth-
                            ods. Consultants are being used to assist in this process. The field sampling
                            and sample analysis are being conducted by Idaho DEQ regional staff.

                            • Maine. Maine Department of  Environmental  Protection (DEP) uses
                            rock-filled baskets as introduced substrate for macroinvertebrate coloniza-
                            tion. Their program is statewide and is based on aquatic life use designa-
                            tions that are  used to establish reference conditions. Numeric biocriteria
                            have recently been promulgated into Maine's rules. Analysis is done using
                            a tiered multivariate procedure that incorporates information from up to
                            35 metrics. Maine's index period is in the summer. Virtually  all of the
                            bioassessment is accomplished by Maine DEP biologists.

                            • Nebraska. Both fish and benthic macroinvertebrates are sampled in Ne-
                            braska by the Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ). A multimetric
                             approach is used for both assemblages, based on the IBI for fish and EPA's
                             RBPs for benthos. Reference condition is determined for each ecoregion in
                             Nebraska. A summer index period is used to sample streams in Nebraska.
                             Nebraska's biological monitoring program was developed and is main-
                             tained by DEQ biologists.

                             • North Carolina. The Department of Environment, Health, and Natural
                             Resources (DEHNR) of North Carolina has had an effective bioassessment
                             program in place for several years. A standardized  macroinvertebrate
                             sampling procedure is established to sample multiple habitats in streams
                             of North Carolina.  Metrics are used to assess biological condition, and

-------
                                                         Biocriteria Development and Implementation
judgment criteria are based on the ecoregioh level of site classification. The'
design and development of the program as well as all aspects of monitor-
ing are conducted by DEHNR biologists.

• Ohio. Ohio EPA has developed both a fish and benthic macroinverte-
brate protocol for conducting bioassessments in Ohio's streams and rivers.
A multimetric approach is used in both protocols, and focuses .on a sum-
mer index period. Their site classification is by ecoregion with a given per-
centage of the sites monitored on an annual basis. Numeric biooriteria
have been implemented into Ohio's water resource program, and is devel-
oped in a hierarchical manner by aquatic life use and ecoregion. Ohio EPA
staff designed and developed the bioassessment program, and conducts
the annual sampling with in-house staff and summer interns.

• Oklahoma. The Oklahoma Conservation Commission (OCQ has devel-
oped a biological assessment program that  includes benthic macro-
invertebrate, fish,  and periphyton sampling to evaluate nonpuini source
effects. However,  the benthic program is central to their bioassessment
program and reflects the cost  of development  of the program. The
bioassessment program is statewide and is loosely based on ecoregions.
The index period is summer, and monitoring during other seasons is de-
pendent on the case study. Consultants were used for technical assistance
in establishing the reference condition.

• Oregon. Oregon Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ) has de-
veloped  a modified RBP  approach  for surveying benthic macro-
invertebrates  and  fish from its  Coast Range streams.  The other five
ecoregions have not been extensively sampled to date. Multiple metrics
are calculated and used to assess biological condition. A single index pe-
riod of fall (September, October, November)  is emphasized. However,
monitoring is done in other seasons that correspond to evaluating specific
impacts, for example, forest insecticide application. The majority of the
biosurvey and assessment is done by DEQ biologists.
   It is apparent  from the states polled that a minimum of two full-time
equivalent staff would be dedicated to the development of an  effective bio-
logical assessment program. The states of Ohio, Maine, North Carolina, and
Florida have invested the equivalent of 12 staff (or more) to develop their
programs (Table 7-4). However, Ohio EPA points out that only 19 percent of
their surface water monitoring program is devoted to biological monitoring
(Yoder and Rankin, 1994). When considered on the basis of agencywide
water programs, Ohio EPA allocates 6 percent to biological monitoring.
   Cost investment will vary depending on the geographical coverage
(number of stream miles), the extent of coverage, biological approach and
targeted assemblages, and the extent of shared resources (other state and
federal agency assistance, and shared reference conditions, etc.). Nebraska
and Ohio have developed their program statewide for fish and benthos,
whereas other states polled emphasized only benthos and some have not
covered the whole state (Table 7-5). Although Delaware and  Florida have
only partial coverage to date, their  programs are relatively complete and
are pertinent  for the majority of their state streams.
    A few of  the states have used contractor support, which ranged from
$10,000 to $350,000. These costs are presented as examples of state bio-
assessment programs that have been developed around the country.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and'Small Rivers
\
Table 7*4.— Tht Inveatmenl
as • framework for blocrite
Value of Biocriteria in Assessing impairment
Water resource agencies currently use several tools in assessing impairment
and monitoring changes in condition. However, these tools can be separated
into three distinct categories: chemical analysis of water samples, toxicity test-
ing of selected species, and biosurveys. These tools are not interchangeable in
all cases, and are most effective when used in conjunction with each other.
However, the use of chemical and toxicity criteria are only useful for assess-
ing adverse impart from cheinical disdiarges. Bic^mveys and bic
-------
                                                                                       CHAPTER 7:
                                                          Biocriteria Development and Implementation-
    Several comparison studies were conducted and documented in the
Technical Support Document for Water Quality-based Toxics Control (U.S.
Environ. Prot. Agency, 1991). These studies used biosurvey results to cali-
brate the judgment of impairment using toxicity testing.
    The Agency conducted eight freshwater site studies in which ambient
toxicity was compared to the receiving water biological impact These site
studies were a part of the Complex Effluent Toxicity Testing Program
(CETTP). Testing was performed on-site concurrent with the field surveys.
Sites exhibiting biological impacts were included from Oklahoma, Ala-
bama, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio/and Connecticut. Organisms were
exposed to samples of water from various stations and tested for toxicity.
Biological surveys (quantitative field sampling of fish; invertebrate, zoo-
plankton, and periphyton communities in the receiving water areas up-
stream  and downstream of the discharge points) were  made  at these
stations at the same time the toxicity was tested to see how well the meas-
ured toxicity correlated to the health of the community. These studies have
been reviewed  and  published in an EPA publication series (Mount et aL
1984; 1985; 1986; 1986a; 1986b; Mount and Norberg-King 1985; 1986;
Norberg-King and Mount 1986). ._
    A robust canonical correlation analysis was performed to determine
whether or not statistically significant relationships existed between the
ambient toxicity tests and in-stream biological response variables  and to
identify which variables played an important role in that relationship
(Dickson et aL  1992). Influential variables were then used to classify sta-
tions as either  impacted or not. Ceriodophniei dubio. productivity and/or
Pimephales promelas  weight were used as the basis for predicting impact
(U.S. Environ.  Prot. Agency, 1991). Fish richness was used to  classify
streams as impact observed or impact not observed.
    In this set of studies, agreement was obtained between the prediction
of in-stream toxicity using ambient toxicity testing and the observed bio-
logical impairment  from the biosurvey results (Fig. 7-4).  However, at 10
percent of the  sampling stations, agreement  was not reached. The EPA
(1991)  has stated that this small difference in results would not  signifi-
cantly affect the diagnosis ofimpairment.
    Another study conducted by the North Carolina Division of Environ-
mental Management indicated the high accuracy of predicting receiving
water impacts from whole effluent toxicity tests. Forty-three comparisons
were made between freshwater flowing streams using the Ceriodaphnia
  86.2%
Instreem toticity predicted.
Impairment observed.

Instreem toxictty ml predicted.
Impairment observed.
                                        p——I  Instream toxicity predicted.
                                        I	-I  Impairment Dal observed.  •
                                        Kiw^j  Instreem tcxicityrjQl predicted.
                                        wMm  Impairment rjfiJ observed.

 Figure 7-4.—Comparison of ambient toxicity and fish richness surveys at eight sites
 in various parts of the United States (taken from U.S. EPA, 1991).

-------
SlQLOGlCAi. CRITERIA.
Techrical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                65.0%
                                                            _____
instraam toxicity predicted.
jnrpairmBrt observed.

Instraam toxicity oat predicted.
Impairment observed.
                                                                    I - 1
                                                                    | - 1
                                                                           Instraam tcodctty rjoj predicted.
                                                                           Impairment ngl observed.
                                                    23.0%
                               Figure 7-8.—Comparison  of  effluent toxicity  of  receiving  water  impact  using
                               CtrtodfphnlM dublt chronic toxicity tests and freshwater receiving stream benthlc In-
                               vertebrates at 43 point source discharging altea In North Carolina (taken from U.S.
                               EPA, 1991).         .
                                             48.1%.
                                                        9.3%
                                                     6.2%
Chemical criteria exceedances.
Biological Impairment observed. •
fife chemical criteria exceedances.
Biological impairment observed.
Chemical criteria exceedances.
]>te biological impairment
tto chemical criteria exceedances.
HQ biological impairment
                                   36.4%
                               Figure 7-6.—Comparison of chemical criteria excaedancoa and blosurvey results at
                               645 stream segments In Ohio.
                               dubia chronic test and a qualitative macroinvertebrate sampling. Overall
                               there was 88 percent accuracy of prediction (Fig. 7-5). However, in 12 per-
                               cent of the cases, agreement was not reached. Both of these studies indi-
                               cate that some risk of error exists if impairment is predicted using toxicity
                               tests alone.       .
                                   Chemical analyses are less accurate in predicting biological impair-
                               ment from chemical exceedances. In a study conducted by Ohio EPA, the
                               prediction of impairment from chemical analvses agreed with the biologi-
                               cal survey results in only 47 percent of the cases (Fig. 7-6). Chemical analy-
                               ses were unable to detect the impairment measured by biocriteria at 50
                               percent of the sites. Ohio EPA (1990) stated that the absence of detected
                               chemical criteria exceedances when biological criteria impairment was in-
                               dicated  may result from several possibilities:  (1) chemical parameters
                               other than those sampled are exceeded, (2) impairments of a nontoxic na-
                               ture exist, (3) impairments due to physical impacts (e.g., habitat modifica-
                               tion, flow alteration)  exist, and/or (4) impairments related to biological
                               interactions (e.g., exotics, disease) exist. None of'these scenarios would be
                               detected or fully understood using chemical criteria assessments alone.
                                    The Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental
                               Control assessed tihe attainment of their aquatic  life use class for nontidal
                               streams in 1994 using both their dissolved oxygen criteria and a biological
                               endpoint. Results  indicated that the use  of the  dissolved oxygen criteria

-------
                                                                                       CHAPTER?:
                                                           Biocriteria Development and Implementation
  was inadequate to detect impairment'to the aquatic life. Documentation of
  exceedances to the dissolved oxygen criteria suggested that only 9 percent
  of Delaware s  nontidal streams  did  not meet  attainment  (Fig. 7-7)
  Whereas the habitat and biological assessment approach indicated that 78
  percent of the nontidal streams were not attaining their designated use.
     These experiences support the observation that biological criteria are
  an excellent assessment tool and one (hat covers environmental variables
  n°t "^anly addressed by other chemical, physical or effluent toxidty
  K^«  ***** not yet advocated as a  method  for setting regulatory
  NPDES permit limits, the biocriteria process is dearly an esslntialmeaS
  of environmental assessment and has in fact been used to review these
  permits and  other management efforts in several  states indudinst Ohio
  Maine, and North Carolina.                                         '
                  Fixed Stations - Dissolved Oxygen
                      (No statistical confidence)
                    Probabilistic - Habitat/Biology
                (95% Confidence Interval+//-5-6%)

Figure 7-7.—Assessment of nontidal stream aquatic life use attainment In Dataware.
(taken from the «tat«'s 305[b] report.1994).    '                  »•••«»»»»..

-------
BIOLOGICAL CrUTeRIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                Suggested Readings

                                Berthouex, RM. and L Hau. 1991. Difficulties related to using extreme percentiles for
                                    water quality regulations. Res. L Water Pollut. Control Fed. 63(6):873-79.
                                Dickson, K.L, W.T. Waller, LH. Kennedy, and L J. Ammann. 1992. Assessing the rela-
                                    tionship between ambient toxidty and instrcam biological response. Environ. Tax-
                                    icoL.Chem. 11:1307-22.
                                Fausch, KD., JJL Karr, and RR. Yant 1984. Regional application of an index of biotic in-
                                    tegrity based on stream fish communities, Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 11339-5$.
                                Gibson, GJL1992. Procedures for Initiating Narrative Biological Criteria. EPA-822-8-92-
                                    002. Off. Sd. TechnoL US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
                                Karr, JJR. et aL 1986. Assessing Biological Integrity in Running Waters: A Method and Its
                                    Rationale. Spec PubL 5. Illinois Nat History Surv., Champaign, E»
                                Mount Di, and T.J. Norberg-King, editors. 1985. Validity of Effluent and Ambient Tox-
                                    idty Tests for Predicting Biological Impact Sdppo  Creek, Ordeville, Ohio.
                                    EPA/600/3-85/044. VS. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
                                	 1986. Validity of Effluent and Ambient Toxidty Tests for Predicting Biological
                                    Impact Kanawha River, Charleston, West Virginia. EPA/600/3-86/006. U.S. Envi-
                                    ron. Prot Agency, Washington, DC.
                                Mount BX, T.J. Norberg-King, and A.E. Steen, editors. 1986. Validity of Effluent and
                                    Ambient  Toxidty  Tests for  Predicting  Biological  Impact  Naugatuck River,
                                    Waterbury, Connecticut EPA/600/8-86/005. U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, Washing-
                                    ton, DC
                                Mount DJL, AJE. Steen, and T.J. Norberg-King, editors. 1986. Validity of Effluent and
                                     Ambient Toxidty Tests for Predicting Biological Impact Back River, Baltimore Har-
                                    bor, Maryland. EPA/600/8-86/001. U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
                                Mount Dl, N. Thomas, M. Barbour, T. Norberg, T. Roush, and R. Brandes. 1984. Efflu-
                                     ent and Ambient Toxidty Testing and Instresun Community Response on the Ot-
                                     tawa River, Lima, Ohio. EPA/600/8-84/080. VS. Environ. Prot Agency, Permits
                                   *, Div. and Off. Res. Dev., Duluth, MN.
                                 Mount, D J. et al., editors. 1985. Validity of Effluent and Ambient Toxidty Tests for Pre-
                                     dicting Biological Impact File Mile Creek, Birmingham, Alabama. EPA/600/8-
                                     85/015. VS. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
                                 Norberg-King, T.J., and DJ. Mount editors. 1986. Validity of Effluent and Ambient Tox-
                                     idty  Tests for Predicting Biological Impact Skeleton Creek, Enid,  Oklahoma.
                                     EPA/600/8-86/002. US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
                                 Paulsen, S.G. et aL 1991. EMAP-Surface Water Monitoring and Assessment Program-
                                     Fiscal Year 1991. Off. Res. Dev, VS. Environ. Prot. Agency, Washington, DC
                                 Reckhow, K. In Press. Biological Criteria: Technical Guidance for Survey Design and Sta-
                                     tistical Evaluation of Biosurvey Data. Oft. Sd. Technol. and Off. Res. Dev., VS. En-
                                    , viron. Prot Agency, Washington, DC.

-------
                    CHAPTERS.

             Applications  of
                   Biocriteria
      Biocriteria, a critical tool for state agend.es to use in protecting the
      quality of water resources,-serve several important purposes: they
      help (1) define the biological potential of aquatic resources, (2) re-
fine aquatic life use categories, and (3) serve as an arbiter of use impair-
ment  (i.e.,  they  help  determine  attainment and  nonattainment).
Additionally, biocriteria are used for (4) identifying possible sources of im-
pairment (e.g., habitat degradation, flow regime changes, chemical con-
tamination, energy alterations, or biological imbalance); (5) compliance
monitoring and problem screening; (6) ranking and establishing priorities
for needed remedial actions; and (7) assessing the results of new manage-
ment practices. Regulatory uses of biocriteria include NPDES permits, the
401/404 program, trend reporting for 305(b) reports, and control of non-
point sources (Dudley, 1991).
Aquatic Resource Characterization

In formulating biocriteria, the protection of indigenous biota is the central
issue. However, establishing biocriteria requires multivariate evaluations.
because biological systems are complex. Wide variability among natural
surface waters across the country results from climatic, landform, and
other geographic differences and prevents the development of directly ap-
plicable, nationwide reference  conditions (U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency,
1990). Within ecoregions, however, reference conditions  for  similar
waterbodies can be defined based on evaluation of samples from mini-
mally impaired sites (Chapter 3).        .                    . .
   Sites used to establish the reference condition should represent the tar-
get assemblages, meet "minimal impairment" criteria, and be spatially bal-
anced, if possible. The evaluation and combination of historical biological
data with the data, collected during bipsurveys is the most useful means
for assessing the status of the aquatic resource and establishing reference
conditions.
•
 Purpose:
 To provide examples
 and discussion of the
 importance of
 biocriteria in water
 resource
 management.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers-
 The classification
 and definition of
 designated uses of
 streams and rivers
 are important in
 planning, developing,
 and using biocriteria.
                             CASE STUDY — North Carolina
                                      STATE
                                                           LOCATION
                                                                                  DATES
                                   North Carolina
                                                   South Fork of New River
                                                 March-AuQuat 1990
The South Fork of New River forms the headwaters of the New River in
North Carolina. The entire South Fork New River catchment is mountain-
ous with generally steep, forested slopes, The floodplain is broad with roll-
ing hills, and land use is primarily rural and agricultural,  including crop
and dairy pasture production. Nonpoint  source runoff from these land
uses has been listed as having a high potential for water quality problems
(NC Dep. Environ. Manage. 1978).
   The North  Carolina Environmental Management  Commission may
classify certain waters of the  state as "outstanding resource waters*
(ORW) if it finds that such waters have an exceptional recreational signifi-
cance and exceptional water quality. Determining whether a North Caro-
lina stream qualifies for redassification  as an ORW depends primarily on
biological data.
   To evaluate an ORW request for the  New Riveiv the Department of En-
vironmental Management collected benthic macxoinvertebrate samples
£tom"2i-riverine and tributary locations within the New River catchment
Main-stem river locations  (the South and  North Forks  of the New River)
were  sampled using the department's standardized qualitative collection
method. This method uses a wide variety  of collection techniques (and 10
samples) to inventory the aquatic fauna. The primary output is a taxa list
with some indication of relative abundance for each taxon (i.e., whether it
is abundant, common, or .rare). The combined number of species in  the
pollution-intolerant insect orders of  Ephemeroptera, Phecoptera,  and
Trichoptera (EFT Index) is used with department criteria  to assign water
                              70

                              •0

                              to

                              40

                              30

                              20

                              10

                               0
                                                           41

                                                           32

                                                           21

                                                           12
QOOd

good-Mr
                                                              poor
                                        12*4
                                             2/IS
                      5/85   MS   i/17   «/W
                        SeottnriM (SJk. Htm Rhw)
                                                                                  7/w
                             00

                             50

                             40

                             X

                             20

                             10

                               0
                                                            41

                                                            32
                                                            21
                                                            12
 good

 good-Mr

 Mr

 poor
                                  ens
                                                                             7/90
                                                                                   7I33T
                                  •Sttwntl adjustment frctor for winter and spring d*»toped for EPT Index alter 1990

                              Rgura 8-1.—EPT Index (number  of taxa  of  Ephemeroptera,  Plecoptera,  and
                              Trichoptera) for two locations on the South Fork of the New River, North Carolina.

-------
                                                                         Applications of Biocriteria
 quality ratings. Unimpaired or minimally impaired streams and rivers
 have many species, whUe polluted areas have fewer species
     Based on analyses of the biological data (Fig. 8-1), excellent water qual-
 ity was found at the ambient monitoring location on the South Fork New
 River near Scottsvffle and Old Field Creek, a tributary of the South Fork
 New River. Prior data have also consistently shown excellent water quality
 at the South Fork New River near Jefferson and for the New River itself,
 below the confluence of the North and South Forks. A site on the North Fork
 New River also had excellent water quality, but sampling at this site re-
 vealed that its samples fluctuate between good and excellent  quality on a
 temporal basis. Until it achieves a more consistent water quality rating, this
 site on the North Fork will not be recommended for an ORW classification.
    Old Field Creek has an outstanding brook trout resource. The South
 Fbrk of the New River has been designated as a Natural and  Scenic River
 from the confluence of Dog Creek in the documented excellent reach of the
 river to its confluence with the New River. The New River — according to
 information provided by local canoeing outfitters — supports an unusu-
 ally high level of water-based recreation. It was, therefore, recommended
 that the South Fork New River from the confluence of Dog Creek to the
 New River, and the New River itself, to the last point at which it crosses
 the North Carolina-Virginia state line, be designated ORW. The west prong
 of Old Field Creek (Call Creek) from its source to Old Field Creek, and Old
 Field Creek below its confluence with the west prong to the South Fork
 New River was also designated ORW. The Commission's redassification
 of these streams in December 1992 ensured that stricter point and non-
 point source regulations would be enforced in this region.


 Refining Aquatic Life Uses

 The classification of surface water types and the definition of designated
 uses of streams and rivers are important activities in planning,  developing,
 and using biocriteria. Surface water classification categorizes waterbpdies
 into marine, estuarine, freshwater, and" wetland types. It also establishes
 many subcategories; for example, waterbodies in the freshwater category
 include lakes, reservoirs, streams, and rivers, although this document fo-
 cuses on streams and small rivers only. Surface water classification and
 stream and river use designations are ongoing activities in many states;
 therefore, historical data from existing state programs will be useful dur-
 ing the initial planning phase, although additional field efforts are nor-
 mally expected.
    General information on use designation can be found in Biological Cri-
 teria, National Program Guidance for Surface Waters (U.S. Environ. ProL
 Agency, 1990). Designated uses are those uses specified in water quality
 standards to describe the  purpose or benefits to  be derived  from the
 waterbody. The  designated uses for streams and rivers are usually defined
by individual states and include such uses as drinking water, fish and
 wildlife propagation, recreational use, industrial use, and. agricultural use.
 Specific technical guidance for conducting use attainability  analyses is
 provided in U.S: Environ. Prot  Agency  (1983). Within the context  of
biocriteria development, the classification and definition of  designated
uses refer primarily to aquatic life uses.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
  "Outstanding
  waters'drain or are in
  undisturbed or
  minimally impaired
  watersheds. They are
  characterized by
  aquatic communities
  .that are deemed to
  be  "as naturally
  occurs."
   m Designated Use: A classification included in water quality standards
     that define the optimal purpose for that waterbody regardless of at-
     tainment status.
   • Aquatic Life Use: A use classification of a waterbody that empha-
     sizes biological attributes; a waterbody attains an aquatic use when
     its quality is appropriate for habitation by one or more  specified
     aquatic life forms.            •            .  •.,   .
   • Use Attainment: The condition of a waterbody that meets or has
     been developed to meet its prescribed aquatic life use or other desig-
     nateduse.
   Designated uses of waterbodies are formulated on the level of protec-
tion afforded the aquatic resource. 'Outstanding waters" .drain or are in
undisturbed or minimally impaired watersheds. They are characterized by
aquatic communities that are deemed to  be-as naturally occurs.  Such
communities are in dynamic equilibrium;  that is, they represent the most
stable communities possible for the given waterbody type. Use designa-
tions may reflect prior degradation in areas in which land development ac-
ttrite jnvnt attainment of the  highest  quality waters. I*""""
obtained through biosurveys can be used to describe explicitly each
aquatic life use.
    Maine, for example, has established four classes of water quality for
streams and rivers CTable 7-2). The "high quality water* of Maine k sepa-
rated into two categories: one reflects the ^ghest goal oftiui Watex^uahty
Act (no discharge, Class AA); and the other, reflects high integrity but fe
n^aUyfcnpSred by human activity (Class A). 'Good quality water^ is
assigned to Class B. Waters in Class B meet their aquatic life use require-
ment if and when all indigenous aquatic species are supported and only
nondetrimental changes in community composition occur. The final classi-
fication, Class C, is  reserved for the lowest quality waters. Waters in this
dass also meet their use requirement  if and when all indigenous aquatic
 species are supported. However, changes in  species composition may
 occur in Class C waters, even though the  structure and  function  of the
 aquatic community must be maintained Pavies et al. 1991).
     Many states are shifting from only chemical assessments to an empha-
 sis  on biological monitoring for their 305b assessments. In their water
 quaSy Assessment reports to Congress  in 1992 and 1994, several states
 Ssed biological assessments to determine the extent of attainment and/or
 nonattainment of their aquatic life use designations for their streams (Fig.
 8-2) These data should not be used  for comparing one state to another
 since the data collection methods are not uniform among the states and be-
 cause the numbers  listed in Figure 8-2 refer to assessed waters only, not to
 all the waters in a given state.
     Oregon is presently developing state surface water categories based on
 aquatic Hie classifications. The proposed language for biological criteria in
 Segon is separated into two categories. The first classification ( O*-
 standing Resource Waters") is for waters  that shall be managed  so feat
 "resident biological communities ... remain as they naturally occur and
  all indigenous aquatic species are protected and preserved."
     The second classification scheme  is for all other waters of Oregon. Wa-
  ters in this class meet their use requirement if and when the following

-------
                                                                          Applications of Biocriteria
          Nebraska
           68%
                        Wisconsin
Ohio
          Vermont
  Percent of
  streams that do
  not sustain fish
  and aquatic
  insect life.
                       Connecticut
                          54%
                                                          Now Jersey
                  Missouri
                   52%
    .• Sou 303(1,) RtpofU, 1992-1994
                             KMrtueky
                              22%
      Florida
       35%
                    Delaware
                      87%
Figure 8-2.—Examples from som* state* using biological assessments to determine
aquatic Ufa us* support In rivers and streams. Failure to sustain flch and aquatic life
Is defined with respect to th* reference condition In that state.
statement is applicable: "other waters of the state, including waters out-
side designated mixing zones,  shall be of sufficient quality to support
aquatic species without detrimental changes in the resident biological
communities* (Oregon Dep. Environ. QuaL 1991). Such classifications as
discussed in these two examples require the use of biosuryeys and subse-
quent monitoring for compliance or revaluation, or both.


Judging  Use  Impairment             '

The purpose of state water quality standards is to attain and protect desig-
nated uses conducive to overall water resource enhancement and preser-
vation. Current biomonitbring tools to judge nonattainment are not well
formulated in many instances. Many states rely exclusively or primarily
on chemical criteria to evaluate use impairment; however, biocriteria pro-
vide the only direct assessment of resource condition and are sensitive to a
broader range of human influences (Karr, 1991; U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency,
1991c). Thus, biosurveys are fundamental tools for assessing aquatic life
use impairment. Criteria established to  differentiate between attainment
and nonattainment for designated aquatic life uses are, essentially, biologi-
cal criteria.
    A threshold to identify acceptable or unacceptable conditions should
be established based on attributes of the resident biota to protect the level
of aquatic life designated for the water resource. The magnitude of impair-
ment is not addressed with a threshold determination. But if the threshold
is established within a range or continuum of values, the relative  extent of
the impairment can then be deduced; The value of differentiating among
impairment levels is that it helps establish priorities within problem areas
for more research or for enforcement and remediation efforts.
    In Ohio, use attainment or nonattainment is determined with biocriteria
based on both macroinvertebrates and fish. Full use attainment occurs if all
criteria are met. Partial use attainment occurs if one assemblage  meets its
                                     Biosurveys are
                                     fundamental tools for
                                     assessing aquatic life
                                     use impairment.

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA:
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
 A threshold to
 identify acceptable or
 unacceptable
 conditions should be
 established based on
 attributes of the
 resident biota to
 protect the level of
 aquatic life
 designated for the   ,.
 water resource.
criteria, though the other does not. The status is nonattainment if none of
the biocriteria are met, or if one assemblage indicates poor or very poor
performance, even though the other indicates attainment The area of degra-
dation value (ADV) portrays the severity and extent of biological impair-
ment along a stream. It is a relative index of degradation that indicates the
extent of departure from biocriteria along a stream corridor The ADV has
also been used as a factor in awarding priority points for construction grants
and  revolving loan programs. The ADV provides a comprehensive and
quantitative view of the biological health of a particular stream or river reach
and can be used to report annual trends (Ohio Environ. Prot. Agency, 1990).

CASE STUDY—Ohio                                           	
         STATS
                              LOCATION
                                                    DATES
          Ohio
Upptr Hocking Rtw
                                                   1982-1901
The Hocking River basin covers 1,197 square miles in southeast Ohio, and
flows through the cities of Lancaster, Logan, Nelsonville, and Athens; each
city maintains Wastewater Treatment Facilities (WWTPs) that discharge
into the river (Clayton Environmental Consultant, 1992). Historically, the
upper Hocking River near Lancaster has been one of the most severely de-
graded~river segments in the state (Ohio Environ. Prot Agency, 1982).
Throughout the 1970s and early 1980s, the river was severely impacted by
industrial effluent,  combined sewer overflows (CSOs)  and inadequate
treatment at the Lancaster WWTP (Ohio Environ. Prot. Agency, 1985). The
severe chemical impacts — low dissolved oxygen, and high levels of am-
monia, lead, cyanide, cadmium, and phenolics—resulted in gross organic
enrichment, heavy metal contamination, significant levels of in-stream tox-
icity, and periodic fish kills.
    The city of Lancaster began upgrading its WWTP in 1986 and reached
 full operation in 1989. The upgrades, sewer rehabilitation, elimination of
 bypasses, and the addition of a pretreatment program to remove metals,
 substantially improved both the water quality and  the resident aquatic
 communities.
    In assessing aquatic life  uses, Ohio EPA relies primarily on three bM>
 logical indices to quantify a  waterbody's "attainment" of aquatic life uses:
 thl Index of Biotic  Integrity (TOI), the Modified Index of well being
 (Mlwb), and the Invertebrate Community Index (ICI). The IBI and the
 Mlwb are multimetric fish  indices, and the ICI is a multimetric macro-
 invertebrate index. Ohio EPA measures reference streams in each aquatic
 ecoregion to determine its  potential aquatic life performance and to set
 standards for warmwater habitat use (WWH) and Exceptional Warmwater
 Habitat Use (EWH). Actual performance by each of the three indices is
 ranked ("excellent," "good," "fair," "poor," or "very poor") in comparison
 with the WWH. Attainment of an aquatic life use is "full if all three indi-
  ces meet the applicable criteria,  "partial" if at least one of the indices falls
  in the fair category, and "non" if all indices either fail to attain WWH, or if
  any index indicates poor or very poor performance.
     The Upper Hocking River has exhibited the greatest improvement in
  biological performance of any river system in the state, although its recov-
  ery is not yet complete. In 1982,  the biological communities downstream of
  the Lancaster WWTP and CSOs reflected the grossly poUuted and acutely
  toxic conditions. None of the 20.5 miles from Lancaster to Logan attained
  their WWH standard, and  75 percent of them were in poor or very poor

-------
                                                                                   •  CHAPT£F,:.
                                                                         Applications of Biocriteria
 condition. In 1990, only 8.7 miles were in the nonattainment category,
 while the rest achieved partial or fuU attainment
     Ammonia, BOD, cyanide, and dissolved oxygen levels in the river im-
 proved significantly following  the Lancaster WWTP upgrades. Macro-
 invertebrate community performance  (as measured by  the. ICI) also
 improved dramatically, largely in response to the improved water quality.
 The ADV for the ICI declined substantially from 1982 to 1990 (Fig. 8-3). Al-
 though the fish community performance has substantially improved, seri-
 ous habitat alterations (such as channelization, bank erosion, and siltation)
 continue to inhibit silt-sensitive species, as indicated by the IBI and Mlwb.

 Diagnosing Impairment Types

 The underlying theme of bioassessmeint and biocriteria is to demonstrate
 the type and extent of impairment at study sites. This demonstration can
 be done by comparing the attributes of aquatic communities at the  study
 sites with those found at sites that are unimpaired or minimally impaired.
 All human-induced alterations (see chapter 5) affect biological integrity
 through their effects on environmental factors of importance to the stream
 biota (Karr et al. 1986):
    •Energy Base                                    '

 .   • Chemical Constituents

    • Habitat Structure
    • Flow Regime
    • Biotic Interactions
    60-
      I         Wheeling St Uft Station
      1  Exceptional    r Lancaster WWTP
    so;  .
                                                   1990
                                              Warmwater Habitat Use
 9

I
 1
10T
  -  Poor/
  I  Very Poor
     100
         95
90
85     80
River Mile
75     70

Soiree OhioEM
65
Figure 8-3.—Temporal trends in the Improvement of the Upper Hocking River, illus-
trating the Area of Degradation Value (ADV), 1982 -1990.
                                                                   The underlying
                                                                   theme of
                                                                   bioassessment and
                                                                   biocriteria is to
                                                                   demonstrate the type
                                                                   and extent of
                                                                   impairment at study
                                                                   sites.  This
                                                                   demonstration can be
                                                                   done by comparing
                                                                   the attributes of
                                                                   aquatic communities
                                                                   at the study sites with
                                                                   those found at sites
                                                                   that are unimpaired or
                                                                   minimally impaired.

-------
3iCj.CGiCAL CRITERIA. .
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
   Human-induced
   alterations may occur
   as chemical
   contamination (point
   or nonpoint) or as a
   variety of other effects
   such as flow alteration
   or habitat
   modification.
  ' These factors not only influence the aquatic biota; they also adversely
affect other elements and processes that normally occur along the stream
or river gradient.
   The river continuum concept (Vannote et aL 1980) has forced stream
biologists to examine linkages, for example, between the terrestrial drain-
age basin and in-stream energetics and between upstream and down-
stream sites. As with  any generalization  or simulation  of biological
conditions, caution should be applied in using the continuum hypothesis.
When streams cross ecoregion boundaries, for example, distinct changes in
biota may occur (Omernik and Griffith, 1991; Smith et aL 1981).
   When studied on finer spatial scales, it is also apparent that streams
frequently do not exhibit gradual transitions in physical and biological
characteristics. Rather, distinct patches of enviromnental conditions are
observed and many stream dynamics result from the interaction of these
resource patches with each other across both lateral and vertical bound-
aries (Pringle et aL 1988; Townsend, 1989). The flows across those bound-.
aries and stream landscapes are especially important in governing the
characteristics of biological communities. Three examples of this interac-
tion include the effects of beaver ponds on energetic processes in head-
water  steams, the lateral interactions between large  rivers  and thai
floodplains, and the vertical connections between surface waters and the
hyporheic zone.
    Another influence on stream biota is the role of climatic  variation,
which influences the seasonal patterns of flooding, or in a larger sense,
the  hydrology of the watershed. Stream communities and assemblages
have evolved in the context of  specific hydrologies. Long-term climatic
change or human manipulations of the landscape can alter watershed hy-
 drology  and thus the patterns of flow in channels and wetlands (New-
bury,1984).
     Human-induced alterations may occur as chemical  contamination
 (point or nonpoint) or as a variety of other effects such as flow alteration
 or habitat modification. Societal  decisions to correct these imbalances may
 influence diverse aspects of water management systems. The attainment of
 biological integrity as defined by the reference condition depends on such
 decisions.
     In Idaho, the goal of the Rock Creek Rural dean Water Program wds
 -to reduce the nonpoint source pollutants entering the severely degraded
 stream. This goal was accomplished by best management practices (BMFs)
 implemented to provide effective and practical means of achieving water
 quality goals by preventing or  reducing nonpoint source  pollution. Nine
 BMPs were selected for the Rock Creek Project, including the estabhsh-
 ment of permanent riparian vegetative cover on fields and streambanks to
 prevent excessive runoff of water or soilless contributing to water pollu-
 tion.  Through the implementation of various types of sediment-retention
  practices and irrigation improvements, the project successfully reduced
  pollutant levels in Rock Creek (Yankey et al. 1991).
     An example of impact type identification involving agricultural and
  urban land use occurred in southern Ontario (Steedman, 1988). Compara-
  tive studies have shown that agricultural and urban land uses  have strong
  tendencies to degrade the  diversity of fish and other stream biota. The
  Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI) facilitates the quantification and practical ap-

-------
                                                                         Applications of Biocriteria
 plication of empirical relationships-between land use and stream health.
 The IBI uses attributes of the fish community in a stream reach to index
 human effects on a stream and its watershed, relative to regional and his-
 torical standards. Use of the IBI enables detection of the effects of urban
 and agricultural development on aquatic ecosystems (Steedman, 1988).
     Another example using  the IBI but involving stream degradation re-
 sulting from sewage, mining, and urbanization occurred in West Virginia
 (Leonard and Orth, 1986). Here the IBI was applied to features of indige-
 nous fish assemblages to assess watershed and stream quality based on
 the assumption that assemblage features change consistently with stream
 degradation. Some fish community attributes respond more quickly than
 others to stream degradation (Angermeier andKarr, 1986; Karr et aL 1986).
 However, each metric is sensitive within a different range of stream degra-
 dation, and in these small coolwater streams of West Virginia, the IBI was
 capable of distinguishing the extent of degradation caused by mining,
 sewage, and urbanization. This  study indicates that measuring fish attri-
 butes is a valid approach to monitoring biotic integrity in such streams.

 CASE STUDY — Delaware
         STATE
                              LOCATION
                                                     DATES
        Ddawmr*
                         Ktoit & Sum* Count**     S*g«mb«f - Octotw 1991
 In 1991, Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental
 Control (DNREQ initiated an  intensive biological  survey of nontidal
 freshwater streams in Kent and Sussex Counties, which represent more
 than two-thirds of their state waters. The land use in the two counties is
 over 40 percent forest and 40 percent agriculture. Residential, commercial,
 and other miscellaneous uses are also found in the counties.
    Prior to the use of biological surveys, Delaware used measures of dis-
 solved oxygen to judge attainment or nonattainment. On this basis, it
 found that 91 percent  of its nontidal  streams attained their designated
 aquatic life use (Fig. 8-4). However, after the development of realistic
 biocriteria-bioassessment measures, Delaware discovered that only 22 per-
 cent of its nontidal streams were m attainment                '
    Further research  into the cause of impairment suggested that alter-
 ation  of the physical  habitat was the principal  cause of nonattainment in
 81 percent of the nontidal streams (Fig. 8-5), Water quality evaluations (i.e.,
 dissolved  oxygen measurements) were not sufficient to identify habitat al-
 teration as a source of impairment


 Compliance Monitoring

Compliance criteria and monitoring of the resident biota can serve numerous
goals: It can (1) rank problem areas for further attention and dedication of re-
sources; (2) serve as a potential early warning system to identify impacts;
(3) monitor a problem: area to ensure against continued degradation; and (4)
track responses of the biota to remediation efforts.
   Monitoring the status and condition of resident communities over time
is important to assess trends in the quality of the biota, whether to guard
against further degradation or to measure improvement. Several states
have established monitoring stations for conducting periodic bipsurveys

-------
S1GLOGICAL CFUTEnlA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                           ,  91.0%
                                                         9.0%
                                                                     78.0%
                                                                                            22.0%
                                                            I Yes • No
                                   Fixed Stations-
                                   Dissolved Oxygen
                                   (No statistical confidence)
                                          Probalistic - Habitat/Biology
                                          (95% Confidence Interval +/-
                                          5-6%)

                                             Source: Dataware, 1984
FlgunTS-4.--State of Delaware 305(b) report for hontida) atream UM attainment —
aquatic lift, 1992.
                                                                                         Habitat
                                                                                          81%
                              Fair  41.0%
                                                             Other
                                                             19%
                                  Biological Quality
                                        Stressor Evaluation
                                                   (Margin of error +/• 6-8%: 95% conftdenca
                                                                            Sourea: Dataware, 1894
                              Flgura 8-5.-Aaaaaamant aummary, Kent and Suaaex Countlea, Dalawara, 1«91.


                              as part of their biomonitoring programs. A summary of current state pro-
                              grams can be found in U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency (1991a).
                                  In the Honda Department of Environmental Regulation, a point
                              source program (unpublished) is underway to determine the environmen-
                              tal damage (or lack thereof) caused by all significant point source dis-
                              charges in the state. When the Florida Department began permitting point
                              source discharges, staff-relied mainly on compliance with numerical chem-
                              ical standards. Over time, the need to evaluate the effects of the discharges

-------
                                                                                   .-CHAPTERS:
                                                                        Applications of Biocriteria
on receiving waters has increased, both to ensure adequate environmental
protection and to set priorities for enforcement or remedial action. Empha-
sis will be placed on detecting losses of biotic integrity through measures
of imbalance in the flora and fauna, effects of toxic materials, dominance
of nuisance species/ and high populations of microbiological indicators.
    A two-tiered approach is being used in the Florida program to detect
environmental disturbances in receiving waters.  Preliminary investiga-
tions (screening phase) involve qualitative sampling and analysis of ben-
thic macroinvertebrate assemblages. A reference or background station is
established for comparison with an area downstream of a discharge. Using
the  results of this relatively low intensity investigation, site impairment is
ranked from "no*  to  "moderate* to "severe." If necessary,  subsequent
studies on dischargers (definitive phase) will use a more quantitative,
multiparameter sampling regime. According to the Florida Department of
Environmental Regulation, study parameters  (such as macroinvertebrates,
periphyton,  macrophytes, bacteria,  bioassays,  sediment analysis, and
physical and chemical analyses) are well suited for detection of violations.
    The Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology addresses
screening level monitoring using rapjd bioassessment at paired stations that
bracket pollutant sources for impact identification. As was shown in Figure
5-2, the initial rapid bioassessment screening may result in the application
of other biological and chemical methods, after which an on-site decision
can be made for subsequent action. In situations where "no impairment" or
"minimal impairment" classifications £ire obtained, field efforts are discon-
tinued until further information indicates a problem. Streams classified as
"substantially" or "excessively" impaired trigger additional investigative
steps that employ a variety of methods (Shaddeford, 1988).

CASE STUDY —Main*
         STATE
   LOCATION
 DATES
         Mains
Placataquit River
1964-1990
The Piscataquis River, with a drainage area of about 250 square miles
northwest of Bangor, runs near the town of Guilford (Clayton Environ-
mental Consultants,  1992). For many years,  untreated manufacturing
water from a textile mill and untreated domestic sewage from Guilford
significantly impacted the river. In an attempt to improve the quality of
the waterbody, the town of Guilford constructed a publicly owned treat-
ment works (POTW), which was completed in June 1988. The POTW has
aerated lagoons (detention time of 50 days) and a flow of 0.75 million gal-
lons per day (mgd). Seventy-five percent of the total inflow into the plant
comes  from textile mill waste; the remaining 25 percent from domestic
sewage.
   Maine's water quality standards designate a specific level of biological
integrity that each class of water must maintain. To meet the standards for
a Class A water, the aquatic community must be as naturally occurs. Spe-
cific  definitions are used to identify ecological attributes that may  be
tested to determine if the standards are being achieved.
   Maine's Department of Environmental Protection uses a multivariate
statistical model to predict the probability of attaining each classification.
The model uses 31 quantitative measures of community structure/including
the Hilsenhoff Biotic Index, Generic Species Richness, EFT, and EP values.
                                         ,
                    Monitoring the status
                    and condition of
                    resident communities
                    over time is important
                    to assess trends in
                    the quality of the
                    biota, whether to
                    guard against further
                    degradation or to
                    measure
                    improvement

-------
BIOLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
60 _
sol

401
                                 20"
                                 10..

                                  0
                                          Site #2 - Below Textile Mill, Above POTW
                                 60
                                            1984       4       1989
                                             New POTW operational(Jur» 1908)
                                                     Site t3-Below POTW
                                                                                  1990
                                 50..
                                 .40..

                            x 0  30..
                            •Si
                            £$  20..
                                 10-..
                                                                1989
                                               New POTW operationaKJune 198S)
                                                  1990
                                                          INDICES
                                               Generic Richness   •• EPT
                                            EP
                                                  Source MairwDEP
                             FIgura M.-M«crolnv«t«br«U* In th. Plsotaquls Rlw, M«ln«, 1984-1900.
                                 Monitoring of the Piscataquis River occurred at sites upstream and
                             downstream of the textile mill in 1984,1989, and 1990 and at a site down-
                             stream  from  the POTW in 1989  and  1990. Prior  to  1988,  benthic
                             macroinvertebrate samples collected downstream of the mill showed a se-
                             verely degraded community consisting primarily of pollutarit  tolerant
                             organisms. The macroinvertebrate samples indicated that the waterbody
                             failed to attain the lowest aquatic life standards allowed by the state, al-
                             though chemical water quality parameters (e.g., biochemical oxygen de-
                             mand) collected at the site were meeting standards. Chemical parameters
                             alone are insufficient to detect every water quality impairment.
                                 Following the rerouting of the textile mill waste and the completion of
                             the POTW in 1988, the river recovered quickly. Monitoring data, collected
                             during  the   summer of   1989, revealed  a  substantially  improved
                             macroinvertebrate community  (Fig.  8-6). Pollution-sensitive  organisms
                             were abundant and EPT values had increased from 1 in 1984-to 17 in 1989.
                             The Biotic Index improved from 6.35 in 1984 to 3.8 in 1990. The  site now
                              fully supports the aquatic life standards of Class A waters.

-------
                                                                                  Applications of Biocriteria
 Suggested Readings

 Davies, SJP., L. Tsomides, D.L. Courtemanch, and R Dnunmond. 1991. Biological Moni-
     toring and Biocriteria Development Prog. Sum. Maine Dep. Environ. Prot, Au-
    . gusta,ME                                        ,
 Idaho Department of Health and Welfare. 1991. State funded 319 project biological met-
     ric development study plan. Pages 15-18 in Rapid Bioassessment Protocol Develop-
     ment Boise, ID.
 Leonard, P.M. and D.J. Orth. 1986. Application and testing of an index of biotic integrity
     in small, coolwater streams. Trans. Am. Fish Soc. 115:401-14.             .
 Montana Department of Health and Environmental Sciences. 1990. Montana's Approach
     to Nonpoint Assessment and Monitoring. Outline. Water QuaL BUR, Helena, MT.
 North Carolina Division of Environmental Management 1978.208 Phase I Results. Ra-
 .    leigh,NC.
 Ohio Environmental Protection Agency. 1990. The Use of Biocriteria In the Ohio EPA
     Surface Water Monitoring and Assessment Program. Columbus, OH.
 	. 1991. Biological and Water Quality Sftudy of the Hocking River Mainstem and
     Selected Tributaries: Fairfield, Hocking, and Athens County, Ohio. Columbus, OH.
 Oregon Department of Environmental Quality. 1991. Biological Criteria-Implementation
     Plan. Draft Portland, OR.
 Primrose, NX. 1989. Routine Benthic Biomonitoring  Protocol: A Proposal Maryland
     Dep. Environ., Annapolis, MD.                 .
 Rankin, E.T. and CO. Yoder. 1991. Calculation and uses of the area of degradation value
     (ADV). In Ohio Water Resource Inventor}', Executive Summary and Volume 1. Ohio
    Environ. Prot Agency, Columbus, OH.
——«. 1992. Summary, status, and trends. In Ohio Water Resource Inventory, Volume 1-
    Ohio Environ. Prot Agency, Columbus, OH.      .
 Shackleford, B. 1988. Rapid Bioassessment of Lptic Macroinvertebrate Communities:
    Biocriteria Development Arkansas Dep. Pollut Control EcoL, Little Rock, AR.
 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 199IX Biological Criteria: National Program
    Guidance for Surface Waters. EPA-440/5-90-004. OK. Water, Washington, DC
	. 1991c. Technical Support Document for Water Quality-Based  Toxics Control.
    EPA-505/2-90-001. Off. Water, Washington, DC
	. 199id. Biological Criteria: Research and Regulation Proceedings of a Sympo-
    sium. EPA-440/5-91-005. Off. Water, Washington, DC.

 Contacts for Case Studies
David Penrose, North Carolina DEM, 919/733-6946
Chris Yoder, Ohio EPA, 614/728-3382
John Maxted, Delaware DNREC, 302/739^590
David Courtemanch, Maine DEP, 207/287-7889   ,

-------

-------
Glossary

"S3
           «•
           s

-------
BiQLCGiCAL CRITERIA, ,
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                             Autotrophic refers to the trophic status, the balance between production
                                and consumption where production within the system exceeds respi-
                                ration.                   '                           T

                             Autotrophic systems are those systems  for which the primary nutrient
                                source of fixed carbon is intrinsic, such as streams in which there is
                                abundant growth of algae or macrophytes.    '

                             A biogeogrophic region is any geographical region characterized by a dis-
                                tinctive flora and/or fauna (see also ecoregion).
                                            \-        '            '    .
                             A bioindicotor is an organism, species/ assemblage, or community charac-
                                teristic of a particular habitat, or indicative of a particular set of envi-
                                ronmental conditions.

                            . Biological assessment is an evaluation of the condition of a waterbody using
                                biological surveys and other direct measurements of the resident biota
                                in surface waters.                                  '

                             Biological criteria, or Wocriteria, are numerical values or narrative expres-
                                sions that describe the reference biological condition of aquatic com-
                                munities inhabiting waters of a  given  designated aquatic life .use.
                                Biocriteria are benchmarks for water resources evaluation and man-
                                agement decision making.

                             Biological integrity is functionally defined as the condition of an aquatic
                                community inhabiting unimpaired watexbodies of a specified habitat
                                as  measured by an evaluation of multiple  attributes of the aquatic
                                biota.  Three critical components  of biological integrity are that the
                                biota is (1) the product of the evolutionary process for that locality, or
                                site, (2) inclusive of a broad range of biological and ecological charac-
                                teristics such as taxonomic richness and composition, trophic struc-
                                ture, and (3) is found in the study biogeographic region.

                             Biological monitoring, or biomonitoring, is the use  of a biological entity as a
                                detector and its response as a measure to determine environmental
                                conditions. Toxicity tests and ambient biological surveys are common
                                biomonitoring methods.

                             A biological response signature is a unique combination of biological attri-
                                butes that identify individual impact types or the cumulative impacts,
                                 of several human influences.

                             A biological survey, or biosuroey, consists of collecting, processing, and ana-
                                 lyzing representative portions of a resident biotic community.

                             A biomarker is any -contaminant-induced physiological or biochemical
                                 change in an organism that leads to the formation of an altered struc-
                                 ture (a lesion) in the cells, tissue, or organs of that individual or change
                                 in genetic characteristics.

                              Channelization is the procedure of deepening and straightening stream or
                                 river channels through dredging.  In some  states, channelization in-
                                 cludes complete concrete lining  of channel bottom, sides, and ease-
                                 ments.                        ,

-------
                                                                                         Glossary
 A community component is any portion of a biological community. The com-
    munity component may pertain to the taxonomic group (fish, inverte-
    brates, algae), the taxonomic category (phylum, order, family, genus,
    species, stock), the feeding strategy (herbivore, omnivore, predator), or
    the organizational level (individual, population, assemblage) of a bio-
    logical entity within the aquatic community.

 A confidence interval is an interval thai has the stated probability (e.gv 95
    percent) of containing the true value of a fixed (but unknown) parame-
    ter.      ,   /          .  '  •    _      „     - .  -  .  •_ •  .    ;.' ••'..

 Data quality objectives (DQOs) are qualitative and quantitative statements
    developed by data users to specify the quality of data needed to sup-
    port specific decisions; statements about the level of uncertainty that a
    detisionmaker is willing to accept in data used to support a particular
    decision. Complete DQOs describe: the decision to be made; what data
    are required, why they are needed, the calculations in which they will
    be used; and time and resource constraints. DQOs  are used to design
    data collection plans.

 Degradation is any alteration of ecosystems such that chemical, physical, or
    biological attributes are adversely affected.

 Degree days  are  units used in measuring the duration of a life cycle or
    growth stage of an organism; they are calculated as the product of time
    and temperature averaged over a specified interval

A designated use is a classification specified in water quality standards for
    each waterbody or segment relating to the level of protection from per-
    turbation afforded by the regulatory agency.

 Diversity is the absolute number of species in an assemblage, community,
    or sample; species richness (see also taxa richness).

 Ecological assessment is a detailed and comprehensive evaluation of the sta-
    tus of a water resource system designed to detect degradation and, if
    possible, identify the causes of that degradation.

 Ecological health is the degree to which the inherent potential of a biological
    system is realized, the dynamic  equilibrium of system processes is
    maintained,  and a minimal amount of external support for manage-
    ment is needed.                      ,

 Ecological integrity is the condition of an unimpaired ecosystem as mea-
    sured by combined chemical, physical (including habitat), and biologi-
    cal attributes.

 Ecoregions, or regions of ecological similarity, are defined by similarity of cli-
    mate, landform, soil, potential natural vegetation, hydrology, or other
    ecologically relevant variables.

 Ecoregionalization — See regionalization.

 Elements  are the richness of items that make up biological systems, meas-
    ured as number of kinds.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                            Ceneralists are organisms that can utilize a broad range of habitat or food
                            ,    types.                           .
                            Heterotrophic input refers to the trophic status, the balance between pro-
                                duction and consumption where respiration within the system exceeds
                                production.

                            Heterotrophic systems are those systems for which the primary nutrient
                                source of fixed carbon is extrinsic, such as streams for which the main
                                source of organic input is from riparian vegetation in the form of leaf
                                litter and woody material

                            Historical data are datasets existing from previous studies, which can range
                                from handwritten field notes to published journal articles.
                                                     - ,    -   '    '  *          ,. • .   -      '        ^
                            Hyporheic pertains to saturated sediments beneath or beside streams and
                                rivers.

                            An impact is a change in the chemical, physical (including habitat), or bio-
                                logical quality or condition of a waterbody caused by external sources.

                            An impairment is a detrimental effect on the biological integrity of a water-
                                body caused by an impact that prevents attainment of the designated
                                use.

                            Level of uncertainty pertains  to the confidence, or lack thereof, that data
                                from an assessment will support the conclusions.

                            Macroinvertebrates are animals without backbones of a size large enough to
                                be seen by the unaided eye and which can be retained by a U.S. Stand-
                                ard No. 30 sieve (28 meshes per inch, 0595 mm openings).

                            Macrophytes are large aquatic plants that may be rooted, unrooted, vascu-
                                lar, or algiform (such as kelp); includes submerged aquatic vegetation,
                                emergent aquatic vegetation, and floating aquatic vegetation.

                            A metric is a calculated term or enumeration representing some aspect of
                                biological assemblage structure, function, or other measurable aspect;
                                a characteristic of the biota that changes in some predictable way with
                                increased human influence; combinations of these attributes or metrics
                                provide valuable synthetic assessments of the status  of water re-
                             •   sources.        .

                            Minimal effluent dilution occurs in low flow conditions in which there is a
                                lower quantity of water and thus a decreased ability for receiving wa-
                                ters to lower concentration levels of discharged compounds..

                            Minimally impaired is a term used to describe sites with slight anthropo-
                                genic perturbation relative to the overall region of study.

                             Mutualism is  a  form of symbiotic relationship in which both organisms
                                benefit, frequently entailing complete interdependence.

                             Narrative biocriteria are general statements of attainable or attained condi-
                                 tions of biological integrity and water quality for a given use designa-*
                                 tion (see also biocriteria).

-------
                                                                                        CHAPTER 9:
                                                                                        '  Glossar/
 Nonpoint source is the origin of pollution in diffuse sources such as agricul-
    ture, forestry, and urbanization. Such pollution is transported by rainfall
    or snowmelt runoff carrying pollutants overland or through the soil

 Numeric biocriteria are numerical indices  that describe expected attainable
    community attributes for different designated uses (see also biocriteria).

 Organic pollution results from the presence of living substances in a stream
    or other waterbody at higher than natural background levels because
    of anthropogenic activities.

Paleoecological data are records derived from ancient or fossil remains dis-
    covered in lake sediments, including, for example, the fossilized re-
    mains of diatoms, pollen, seeds, or arthropod exoskeletal fragments.
    (Arthropoda  are the phylum  of  invertebrate animals with jointed
    limbs, such as crustaceans and spiders.)

Performance effect criteria are judgment  criteria that weigh the effectiveness
    of a project activity or function; determination of proper functioning.

Periphyton is a broad organismal assemblage composed of attached algae,
    bacteria, their secretions, associated detritus, and various species of
    microinvertebrates.

Processes (or biotic processes) pertain to ecological and evolutionary activi-
    ties that naturally organize and regulate biological systems at all levels
    from genetic to landscape; examples are production, food acquisition,
    biotic interactions, and recruitment                           .

Production is the increase in biomass (somatic growth plus reproduction) of
    an individual, population, or assemblage.

Point source is the origin of  pollutant discharge that is known and specific,
    usually thought of as effluent from the end of a pipe.

A population is an aggregate of individuals of a biological species that are
    geographically isolated from other members of the species and are ac-
    tually or potentially interbreeding.

Quality assurance  (QA) includes  quality control functions and involves a
    totally integrated program for ensuring the reliability of monitoring
    and measurement data; the process of management review and over-
    sight at the planning, implementation, and completion stages of envi-
    ronmental data collection activities. Its goal is to assure that the data
    provided are of the quality needed and claimed.

Quality control (QC) refers to the routine application of procedures for ob-
    taining prescribed standards of performance  in  the monitoring and
    measurements process; -focuses on the detailed  technical activities
    needed to achieve data of the quality specified by data quality objec-
    tives. Quality control is implemented at the bench or field level.

Range control refers to quality control activity through which measurement
    values are kept within the range of natural or normal variability; con-
    trol of operator variability.

Reasonably attainable refers to the ability of an aquatic resource to attain its
    expected potential.

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                             A reference condition is the set of selected measurements or conditions of
                                minimally impaired waterbodies characteristic of a waterbody type in
                                a region.

                             A reference site is a specific locality on a waterbody which is minimally im-
                                paired and is representative of the expected ecological integrity of
                                other localities on the same waterbody or nearby waterbodies.

                             Regiondlization or ecorcgionalization  is a procedure for subdividing a geo-
                                graphic area into regions of relative homogeneity in ecological systems
                                or in relationship between organisms and their environment.

                             Regulated flaw of a stream or river is that for which the quantity of water
                                moving within  its banks is a function of anthropogenic activity/ usu-
                                ally associated with dams and reservoirs.

                             Residuals are the differences between a value predicted by regression and
                                an observed value.                                      .

                             Respiration is the energy expenditure for all metabolic processes.  Matter
                                and energy are  returned to the environment .by respiration; matter as
                                CQz.and wate^  and energy as heat.

                             A riparian zone is an area that borders a waterbody.

                             Streams, as defined for the purpose of this document, are small lotic sys-
                                tems that can be waded by field investigators.

                             Targeted assemblage  approach refers to an assessment procedure that has as
                                its focus of sampling a selected component of the biological community.

                             A targeted community segment is the component of the community, such as a
                                taxonomic category, trophic level, guild, or other designation, that is
                                the focus of a bioassessment.

                             Taxa richness refers to the number of distinct species or kinds (taxa) that are
                                found in an assemblage, community, or sample (see also diversity).

                             Termination control  points are quality control elements that indicate when
                                and where nonvalid procedures are being used or data are being col-
                                lected and indicate necessary changes in procedures.

                             A test site is the location under study of which the condition is unknown
                                and suspect of being adversely affected by anthropogenic influence.

                             A vegetated buffer zone is a planted or naturally vegetated strip of land be-
                                tween some feature (usually a waterbody) and another landform or
                                habitat that  has  been altered  by human activity (e.g., agricultural
                                fields, roadways, asphalt parking lots, residential areas).

                             A water resource assessment is an evaluation of the condition of a waterbody
                                using biological surveys, habitat quality assessments, chemical-specific
                                analyses of pollutants in waterbodies, and toxicity tests. These envi-
                                ronmental assessments may be diverse or narrowly focused depend-
                                ing on the needs  of the evaluation, and the  probable  sources of
                                degradation.

                             Zooplankton  refers to animals which are unable to maintain their position
                                or distribution  independent of the movement of water or air.

-------
                      References
 Abel, ED. 1989. Water Pollution Biology. In His Horwood Series in Wastewater Technol-
    ogy. Ellis Horwood, Chichester, England.
 Adams, S.M., LR. Shugart, GJL Southworth, and D.E. Hinton. 1990. Application of
    bioindicators in assessing the health of fish populations experiencing contaminant
    stress. In JJ. McCarthy and LJL Shugart, eds. Biomarkera of Environmental Con-
    tamination. Uwis Publ., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL,
 Anderson, T.M. 1986. The Relationship Between Basin Cultivation and Stream Insect
    Composition in Small Agricultural Streams in Kansas.MA. Thesis, Univ. Kansas,
    Lawrence.                                            ,
 Angermeier, P.L. and J.R. Karr. 1986. Applying an index  of biotic  integrity based on
    stream-fish communities: considerations in sampling and interpretation. N Am J
    Fish. Manage. 6:418-29.
 Armour, CL, KP. Bumham, and WS. Platts. 1983. Field methods and statistical analysis
    for monitoring small salmonid streams. FWS/OBS-83/33. US. Fish WildL Servv
    Dep. Inter., Washington, DC       -
 Atkinson, S J=. 1985. Habitat-based methods for biological impact assessment Environ.
    Prof. 7265-82.
 Austin, A., S. Lang, and M. Fomeroy. 1981: Simple methods for sampling periphyton
    with observations on sampler design criteria. Hydrobiologica 8533-47.
 Austin, M.E. 1972. Land resource regions and major land resource areas of the United
   . States. Agriculture Handbook 296. Soil Consery. Serv., U.S. Dep. Agric, Washing-
    ton, DC.
Bailey,  R.G. 1976. Ecoregions of the United States. Map (scale 1:7,500,000). Intennoun-
    tain Reg., Forest Serv., U.S. Dep. Agric., Ogden, UT.
Bain, M.B., J.T. Finn, and H.E. Booke. 1988. Sbreamflow regulation and fish community
   .structure. Ecology 69(2):382?92.
Ball, J.  1982. Stream classification guidelines for Wisconsin. In Water Quality Standards
    Handbook. Off. Water Regi Stand., US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC.
Barbour, M.T. et aL 1992. Evaluation of EPA's rapid bioassessment benthic metrics: met-
    ric redundancy and variability among reference stream sites. J. Environ. Toxicol.
    Chem. 11:437-49.
Barbour, M.T. and J.B. Stribling. 1991. Use of habitat assessment in evaluating the biolog-
    ical integrity of stream communities. Pages 25-38  in Biological Criteria: Research
    and Regulation. EPA-440/5-91-005. Off. Water, U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, Wash-
    ington, DC.
Barbour, M.T. and S. Thomley. 1990. Quality assurance issues related to field assessment
    of  aquatic ecosystems. Pages 167-83 in D. Hart, ed. Proc. Third Annu. Ecol. Qual.
    Assur. Workshop, Burlington, Ontario, Canada.    ~

-------
Technics! Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                 Barton, D.R., W.D. Taylor, and R.M. Biette. 1985. Dimensions, of riparian buffer strips re-
                                     quired to maintain trout habitat in southern Ontario streams. N. Am. J. Fish. Man-
                                     age. 5364-78.                    .
                                 Batschelet E. 1976. Introduction to Mathematics for Life Sciences. 2d ed. Springcr-Ver-
                                     lag.NewYork.
                                 Bazata, K. 1991. Nebraska stream classification study. Rep. Sunr. Water Sec, Water QuaL
                                     Divv Nebraska Dep. Environ. Control Lincoln, NE.
                                 Benke, A:C, T.C. Van Arsdall Jr., and D.M. GiUespie. 1984 Invertebrate productivity in a
                                     subtropical blackwater river, the importance of habitat and  life history. EcoL
                                     Monogr. 54(1)25-63.
                                 Berthouex, RM. and L Hau. 1991. Difficulties related to using extreme pexcentiks for
                                     water quaUty regulations. Res. J. Water Pollut Control F«L 63(6)^73-79.

                                 Borror, D.J., CA. Triplehom, and N J. Johnson. 1989. An Introduction to the Study of In-
                                     sects. 6th Ed. Saunders College PubL, Philadelphia, PA.
                                 Boyle, XP., CM. Smillie, J.C Anderson, and D J». Beeson. 1990. A sensitivity analysis of
                                     nine diversity and seven similarity indices. J. Water PoHut Control Fed. 62:749-62.
                                 Bramblettv R.G. and KD. Fausch. 1991. Variable fish communities and the index oltbiotic
                                     integrity in a western Great Plains river. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 120-752-69.
                                 Brooks, RP. et aL 1991. Selection of biological indicators for integrating assessments of
                                     wetland, stream, and riparian habitats. Pages 81-89 in Biological Criteria: Research
                                     and Regulation. EPA-440/5-91-005. Off. Water, US. Environ. Prot Agency, Wash-
                                     ington, DC
                                 Cairns Jr., J. 1982. Artificial Substrates. Ann Arbor Science PubL, Ann Arbor, ML
                                 Cairns Jr, J. and JJL Pratt 1986. Developing a sampling strategy. Pages 168-86 in B.G.
                                     bom, ed. Rationale for Sampling and Interpretation o£ Ecological Data in  the As-
                                     sessment of Freshwater Ecosystems. ASTM STP 894 Am. Soc Test Mater., Philadel-
                                     phia,PA.          •
                                 Campbell, J.M. and WJ. dark. 1983. Effects of microhabitat heterogeneity on the spatial
                                     dispersion of  small plant-associated  invertebrates.  Freshw.  Invertebrate  Biol.
                                     2(4):180-85.
                                 Caper, Jv G. Power, and F.R.  Shivers, Jr. 1983. Chesapeake Waters, Pollution, Public
                                     Health, and Public Opinion, 1607-1972. Tidewater PubL, Centreville, MD.
                                 Carpenter, S JL and D.M. Lodge. 1986. Effects of submerged maorophytes on ecosystems
                                     processes. Aquat Bot 26:341-70.
                                 Chambers, P. A., EE. Prepas, H.R. Hamilton, and M.L. Bothwell. 1991. Current velocity
                                     and its effect on aquatic macrophytes in flowing waters. Ecol. AppL 1(3)^49-57.
                                 Chutter, FJvL 1972. An empirical biotic index of the quality  of water in South African
                                     streams and rivers. Water Resour. 6:19-20.
                                 Coleman, R.L. and CN. Dahm. 1990. Stream geomorphology. effects of periphyton
                                     standing crop and primary production. J. N. Am. BenthoL Soc. 9:293-302.
                                 Conquest L.L.,' S.C Ralph, and R.J. Naiman. 1994. Implementation of large-scale stream
                                     monitoring efforts: sampling design and data analysis issues. Pages 69-90 in S.L.
                                     Loeb and A. Spade, eds.. Biological Monitoring of Aquatic systems. Lewis PubL,
                                      Ann Arbor, ML
                                  Cooper, J.E. 1984. Vanishing species: The dilemma of resources without price tags. Pages
                                      7-32 in A.W. Norden et al. eds. Threatened and Endangered Plants and Animals of
                                      Maryland. Spec Publ. 84-1. Maryland Nat Heritage Prog.
                                  Croonquist M.J. and R.P. Brooks. 1991. Use of avian and mammalian guilds as indica-
                                      tors of cumulative impacts in riparian-wetland areas. Environ. Manage. 1(5):701-14.

                                  Crowley, J.M. 1967. Biogeography. Can. Geogr. 11312-26.

-------
                                                                                                   References
 Cufmey, I.E., M.E Gurtz, and M.R. MeadOr. 1993. Methods for collecting benthic inver-
     tebrate samples as part of the National Water Quality Assessment program. Open
     file Rep. 93-406. VS. Geological Survey, Raleigh, NC.
 Cummins, K.W. 1983. The natural stream ecosystem. In'J.V. Ward and LA. Stanford, eds.
     The Ecology of Regulated Streams. Plenum Press, New York, NY.
 Cummins, K.W. and M.J. Mug. 1979. Feeding ecology of stream invertebrates. Annu.
     Rev. Ecol. Systematics 10:147-72.
 Davies, SJP., L. Tsomides, D.L. Courtemanch, and F. Drununond. 1993. Biological Moni-
     toring and Biocriteria Development Program. Maine Dep. Environ. Prot Augusta,
     ME.         '   '                         '   '   .
 Davis, WS. and A. Lubin. 1991. Statistical validation of Ohio EPA's invertebrate commu-
     nity index In Proc 1989 Midw. PoUnt Control BioL Meet, February 14-17,1989.
     EPA-905/9-894XJ7. Chicago, IL.
 Dickson, K.L., W.T. Waller, LH. Kennedy, and UP. Ammann. 1992. Assessing the Rela-
     tionship between  Ambient  Toxidty and In-stream Biological Response. Environ.
     Toxicol. Chem. 11:1307-22.
 Dudley, DJL1991. A state perspective on biological criteria in regulation. Pages 15-18 in
     Biological Criteria: Research and Regulation. Symp. Proc. EPA 440/5-91-005.  Off.
     Water, U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington DC
 Dudley, T.L., S.D. Cooper, and N. Hemphffl. 1986. Effects of macroalgac on a stream in-
     vertebrate community. J. N. Am. BenthoL Soc 553-106.
 EA, Inc., and Tetra Tech. 1994. Bioassessmenf: for the Nonpoint Source Program. Rep.
     Prep, for Florida Dep. Environ. Prot, Tallahassee.
 Edwards, CJ.  and RA. Ryder. 1990. Biological surrogates of mesotrophic ecosystem
     health in the Laurentian Great Lakes. Rep. Great Lakes Sd. Advis. Board, Int Joint
     Comm., Windsor, Ontario, Canada.
 Fassett, N.C 1957. A Manual of Aquatic Plants. Univ. Wisconsin Press, Madison.
 Fausch, KJD., JJL Karr, and PJL Yant 1984. Regional application of an index of biotic in-
  .  tegrity based on stream fish communities. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc 11339-55.
 Fausch, K.D., CL. Hawkes, and M.G. Parsons. 1988. Models mat predict standing crop
     of stream fish from habitat variables: 1980-85. Gen. Tedu Rep. PNW GTR-213. Pa-
     cific Northw. Res. Sta., Forest Serv., U5. Dep. Agric, Portland, OR.
 Fausch, K.D., J. Lyons, LR. Karr, P.L, Angenniner. 1990. Fish communities as indicators
     of environmental degradation. Am. Soc Symp. 8:123-44.
Fenneman,  N.M. 1946. Physical divisions of the United States. Map (scale  1:7,500,000).
    U.S. Geol. Surv., Reston, VA.
Frey, D.G. 1975. Biological integrity of water • An historical approach. Pages 127-40 in
    RJC BaUentine and L.J. Guarraia, eds. The Integrity of Water. Off. Water Hazard.
    Mater., U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC.  .
Gabler, R.E, R.J. Sager, S. Brazier, and D.L. Wbie. 1976. Eaentials of Physical Geography.
    CBS College PubL, Dryden Press, New York, NY.
Gallant, A.L. et aL 1989. Regionalization as a tool for managing environmental resources.
    EPA 600/3-S9/060. Environ. Res. Lab., U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, Corvallis, OR.
Gerritsen, J. and ML. Bowman. 1994 Periphytic Diatom Assemblages of high elevation
    Rocky  Mountain Lakes: Characterization of Reference Conditions. Rep. prep,  for
    Montana Dep. Health Environ. Sci., Helena, MT.
Gerritsen, J., J.  Green, and R. Preston. 1993. Establishment of regional reference condi-
    tions for stream biological assessment and watershed management. Pres. at Water-
    shed '93: A National Conference on Watershed Management, March  21-24, 1993.
    Alexandria, VA.      ,.  .

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                 Gibson, G.R. 1992. Procedures for Initiating Narrative Biological Criteria. EPA-822-B-92-
                                     002. US. Environ. Prot Agency, Off. Sci. TechnoL, Washington, DC
                                 Gislason, J.C. 1985. Aquatic insect abundance in a regulated stream under fluctuating
                                     and stable did flow patterns. N. Am. J. Fish. Manage. 5:39-46.
                                 Gorman, O.T. 1988. The dynamics of habitat use in a guide of Ozark minnows. EcoL
                                     Monogr.58(l):l-18.
                                 Gray, JJS. 1989. Effects of environmental stress on species rich assemblages. Biol. J.
                                     Linhean Soc 37:19-32.                                 .
                                 Gregg, WAV. and EL. Rose. 1982. The effects of aquatic macrophytes on the stream mi-
                                     croenvironmentAquatBot 14309-24.
                                 Gregg, W.W. and EL. Rose. 1985. Influences of aquatic macrophytes on invertebrate
                                     community  structure, guild  structure,, and  mierodistribution  in  streams.
                                     Hydrobiologia 128:45-56.
                                 Griffith, G.E. and LM. Omemik. 1991. Alabama/Mississippi Project Geographic Re-
                                     search Component: Ecoregion/Subregion Delineation. ManTech Environ. TechnoL
                                     Inc, Environ. Res. Lab, US. Environ. Prot Agency, Corvallis, OR.
                                 Grimm, N.B. and S.G. Fisher. 1989. Stability of periphyton and maooinvertebrates to
                                     disturbance by flash floods in a desert stream. J. N. Am. BenthoL Soc 8293-307.
                                 Hamilton, PJ. and H.C Duthie. 1984. Periphytcw colonization of rock surfaces in a bo-
                                     real forest stream studied by scanning electron microscopy and track autora diogra-
                                     phy.J.PhycoL 20525-32.
                                 Hammond, EJl 1970. Classes of land-surface form. Map (scale 1:7,500,000). Pages 62-63
                                     In The National Atlas  of the United States of America. US. GeoL Surv, U.S. Pep.
                                     Agric, Washington, DC
                                 Hart, D., ed. 1990. Proceedings: Third Annual Ecological Quality Assurance Workshop.
                                     VS. Environ. Profc Agency, Can. Min. Environ., Burlington, Ontario.
                                 Hart, DJD. 1992. Community organization in streams: the importance of species interac-
                                     tions, physical factors, and chance. Oecologia 91:220-28.
                                 Hayslip, G.A. 1992. EPA Region 10 in-stream biological monitoring handbook (for wad-
                                      able streams in the Pacific Northwest). Draft EPA-910/9-92-013. Environ. Serv. Divv
                                     Reg. 10, US. Environ. Prot Agency, Seattle, WA.
                                 Herbertson, AJ. 1905. The major natural regions: An essay  in systematic geography.
                                      Geogr. J. 25300-12.
                                 Hill, M.T., WS. Platts, and R.L. Beschta. 1991. Ecological and geomorphological concepts
                                      for in-stream and out-of-channel flow requirements. Rivers 2(3):198-210.
                                 Hilsenhoff,  W.L. 1987. An improved biotic index  of organic stream pollution. Great
                                      Lakes EntomoL 20-31-39.
                                  Holland, AJ, ed. 1990. Near Coastal Program Plan for 199ft Estuaries. EPA/600/4-40/033.
                                      Environ. Res. Lab, Off. Res. Dev., US. Environ. Prot Agency, Narragansett, Rl
                                  Hsiao, TJH. 1988. Host specificity, seasonally, and bionomics of Leptinotarsa beetles.
                                      Chapter 33 in P. Jolivet et aL eds. Biology of Chrysomelidae. Wuwer Acad. Publ.,
                                      Boston, MA.
                                  Huggins, D.G. and M. Moffett 1988. A proposed biotic index and habitat development
                                      index for use in streams in Kansas. Rep. 36. Kansas Biol. Surv., Lawrence, KS.
                                  Hughes, RJrf. 1989. Ecoregional biological criteria. In Proc Water Qual. Stand, for the
                                      21st Century. US. Environ. Prot Agency, Dallas, TX.
                                  Hughes, RJrf. and J.M. Omemik. 1981. Use and misuse of the  terms watershed and
                                       stream order. Pages 320-36 in L. Krumholz, ed. Warm Water Streams Symp. Am.
                                       Fish. Soc., Bethesda, MD.
                                  Hughes, RJvt., D.P. Larsen, and J.M. Omemik. 1986. Regional reference sites: A method
                                       for assessing stream potentials. Environ. Manage. 10:629-35.

-------
  Hughes, R.M. and J.R. Gammon. 1987. Longitudinal changes in fish assemblages and
      water quality in. the Willamette River, Oregon, trans. Am. Fish. Soe. 116(Z):196-209.
  Hughes, EM., E. Rexstad, and CE. Bond. 198,7. The relationship of aquatic ecoregions,
      river basins, and physiographic provinces to the ichthyogeographic regions of Ore-
      gon. Copeia 1987:423-32.       . -

  Hughes, RJrt. and DJ». Larsen. 1988. Ecoregions:  an approach to surface water protec-
      tion. J. Water Pollut Control Fed. 60:486-93.                             •
  Hughes, R.M., CM. Rohm, TJt Whittier, and D.P. Lareon. 1990. A regional framework
      for establishing recovery criteria. Environ. Manage 14:673-84.
  Hupp, CR.  1992. Riparian vegetation recovery patterns following stream channeliza-
      tion: a geomorphic perspective. Ecology 73(4):1209-26.
  Hupp, CR. and A. Simon. 1986. Vegetation imd bank-slope development Pages 83-92 61
     Proc. 4th Fed. Interagency Sedimentation Conf. Vbl 2. Las Vegas, NV.
  Hupp, CR. and A. Simon. 1991. Bank accretion and the development of vegetated depo-
     sitional surfaces along modified alluvial channels. Geomorphology 4:111-24.
 Huriey, LM. 1990. Field Guide to the Submerged Aquatic Vegetation of Chesapeake Bay
     Chesapeake Bay Estuary Prog., US. Fish.WildL Serv., U.S. Dep. Inter., Annapolis,
     MD.                    '  ,               •"  •                         •

 Hynes, H.B .N.1970. The Ecology of Running Waters. Univ. Toronto Press, Toronto, On-
     tario, Canada.       .

 Idaho Department of Health and Welfare. 1991. State funded 319 project biological met-
     ric development study plan. Pages 15-18 in Rapid Bioassessment Protocol Develop-
     ment, Boise, p.

 Iffrig, GJ. and M. Bowles.. 1983. A compendium of ecological and natural subdivisions
     of the U.S. Nat Areas J. 3:3-11.
 Joerg, W.L.G. 1914.  The subdivision of North America into natural regions: a prelimi-
     nary inquiry. Ann. Ass. Am. Geogr. 4.-S5-83.                .'.,''-.
 Jones, R.C. and  CC. Qark. 1987. Impact of watershed urbanization tun stream insect
     communities. Water Resour. Bull 23(6):1047-55.
 Jongman, R.H.G., CJJ. ter Braak, and OJJL van Tongeren, eds. 1987. Data Analysis in
     Community and Landscape Ecology. Pudoc, Wageningen.            "
 Karr, J.R. 1981. Assessment of biotic integrity using fish communities. Fisheries 6(6)21-
     27.                                                   ' '       •

 —	. 1990. Biological integrity and the goal of environmental legislation: lessons for
  -   conservation biology. Conserv. Biol. 4244-50.
 	—• 1991- Biological integrity: A long-neglected aspect of water resource manage-
     ment Ecol. Appl. 1:66-84.
 Karr, J.R. arid M. Dionne. 1991. Designing surveys  to assess biological integrity in lakes
     and  reservoirs.  Pages 62-72 in  Biological Criteria: Research  and Regulation.
     EPA/440/5-91-005. Off. Water, U.S. Envixon. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
 Karr, J.R. and D.R. Dudley. 1981. Ecological perspective on water quality goals. Environ.
     Manage.  5:55-68.
 Karr, JJL et al. 1986. Assessing Biological Integrity in Running Waters: A Method and Its
    Rationale. Spec. PubL 5. Illinois Nat History Surv., Urbana, IL.
Karr, J.R. and  B.L. Kerans. 1992. Components of biological integrity: Their definition and
    use in development of an invertebrate IBI. Pages 1-16 in T.P. Simon and W.S. Davis,
    eds.  Environmental Indicators: Measurement and Assessment Endpoisits.  EPA-
    905/R-92/003. Environ. Sci. Div., Reg. 5, US. Environ. Prot. Agency, Chicago, IL.
Kay, J.J. 1990. A non-equilibrium thermodynamic framework for discussing ecosystem
    integrity  Pages 209-37 in C.J. Edwards and H.A. Regier, eds.  An Ecosystem Ap-

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                     proach to the Integrity of the Great Lakes in Turbulent Times. Spec PubL 90-4.
                                     Great Lakes Fish. Comm., Ann Arbor, MI.
                                 Kay, J.J. and ED. Schneider. In press. Thermodynamics and measures of ecological in-
                                     tegrity. In S. Paulsen et al. eds. Ecological Indicators. Elsevier PubL
                                 Kent, R.T. and K.E. Payne. 1988. Sampling grouridwater monitoring wells: special qual-
                                     ity assurance and quality control considerations. Pages 231-46 in LJH. Keith, ed.
                                     Principles of Environmental Sampling. ACS Prof. Ref. Book. Am. Chexn. Soc, Wash-
                                     ington, DC
                                 Kerans, 8.L. and JJR. Karr. In Press. Development and testing of a benthic index of biotic
                                     integrity (B-ffil) for rivers of the Tennessee Valley. KcoL AppL 4.
                                 Kerans, BJL, JJL Karr, and S.A. Ahlstedt 1992. Aquatic invertebrate assemblages: spatial
                                     and temporal differences among sampling protocols.  J. N. Am. BenthoL Sot
                                     11(4)377-90.
                                 Klemm, DJV HA. Lewis, F. Fulk, and J.M. Lazorchak. 1990. Macroinvertebrate Held and
                                     Laboratory  Methods for Evaluating the Biological  Integrity of Surface Waters.
                                     EPA/600/4-90-030. Off. Res. Develop., U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC.
                                 Kolkwitz, R. and M. Marsson. 1908. Okologie der pflimzlkhen saprobien. Bench.
                                     Deutsch. Bot Gesellscn. 26505-19.
                                 Korte, VJL and D.W. Bliiw. 1983. Diatom colonization on artificial substrata in pool and '
                                     riffle zones studied by light and scanning electron microscopy. J. Phycol. 19332-41.
                                 Kuchler, A.W. 1964. Potential natural vegetation of the coterminous United States. Spec.
                                     PubL 36. Am. Geogr. Soc, A. Hoen & Co. Baltimore, MD.
                                 Lamberti, G.A. and J.W. Moore. 1984. Aquatic insects as primary producers. Pages 164-
                                     95 in VH. Resh and D.M. Rosenburg, eds. The Ecology of Aquatic Insects. Pnieger
                                     Scientific, New York, NY.
                                 Lamberti, G.A., LJR. Ashkenas, S.V. Gregory, and A.D. Steinman. 1987. Effects of three
                                     herbivores on periphyton communities in laboratory streams.}. N. Am. BenthoL
                                     Soc 6:92-104.
                                 LaPoint, T.W. and JJF. Fairchild. 1989. Aquatic surveys. In W. Warren-Hicks et al. eds.
                                     Ecological Assessment of Hazardous Waste Sites: A Field and Laboratory Reference.
                                     EPA/600/3-89/013. Environ. Res. Lab., US. Environ. Prot Agency, Corvallis, OR.
                                 Larsen, E.W., DJL Johnson, and WF. Lynch, Jr. 1986. A buoyant pop net for accurately
                                     sampling fish at artificial habitat structures. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc 115(2)551-55.
                                 Lenat, DJR. 1988. Water quality assessment of streams using a qualitative  collection
                                     method for benthic macroinvertebrates. J. N. Am. BenthoL Soc. 7222-33.
                                 Leonard, PJrf. and D.J. Orth. 1986. Application and testing of an index of biotic integrity
                                     in small, coolwater streams. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 115:401-14.
                                 .Lincoln, R.J., G. A. BoxshaU, and PJR dark. 1982. A Dictionary of Ecology, Evolution, and
                                     Systematics. Cambridge, University Press, Cambridge, England.
                                 Ludwig, J.A. and JJF. Reynolds. 1988. Statistical Ecology. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
                                     York.
                                 Lyons, J. 1989. Correspondence between the distribution of fish assemblages in Wiscon-
                                     sin streams and Omemik's ecoregions. Am. Midi Nat 122:163-82.
                                 	. 1992. Using the index of biotic integrity (1ST) to measure environmental quality
                                     in wannwater streams of Wisconsin. Gen. Tech. Rep. NC-149. Forest Serv., U.S. Dep.
                                     Agric, St Paul, MN.
                                 MacArthur, RJH. 1972. Geographical Ecology. Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ.
                                 McCarthy, J.F. 1990. Concluding remarks: implementation of a biomarker-based envi-
                                     ronmental monitoring program. Pages 429-39 in J.F. McCarthy and L.R. Shugart,
                                     eds. Biomarkers of Environmental Contamination. Lewis PubL, Boca Raton, FL.

-------
  McDermid, K.J. and R.J. N'aiman. 1983. Macrophytes: Freshwater forest of lakes and riv-
     SK. Am. BioL Teacher 43:144-30.
  MacDonald, LJi, A.W. Smart, and R.C. Wissmar. 1991. Monitoring guidelines to evalu-
     ate effects of forestry activities on streams in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska. Rep
     EPA 910/9-91-001. US. Environ. Prot Agency, Region 10, Seattle, WA.
  Maine Department of Environmental Protection. 1992; Briefing prep, by S J>. Davies. Au-
     gusta, ME.

  	. 1992. long-term Response of Aquatic Communities to Differing Water Quality
     Conditions in Three Rivers in Maine, Rep. prep, by S.P. Davies and Leon Tsomides.
     Augusta, ME;

 Mid-Atlantic Coastal Streams Workgroup.  1993. Standard Operating Procedures and
     Technical Basis: Maooinvertebrate Collection and Hiibitat Assessment for Low-gra-
     dient Nontidal Streams. Draft Rep. Delaware Dep. Nat Res. Environ. Conserv,
     Dover.                           r            •..

 Miller, D.L. et al. 1988. Regional applications of an index of biotic integrity for use in
   ,  water resource management Fisheries 13(5):12-20.
 Miller, A.C, D.C Beckett CM, Way, and EJ. Bacon. 1989. The Habitat Value of Aquatic
     Macrophytes for Macroinvertebrates. Tech. Rep. A-89-3. Waterways Exp. Sta., US.
     Army Corps Eng., Vicksburg, MS.
 Minshall, G.W. 1978. Autotrophy in streanrecosystems. BioScience 28:767-71.
 Molles, M.C. Jr. and CN. Dahm. 1990. A persptective on El Nino and La Nina: global im-
     plications for stream ecology. J. Nad. Benlhol. Sot 9(l):68-76.
 Montana Department of Health and Environmental Sciences. 1990. Montana's Approach
     to Nonpoint Assessment and Monitoring. Outline. Water Qual. Bur., Helena, MT.
 Moss,  D., M.T. Furse,  JJ. Wright, and KD.  Annitage.  1987. The prediction of die
     macroinyertebrate fauna of unpolluted  running-water sites in Great Britain using
     environmental data. Freshw. Biol. 17:41-52.
 Mount DJ. and T.J. Norberg-King, eds. 1985. Validity of Effluent and Ambient Toxiciry
     Tests for Predicting Biological Impact, Sdppo Creek, Cirdevffle, Ohio. EPA 600/3-
     85/044. US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
 Mount, DJ. and T.J. Norberg-King, eds. 1986. Validity of Effluent and Ambient Toxiciry
     Tests for Predicting Biological Impact, Kanawha River, Charleston, West Virginia.
     EPA 600/3-86/006.  US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
 Mount, D J., T.J. Norberg-King, and A.E. Steen, eds. 1986. Validity of Effluent and Ambi-
     ent Toxicity Tests for Predicting Biological Impact, Naugatuck River, Waterbury,
     Connecticut EPA 600/8-86/005. US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
Mount, D J., A.E. Steen, and T.J. Norberg-King, eds. 1986. Validity of Effluent and Ambi-
    ent Toxicity Tests for Predicting Biological Impact Back River, Baltimore Harbor,
    Maryland. EPA 600/8-86/001. US-Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
Mount, DJ., N. Thomas, M. Barbour, T. Norberg, T. Roush, and R. Brandes. 1984. Efflu-
    ent and Ambient Toxicity Testing and In-stream Community Response on the Ot-
    tawa River, Lima, Ohio. EPA 600/3-84-080. Permits Division, Washington, DC and
    Off Res. Dev., Duluth, MN.
Mount, D J. et aL, eds. 1985. Validity of Effluent and Ambient Toxicity Tests for Predict-
    ing Biological Impact, Five Mile Creek, Birmingham, Alabama. EPA 600/8-85/015.
    US. Environ. Prot. Agency, Washington,  DC.
National Research Council. 1992. Restoration of Aquatic Ecosystems. Nat. Academy
    Press, Washington, DC.                            \
Newbury, R.W. 1984. Hydrologic determinants of aquatic insect habitats. Pages 232-57 in
    V.H. Resh and D.M. Rosenberg, eds. The Ecology of Aquatic Insects. Praeger Scien-
    tific, New York, NY.

-------
Tecnmcai Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                 Norberg-King, TJ. and D.I. Mount, eds. 1986. Validity of Effluent and Ambient Toxicity
                                     Tests for Predicting Biological Impact, Skeleton Creek, Enid, Oklahoma. EPA 600/8-
                                     86/OOZ U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency, Washington, DC              v    •
                                 North Carolina Department of Health and Natural Resources. 1990. Standard Operating
                                     Procedures, Biological Monitoring. Environ. Sd. Brandi, Ecosystems Analysis Unit,
                                     BioL Assess. Group, Water QuaL Sec, Div. Environ. Manage., Raleigh, NC
                                 North Carolina Division of Environmental Management 1978.208 Phase I Results. Ra-
                                     leigh, NC.          . ,                                          .
                                 Noss, RJ. 1990. Indicators for monitoring biodiversity: a hierarchical approach. Con-
                                     serv. BioL 4:355-64.
                                 Oberdorff, T. and RJvL Hughes. 1992. Modification of an index of biotic integrity based
                                     on fish assemblages to characterize rivers of the Sdne-Nonnandte Basin, France.
                                     HydrobiologU 223:117-30.
                                 Ohio Environmental Protection Agency. 1987. Biological Criteria for the Protection of
                                     Aquatic life. VoL 1-3. Monitor. Assess. Prog., Surface Water Sec, Div. Water QuaL,
                                     Columbus, OH.      •      ,
                                 	. 1990. The Use of Biocriteria in the Ohio EPA Surface Water Monitoring and As-
                                  •   sessment Program. Columbus, OR
                                 —	. 1991. Biological and Water Quality Study of the Hocking River Mainstem and
                                     Selected Tributaries: Fairfield, Hocking, and Athens County, Ohio. Rep., Columbus.
                                 	. 1992. Onto Water Resource Inventory. Executive Summary and Vol 1: Summary,
                                   . Status, and Trends, Columbus.
                                 Omernik; J.M. 1987. Ecoregions of the conterminous United States. Annu. Ass.  Am.
                                     Geogr. 77(l):118-25.
                                 Omernik,  J.M.  and G.E. Griffith. 1991.  Ecological regions versus hydrotogic units:
                                     Frameworks for managing water quality. J. Soil Water Conserv. 46(5)334-40.
                                 Omernik, J.M., M.A. Shirazi, and KM. Hughes. 1982. A synoptic approach for regional-
                                     izing aquatic ecosystems. Pages 199-218 in In-place Resource Inventories: Principles
                                     and Practices. Proc. Soc Am. Foresters, Univ. Maine, Orono.
                                 Omernik, J.M. and A.J. Knney. 1985. Total alkalinity of surface waters: a map of the
                                      New England and New York region. EPA-600/D-84-216. Environ. Res. Lab., VS.
                                      Environ. Prot Agency, Corvallis, OR.
                                 Omernik, J.M. and G.E. Griffith. 1986. Total alkalinity of surface waters: a map of the
                                      Upper Midwest region. Map (scale 1:2,500,000). Environ. Manage. 10:829-39.
                                 	. 1991. Ecological regions versus hydrologic units: frameworks for managing
                                      water quality. J. Soil Water Conserv. 46(5)334-40.   ,
                                 Omernik, J.M., CM. Rohm, S.E. Clarke, and DP. Larsen. 1988. Summer total phospho-
                                      rus in lakes: a map of Minnesota,  Wisconsin, and Michigan. Environ.  Manage.
                                      12:815-25.
                                  Omernik, JM. and A.L. Gallant 1990. Defining regions for evaluating environmental re-
                                      sources. In Global Natural Resource Monitoring and Assessments. Proc. Int. Conf.,
                                      Venice, Italy.
                                  Oregon Department of Environmental Quality. 1991. Biological Criteria-Implementation
                                      Plan. Draft. Portland, OR.
                                  Osbome, L.L. et al. 1991. Stream habitat assessment programs in states of the AFS north
                                      central division. Fisheries 16(3)28-35.
                                  Overton, J. 1991. Utilization of biological information in North Carolina's Water Quality
                                      Regulatory Program. In-Biological Criteria: Research and Regulation. Off. Sci. Tech-
                                      nol., VS. Environ. Prot. Agency, Washington, DC.

-------
                                                                                                   Heterences
 Padgett, W.G., A.P. Youngblood, and A.H. Winwood. 1989. Riparian Community Type
     Classification of Utah and Southeastern Idaho. R4-Ecol-89-01. Intermountain Res.
     Sta., Forest Serv., US. Dep. Agric. Ogden, UT.
 Pandit, A JC1984. Role of macrophytes in aquatic ecosystems and management of fresh-
     water resources. J. Environ. Manage. 18:73-88.
 Patrick, R. 1949. A proposed biological measure of stream conditions, based on a survey
     of the Conestoga Basin, Lancaster County, Pennsylvania. Notulae Naturae of the
     Nat Acad.Sd. Q 277, Philadelphia, 0,277.     V    -   •     .
 Paulsen, S.G. et al. 1991. EMAP-Surface Water Monitoring and Assessment Program *-•
     Fiscal Year 1991. EPA/600/3-91/022.  Off.  Res. Dev., US. Environ, Prot Agency,
     Washington, DC.
 Plaflan, J L. 1989. Water Quality-based controls  and ecosystem recovery. Pages 87-96 in
    J.Caims Jr., ed. Rehabilitating Damaged Ecosystems. VoL Z CRC Press, Boca Raton,
    FL.                          .                        '     -      .        :
 Plafkin, J.L. et al. 1989. Rapid Bioassessment Protocols for Use in Streams and Rivers:
    Benthic Maooinvertebrates and Fish. EPA/444/4-89-001. Off. Waten U5. Environ.
    Prot Agency, Washington, DC             ,                           v    -
 Platts, WS., WJF. Megahan, and G.W. MihshiilL 1983. Methods for Evaluating Stream,
    Riparian, and Biotic Conditions. Gen. Tech. Rep. INT-138. Intermountain Res. Sta.,
    Forest Serv., US. Dep. Agric., OgdeivOT.
 Platts, W.S. et aL 1987. Methods for Evaluating  Riparian Habitats with Applications to
    Management Rep. Int-221. Intermountain Res. Sta., Forest Serv., US. Dep. Agric.,
    Ogden,UT.
 Poff, N.L., N.J. Voetz, and J.V. Ward. 1990. Algal colonization under four experimentally
    controlled current regimes in a high mountain stream. J. N. Am. BenthoL Soc. 9-303-
    18.
 Pollard, J.E 1981. Investigator differences  associated with a kicking method for sam-
    pling maooinvertebrates. J. Freshw. EcoL 1215-24.
 Power, M.E. 1990. Effects of fish in river food webs. Science 250&11-14.
 Price, P.W. 1975. Insect Ecology. John Wiley, Sons, New York, NY.
Primrose, N.L. 1989. Routine Benthic Biomohitoring Protocol: A Proposal Maryland
    Dep. Environ., Annapolis, MD.
 Primrose, N.L, W.L. Butler,  and ES. Friedman. 1991.  Assessing biological integrity
    using EPA Rapid Bioassessment Protocol fl—The Maryland Experience. Pages 131-
    32 in Biological  Criteria: Research and Regulation. EPA/440/5-91-005. Off. Water,
    U.S. Environ. Prot. Agency, Washington, DC
Pringle,  CM. et al. 1988. Patch dynamics in lotic systems: the stream as a mosaic. J. N-
    Am. Benthol. Soc 7503-24.             ..._-.
Rankin,  E.T. 1989. The Qualitative Habitat Evaluation Index (QHEI): Rationale, Meth-
    ods, and Application. Div. Water QuaL Plann. Assess., Ohio Environ. Prot Agency,
    Columbus, OH.
Rankin, ET. 1991. The use of the qualitative habitat evaluation index for use  attainability
    studies in streams and rivers in Ohio. Page 133 in Biological Criteria: Research and
    Regulation. EPA-440/5-91-005. Off. Wateiv U.S. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington,
    DC                                             .
Rankin,  E.T. and C. Yoder. 1991. Calculation and uses of the area of degradation value
    (ADV). In Ohio Water Resource Inventory. Exec. Sum. and VoL 1. Ohio Environ.
    Prot. Agency, Columbus, OH.         '                            .   s
	—. 1992. Summary, Status and Trends. In Ohio Water Resource Inventory, VoL 1.
    Ohio Environ. Prot Agency, Columbus, OH.                           .

-------
Technical Guidance for Streams and Small Rivers
                                 Reckhow, K. In review. Biological Criteria: Technical Guidance for Survey Design and
                                     Statistical Evaluation for Biosurvey Data. Off. Res. Dev., Off. Sd. Technol., UJS. En-
                                  .   viron. Prot Agency, Washington, DC.
                                 Resh, V.H.  and  JJC Jackson. 1993. Rapid  assessment  approaches in  benthic
                                     macroinvertebrate biomonitoring studies. In D.M. Rosenberg and VH. Resh, eds.
                                     Freshwater Biomoratoring and Benthjc Macroinvertebrates. Chapman and Hall,
                                     NewYork,NY.
                                 Rohm, CM., J.W. Glese, and CC Bennett 1987. Evaluation of an aquatic ecoregion clas-
                                     sification of streams in Arkansas. Freshw. Ecol. 4iI27-40.
                                 Rosgen, D.L. 1994. A classification of natural rivers. Catena 22:169-99.
                                 Schelske, CL. 1984. hi situ and natural phytoplankton assemblage bioassays. Pages 15-
                                     47 in LE Shubert ed. Algae as Ecological Indicators. Academic Press, London, En-
                                     gland.
                                 Sdence Advisory Board. 1993. Evaluation of Draft Technical Guidance on Biological Cri-
                                     teria for Streams and Small Rivers (prep, by the biological criteria subcommittee of
                                     the ecological processes and effects committee). An SAB Rep. EPA-SAB-EPEC-94-
                                     003. VS. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC
                                 Schuster, E.G. and HJL Zuuring. 1986. Quantifying the ^quantifiable: or have you
                                     stopped abusing measurement scale? J. Forest 198625-30.
                                 Seddon, F. 1972. Aquatic macrophytes as limnological indicators. Freshw. BioL 2:107-30.
                                 Shacklefbrd, B. 1988.  Rapid Bioassessments of Lotic Maaoinvertebrate  Communities:
                                     Biocriteria Development Arkansas Dep. Pollut. Control EcoL, Little Rock, AR.
                                 Simon, A. and CR. Hupp. 1987. Geomorphic and vegetative recovery processes along
                                     modified Tennessee streams: an interdisciplinary approach to disturbed fluvial sys-
                                     tems. Int Ass. HydroL Sci. 167:251-262.
                                 Smith, R.L. 1974. Ecology and Field Biology. 2nd ed. Harper & Row, New York, NY.
                                 Smith, GJL, J.N. Taylor, and T.W. Grimshaw. 1981. Ecological survey of fishes in the Rai-
                                     sin River drainage, Michigan. Mich. Acad. 13275-305.
                                 Smith, F., S. Kulkarni, L.E. Myers, and M.J. Messner. 1988. Evaluating and presenting
                                      quality assurance data. Pages 157-68 in LH. Keith, ed. Principles of Environmental
                                      Sampling. ACS Prof. Ref. Book. Am. Chem. Soc, Washington, DC.
                                 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 1989.17th ed. Joint
                                      Editorial Board,  Am. Pub. Health Ass., Am. Water Works Ass., and Water Pollut.
                                      Control Fed., Washington, DC.
                                  Steedman, R.J. 1988. Modification and assessment of an index of biotic integrity to quan-
                                      tify stream quality in southern Ontario. Can. J. Fish. Aquat Sd.  45:492-501.
                                  Steinman, A.D. and CJD. Mclntire. 1986. Effects of current velocity and light energy on
                                      the structure of periphyton assemblages in laboratory streams. J. Phycol. 22552-61,
                                  	1987. Effects  of irradiance on the community structure and  biomass of algal as-
                                      semblages in laboratory streams. Can. J. Fish. Aquat. Sci. 44:1640-48.
                                  Steinman, A.D. et aL 1987. Effects of herbivore type and density on  taxonomic structure
                                      and physiognomy of algal assemblages in laboratory streams. J. N. Am. Benthol.
                                      Soc 6:175-88.                           :   .
                                  Steinman,  A.D. and AJ. Parker. 1990. Influence of substrate conditioning on periphytic
                                      growth in a heterotrophic woodland stream. J. N. Am. Benthol. Soc. 9:170-79.
                                  Stevenson, R.J. 1990. Benthic algal community dynamics im a stream during and  after a
                                      spate. J. N. Am.  BenthoL Soc. 9277-88.
                                  Stribling, J.B. and M.T. Barbour. 1991. Application of QA concepts from the third ecolog-
                                      ical workshop to^ long-term aquatic field assessment pilot study. Proc. 4th Ecologi-
                                      cal Q A Workshop. US. Environ. Prot. Agency, Environ. Can., Cincinnati, OH.

-------
                                                                                                  References
Tauber, M.J., C.A. Tauber, and S. Masaki. 1986. Seasonal Adaptations of Insects. Oxford
    Univ. Press, New York, NY.
Tetra Tech, Inc 1993. Evaluation of combined sewer overflows (CSOs) in Ohio using
    rapid bioassessment protocols (RBPs). Draft Rep. Off. Set Technol. and Off. Wet-
    lands, Oceans and Watersheds. US. Environ. Prot Agency, Washington, DC.
Townsend, C.R. 1989. The patch dynamics concept of stream community ecology. J. N.
    Am. Benthol. Soc. 8:36-50.                           .
Ulanowicz, R.E. 1990. Ecosystem integrity and network theory. Pages 69-77 in CJ. Ed-
    wards and H.A. Regier, eds. An Ecosystem Approach to the Integrity of the Great
    Lakes in Turbulent Times. Spec. Pub. 90-4. Great Lakes Fish. Comm., Ann Arbor,
    ML
US. Department of Agriculture.  1981. Land resource regions and major land resource
    areas of the United States. Agricultural Handbook 296. US. Gov. Print Off., Wash-
    ington, DC                             -             •
US. Environmental Protection Agency. 1980a. Guidelines and Specifications for Prepar-
    ing Quality Assurancei Program Plans. QAM5-004/80. Washington, DC
   '     i980b. Interim Guidelines and Specifications for Preparing Quality Assurance
    Project Plans. QAMS-005/80. Washington, DC
—	. 1983. Technical Support Manual: Waterbody Surveys and Assessments for Con-
    ducting Use Attainability Analyses. VoL 1-3. Off. Water  Reg. Stand., Washington,
    DC          .        .               .                  '      .'...-'
	. I984a. Policy and Program Requirements to Implement the Quality Assurance
    Program..EPA Order 5300.1.  Washington, DC
	. 1984b. The Development of Data Quality Objectives. Qual. Assur. Manage. Staff,
    DQO Workgroup, Washington, DC
	. 1984c Guidance for Preparation of Combined Work/Quality Assurance Project
    Plans for Environmental Monitoring.  Rep. OWRS QA-1. Washington, DC
	. i985a. Technical  Support Document for Water Quality-based Toxics Control.
    EPA/440/4^85/03. Washington DC.
	:. 1985b. Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents to Freshwater and
    Marine Organisms. EPA/600/4-85/013. Cincinnati, OR
	-,, 1986. Development of Data Quality Objectives—Descriptions of Stages I and H.
     QuaL Assur. Manage. Staff, Washington, DC.
    •    I987a  Report of the National Workshop on In-stream Biological Monitoring and
     Criteria. In-stream Biol. Criteria Comm., Off. Water Reg. Stand., Environ. Res. Lab.,
     Reg. 5, Corvallis, OR.
   •• •  . I987b. Surface Water Monitoring: A Framework for Change. Off. Water, Off. Pol-
     icy Planiu Eval., Washineton,'DG.             '
 ——.1988.  Proceedings of  the First National Workshop on Biological  Criteria,
     Lincolnwood, Illinois, December 2-4,1987. Rep. 905/9-89/003. Chicago, IL.
 	. 1989.  Short-term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and
     Receiving Water to Freshwater  Organisms. EPA/600/4-89/001. Environ. Monitor.
     Systems Lab., Cincinnati, OH.                                          -
 	. 1990. Biological Criteria: National Program Guidance for Surface Waters. EPA-
 •    440/5-90-004. Off. Water, Washington, DC
 	. I99la. Biological Criteria: State Development and Implementation Efforts. EPA-
     440/5-91-003. Off. Water, Washington, DC          "
 	. 199ib. Biological Criteria Guide  to Technical Literature. EPA-440/5-91-004. Off.
     Water, Washington, DC.                        „ •  .
 	. I99lc. Technical Support Document  for Water .Quality-based Toxics Control.
      EPA-505/2-90-001. Off. Water, Washington, DC.

-------
3ICLOGICAL CRITERIA.
Technical Guidance lor Streams and Small Rivers
                                 	. 1991d. Biological Criteria: Research and Regulation Proceedings of the Sympo-
                                     sium. EPA-440/5-91-005. Off. Water, Washington, DC.
                                 	. 1991e. Report of the ecoregions subcommittee of the ecological processes and ef-
                                     fects committee. Evaluation of the Ecoregion Concept EPA-SAB-EFEC-91-003.
                                     WashingtoiCDC.                  .
                                 	. 1991f. The Watershed Protection approach:  An Overview. EPA 503/9-92/002.
                                     Off. Water, Washington, DC
                                 	. 1993. The Watershed Protection approach. Annual Report 1992. EPA 840-S-
                                     93/001. Off. Water, Washington, DC      .
                                 US. Government Printing Office. 1988. The dean Water Act as amended by the Water
                                     Quality Act of 1987. Public Law 1004. Washington, DC',
                                 Vannote, R.L. et aL 1980. The river continuum concept Can. J. Fish. AquatSd. 37:130-37.
                                 Weber, CL1973. Biological monitoring of its aquatic environment by the Environmental
                                     Protection Agency. In Biological Methods for the Assessment of Water Quality.
                                     ASTM STP 528. Am. Soc Test Mater., Philadelphia, PA.
                                 Wallace, AJL1869. The Malay Archipelago. MacMUlan, London, England.
                                 Westlake, D J. 1975. Macrophytes. Pages 106-28 in B.A. Whitton, ed. River Ecology. Univ.
                                     California Press, Berkeley.                          '
                                 WhirderTTJL, R.M. Hughes, and DP. Larsen. 1988. Correspondence between ecoregions
                                     and spatial patterns in stream ecosystems  in  Oregon.  Can. J. Fish.  Aquat Sd.
                                     45:1264-78.
                                 Wflhelm, G. and D. Ladd. 1988. Natural Area Assessment in the Chicago Region. Pages
                                     361-75 in Trans. 53rd N. Am. WildL Nat Resour. Conf.
                                 Wilhm, LL. and T.C. Dorris. 1968. Biological parameters of water quality criteria. BioS-
                                     cience 18:477-81.
                                 Williams, CE. and.A.L, Caskey. 1965. Soil fertility and cottontail fecundity in southeast-
                                     em Missouri. Am. Midi. Nat 74211-24.
                                 Wright, LF., D. Moss, RD. Armitage, and M.T. Furse. 1984. A preliminary classification of
                                     running-water sites in Great Britain based on macroinvertebrate species and me
                                     prediction of community type using environmental data. Freshw. BioL 14221-56.
                                 Yankey, R. et aL  1991. Rock Creek: Rural dean  Water Program. Final Report 1981 —
                                     April 1991. Agrie. StabiL Conserv. Serv., Soil Conserv. Serv., Agric. Res. Serv., US.
                                     Dep. Agric, Idaho Div. •Environ. QuaL, Twin Falls and Snake River Soil Conserv..
                                     Dist, Twin Falls, ID.                                               '
                                 Yoder, C.0.1991. The integrated biosurvey as a tool for evaluation of aquatic life use at-
                                     tainment and impairment in Ohio Surface Waters. In Biological Criteria: Research
                                     and Regulation. EPA-440/5-91^005. Off. Water, US. Environ. Prot Agency, Wash-
                                     ington, DC

-------